B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.

C building

DILLA UNIVERSITY
COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING AND TECHNOLOGY
SCHOOL OF CIVIL ENGINEERING
B.Sc. THESIS PROJECT ON STRUCTURAL
ANALYSIS AND DESIGN OF B+G+5 R.C BUILDING
PROJECT REPORT
STRUCTURAL ADVISOR: - SULTAN M (M.Sc.)
GEOTECHNICAL ADVISOR: - BRUK G (M.Sc.)

PREPERD BY: -
Students name ID
1. DANIEL YILKAL RTCH-5687/17
2. BINIAM GETACHEW RTCH-3485/17
3. SENAIT ABIY RTCH-1600/17
4. EMEBET TAREKEGN RTCH-7016/17
5. ABINET NIBRAT RTCH-0042/16

SUBMISION DATE: - 13/10/2014 EC

DILLA, ETHIOPIA (2014 EC.)

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page I

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

DECLARATION
We declare that this design project entitled as Structural design of a B+G+5 hotel building which
is located in DILLA town is our own original work carried out at Dilla University under the
group leader of student Daniel Yilkal and guidance of Instructor Mr. Sultan M(structural
advisor) and Mr. Bruk G (geotechnical advisor) during the whole project time.

Students:
1. DANIEL YILKAL date _______________ sig_______________

2. BINIAM GETACHEW date _______________ sig_______________

3. SENAIT ABIY date _______________ sig_______________

4. EMEBET TAREKEGN date _______________ sig_______________

5. ABINET NIBRAT date _______________ sig_______________

Advisor:
Mr. SULTAN M (M.Sc) date _______________ sig_______________

And…
Mr. BRUK G (M.Sc) date _______________ sig_______________

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page I

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Acknowledgment
First and foremost we want to thank Almighty GOD for endowing us with courage, strength as
well as health throughout our time. Secondly we would like to express our deep sense of
gratitude towards our advisors Inst. SULTAN ,M (M.Sc) , BRUK G (M.Sc) other instructors for
their professional guidance and valuable advice for the successful accomplishment on each duty
they gave us. In addition, we express our great thanks to all of all the people how had helped us
to complete this project like civil engineering staff.
And special thanks for instructor MASRESHA (M.Sc) because he makes a difference in our
software knowledge’s especially in ETABS.
Finally, we would like to dedicate this project to our group members whose moral & material
support kept us through up and downs of our academic life and to our families for their moral
and material support.

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page II

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Executive summary
This project deals about the structural analysis and design of a B+G+5 hotel building considering
all the external and internal effects that the building receives in its service year according to ES
EN 2015. This project is located in DILLA city at 1570m above sea level. This document
contains proper design for each structural component and members of the building as follows;
1) Structural planning.
2) Roof slab analysis and design.
3) Slab analysis and design.
4) Stair analysis and design.
5) Frame analysis.
6) Beam analysis and design.
7) Colum analysis and design.
8) Shear wall analysis and design.
9) Foundation analysis and design.
10) Retaining wall analysis and design.
And also consists frame analysis and also earthquake analysis in order to know or enables to the
structural stability by knowing the center of mass of each floors and its center of stiffens. The
body also consists software results from ETABS.

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page III

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

CURRICULUM VITAE

PERSONAL INFORMATION:
Name: Daniel Yilkal
Nationality: Ethiopian
Gender: Male
Age: 23
Marital Status: Single
Date of Birth: 02/04/1999
Place of Birth: Debre Markos
Address: east gojjam, debre markos, Keble 05, village 07
Phone: +251-96-104-9018
E-mail: [email protected] or [email protected]
EDUCATIONAL BACKGROUND:
Elementary: Del Betgel Primary School (1998-2005 E.C)
High School: Menkorer High School (2006-2007 E.C)
Preparatory: Debre Markos Preparatory School (2008-2009 E.C)
Higher Education: Dilla University (2010-2014 E.C)
WORK EXPERINCE:
 Industrial Internship. Duration 4 Months (15th June 2013-28th September 2014 E.C)
QUALIFICATION:
Bachelor of Science (B.Sc.) In Civil Engineering from Dilla University with CGPA of 3.54.
PERSONAL SKILL AND COMPETENCE:
 Communication skills: I have good communication skills. Whether it’s on the phone,
via email, or face-to-face.
 Interpersonal skills: I have excellent interpersonal skills, demonstrated by
communicating with clients, colleagues and non-technical professionals on a daily basis.
 Flexibility/adaptability: I have the ability to work individually without direct
supervision and also as a dedicated member of a technical team whenever required.

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page IV

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

 Writing: I have the ability to write clear and concise report, documents, emails and
letters.
 Data entry: I have the ability to type-up large amounts of data into electronic systems
without mistakes.
 Research: I have the ability to conduct scientific research into a verity of subjects and
issues.
 Leadership skills: I have experience leading people as I was team leader on a number of
projects during my university studies.
LANGUAGE:
language Reading Listening Writing Speaking
Amharic Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent
English Excellent Excellent Excellent Very good

COMPUTER SKILLS:
 Proficient with Microsoft word, excel and power point.
 Created and formatted takeoff sheet and bar schedule.
 Wrote, edited and formatted documents on Microsoft word.
 Using design software such as ETABS, SAP, SAFE,
 ETABS structural analysis and design software, SAFE structural analysis and design
software, Construction materials quantity surveying, AutoCAD software, Civil 3D road
design software, Eagle point road design software, Microsoft office software, Adobe
Photoshop software, Fast computer typing, Structural detailing works on AutoCAD.
THESIS WORK:
Thesis title: B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building.
CERTIFICATIONS:
Certification of Ethiopian occupational standard for basic building construction
level: I (one) National qualification certificate from Federal Democratic republic of
Ethiopia technical and vocation education and training (TVET) Agency on Jan 2022.
Certification of Ethiopian occupational standard for masonry level: II (two) National
qualification certificate from Federal Democratic republic of Ethiopia technical and
vocation education and training (TVET) Agency on Feb 2022.

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page V

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Certification of ETABS, SAFE, CONMIS, Quantity Surveying and AutoCAD

Software Training from CENGG Software solution.
Certificate of recognition from The Federal Democratic republic of Ethiopia office of
reconciliation commission.
HOBBIES AND INEREST:
 Eager To Learn and Practice In Civil Engineering Software.
 Listening Media and Reading Books and Journals on Scientific Innovations.
 Conduct Project/ Thesis and Write Books Related To Civil Engineering Profession.
 Carryout The Responsibilities On Which I Assigned In A Well Manner.
REFERENCE:
 Mr. Sultan Mohammed (M.Sc. Dilla University School of Civil Engineering B.Sc. Thesis
Project Advisor.)
Email: [email protected]
Phone: +251-93-525-7300
 Mr. Tesfaye Tolosa (M.Sc. Dilla University College of Engineering and Technology
School Of Civil Engineering Road and Transportation Chair)
Email: [email protected]
Phone: +251-91-031-8019

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page VI

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

TABEL OF CONTENT
DECLARATION ............................................................................................................................. I
Acknowledgment ............................................................................................................................ II
Executive summary....................................................................................................................... III
TABEL OF CONTENT ............................................................................................................... VII
List of tables ................................................................................................................................. XII
List of figures ............................................................................................................................ XVII
CHAPTER ONE ............................................................................................................................. 1
STRUCTURAL PLANNING ......................................................................................................... 1
1.1. Introduction ...................................................................................................................... 1

1.2. Project Back Ground and Technical Information ............................................................ 9

1.3. Design criteria of the building........................................................................................ 10

1.3.1. Design considerations ............................................................................................. 10

1.4. Material Properties ......................................................................................................... 11

1.5. Design philosophy .......................................................................................................... 14

1.6. Design Codes.................................................................................................................. 15

CHAPTER TWO .......................................................................................................................... 16

ANANYSIS AND DESIGN OF ROOF SLAB ............................................................................ 16
2.1. INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................. 16

2.2. Method of wind load Analysis ........................................................................................... 16

2.3. Wind Load Analysis ....................................................................................................... 18

2.3.1. External Pressure .................................................................................................... 18

2.3.2. Internal Wind Pressure ............................................................................................ 31

2.4. Determination of governing concrete cover ................................................................... 45

2.5. FLAT ROOF SLAB DESIGN ........................................................................................... 47

2.5.1. Layout and naming of roof slab .................................................................................. 47

2.5.2 Computation of Depth for Deflection .......................................................................... 48

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page VII

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

2.5.3. Loading of roof slabs .................................................................................................. 51

2.5.4. Moment Analysis ........................................................................................................ 53

2.5.5. Moment adjustment for roof slab ................................................................................ 62

2.5.6. Flexural Reinforcement design for roof slab .............................................................. 67

2.5.7. Load Transfer to the Supporting Beams ..................................................................... 74

2.5.8. Verification of the shear resistance for each floor slabs ............................................. 79

2.5.9. Laps ............................................................................................................................. 81

CHAPTER THREE ...................................................................................................................... 86

ANALYSIS AND DESIGN OF SLAB ........................................................................................ 86
3.1. Introduction ........................................................................................................................ 86

3.2. Slab layout and naming .................................................................................................. 87

3.3. Determination of governing concrete cover ................................................................... 92

3.4. Computation of effective depth for deflection ............................................................... 93

3.5. Loading of slab ............................................................................................................... 98

3.5.1. Live load analysis ................................................................................................. 100

3.5.2. Dead load analysis ................................................................................................ 103

3.5.3. Partition wall load computation ............................................................................ 113

3.5.4. Design load for each panel .................................................................................... 115

3.6. Moment analysis .......................................................................................................... 117

3.6.1. Moment analysis for each floor for two way slab using coefficient method ........ 119

3.6.2. Moment calculation for one way cantilever slabs ................................................. 123

3.6.3. Moment calculation for S-2 using strip method ................................................... 124

3.7. Moment adjustment ...................................................................................................... 132

3.7.1. Support moment adjustment ................................................................................. 132

3.7.2. Span moment adjustment ...................................................................................... 135

3.8. Slab reinforcement design ............................................................................................ 146

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page VIII
B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

3.9. Load Transfer to the Supporting Beams ...................................................................... 157

3.10. Verification of the shear resistance for each floor slabs ........................................... 166

3.11. Laps .......................................................................................................................... 171

CHAPTER FOUR ....................................................................................................................... 179

ANALYSIS AND DESIGN OF STAIRCASE........................................................................... 179
4.1. Introduction ...................................................................................................................... 179

4.2. Analysis of Stair-case ...................................................................................................... 179

4.2.1. Stair geometric data .................................................................................................. 180

4.2.2. Determination of depth for deflection....................................................................... 181

4.2.3. Load computation on stair ........................................................................................ 182

4.2.4. Moment analysis ....................................................................................................... 184

4.3. Checking of depth for flexure for staircase...................................................................... 185

4.4. Staircase Reinforcement .................................................................................................. 185

CHAPTER FIVE ........................................................................................................................ 188

FRAME ANALAYSIS ............................................................................................................... 188
5.1. Introduction ...................................................................................................................... 188

5.2. Method of analysis ........................................................................................................... 190

5.2.1. Criteria for structural regularity ................................................................................ 190

5.3. Safety Verifications ......................................................................................................... 198

5.3.1. Resistance Condition ................................................................................................ 198

5.4. Lateral Loads ................................................................................................................... 200

5.4.1. Earthquake Analysis ................................................................................................. 201

5.4.2. Center Of Stiffness for Each Floor ........................................................................... 214

5.4.3. Wind Load analysis on Wall ..................................................................................... 226

5.5. Modeling and Analysis of Structural Buildings............................................................... 231

5.5.1. Modeling Description ............................................................................................... 233

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page IX

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

5.5.2. Procedures of modeling by using ETABS software ................................................. 234

CHAPTER SIX ........................................................................................................................... 244

ANALAYSIS AND DESIGN OF BEAM .................................................................................. 244
6.1. Introduction ...................................................................................................................... 244

6.2. Cover Design for Beams .................................................................................................. 247

6.3. Load on Beams ................................................................................................................ 248

6.3.1. Dead load on the beam for each floor ....................................................................... 248

6.4. Design of beams for flexure............................................................................................. 251

6.5. Design of beam for shear ................................................................................................. 262

6.6. Anchorages and laps ........................................................................................................ 267

6.6.1. Anchorage of longitudinal reinforcement ................................................................. 267

6.6.2. Laps ........................................................................................................................... 271

CHAPTER SEVEN .................................................................................................................... 278

ANALYSIS AND DESIGN OF COLUMN ............................................................................... 278
7.1. Introduction ...................................................................................................................... 278

7.2. Design of Columns .......................................................................................................... 281

7.2.1. Design procedure ...................................................................................................... 281

7.2.2. Uniaxial column design for C-8(interior column) .................................................... 285

7.2.3. Biaxial column design for C-16(corner column) ...................................................... 297

7.2.4. Uniaxial column design for C-20(edge column) .................................................. 307

7.3. Lateral reinforcement for column .................................................................................... 317

CHAPTER EIGHT ..................................................................................................................... 320

SHEAR WALL ANALYSIS AND DESIGN ............................................................................. 320
8.1. INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................... 320

8.2. Design procedures ............................................................................................................ 322

CHAPTER NINE ........................................................................................................................ 328

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page X

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

ANALAYSIS AND DESIGN OF FOUNDATION ................................................................... 328

9.1. Introduction ...................................................................................................................... 328

9.2. Design of Footing ............................................................................................................ 337

9.3. DESIGN OF FOOTING (F-1) ......................................................................................... 338

9.4. DESIGN OF FOOTING (F-2) ......................................................................................... 345

9.5. DESIGN OF FOOTING (F-3) ......................................................................................... 350

9.6. DESIGN OF FOOTING (F-4) ......................................................................................... 354

9.7. FOR FOOTING (F-5) ...................................................................................................... 358

9.8. DESIGN OF CF-1............................................................................................................ 361

9.9. DESIGN OF CF-2............................................................................................................ 368

CHAPTER TEN.......................................................................................................................... 383

ANALYSIS AND DESIGN OF RETAINING WALL .............................................................. 383
10.1. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 383

10.2. Forces on Retaining Walls ............................................................................................. 385

10.3. Stability of Retaining Walls ........................................................................................... 386

10.4. Retaining walls design procedures................................................................................. 387

10.5. Retaining wall design ..................................................................................................... 388

CHAPTER ELEVEN .................................................................................................................. 394

CONCLUSION AND RECOMMENDATION .......................................................................... 394
11.1. Conclusion ..................................................................................................................... 394

11.2. Recommendation ........................................................................................................... 395

REFERENCE .............................................................................................................................. 396

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page XI

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

List of tables
Table 1.1. Property of C20/25 Concrete ....................................................................................... 12
Table 1.2. Property of C25/30 Concrete ...................................................................................... 13
Table 1.3. Property of C30/37 Concrete ...................................................................................... 13
Table 2.1. Values of Air Density ρ ............................................................................................... 19
Table 4.2. External Pressure Coefficients for flat roofs (ES EN-1 Part 1-4, Table 7.2) ............... 21
Table 2.3. Values of external pressure coefficient at 𝟎° ............................................................... 25
Table 2.4. Values of external pressure coefficient at 𝟏𝟖𝟎° .......................................................... 27
Table 2.5. Values of external pressure coefficient at 𝟗𝟎°............................................................. 29
Table 2.6.Values of external pressure coefficient at 𝟐𝟕𝟎° ........................................................... 31
Table 2.7. Values of external pressure coefficient at 𝟎° ............................................................... 35
Table 2.8. Values of external pressure coefficient at 𝟏𝟖𝟎° .......................................................... 38
Table 2.9.Values of external pressure coefficient at 𝟗𝟎° ............................................................. 40
Table 2.10Values of external pressure coefficient at 𝟐𝟕𝟎° .......................................................... 42
Table 2.11. Computation of effective depth for roof slabs ........................................................... 50
Table 2.12. Computation of span and filed moments by using coefficient method for roof one . 54
Table 2.13. Computation of span and filed moments by using coefficient method for roof two . 55
Table 2.14. Adjusted support moment for roof slab ..................................................................... 63
Table 2.15. Flexural Reinforcement calculation for the roof floor slab one(1) ............................ 70
Table 2.16. Reinforcement for strip method ................................................................................. 74
Table 2.17. Load Transfer to the Supporting Beams for roof floor slab one ................................ 76
Table 2.18. Load transfer to beam from one-way cantilever slab for roof floor slab .................. 78
Table 2.19. Values of the coefficient α6 ....................................................................................... 82
Table 3.5. computation of effective depth for deflection for ground floor slab .......................... 95
Table 3.6. computation of effective depth for deflection for 1st and 2nd floor slab ...................... 95
Table 3.7. computation of effective depth for deflection for 3rd floor slab ................................. 96
Table 3.8. computation of effective depth for deflection for 4th floor slab................................... 97
Table 3.9. Unit weight of construction materials .......................................................................... 98
Table 3.10. Categories of live loads qk (KN/m2) .......................................................................... 99
Table 3.11. computation of live load for ground floor slab ....................................................... 100
Table 3.12. computation of live load for 1st and 2nd floor slab ................................................... 100
[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page XII
B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Table 3.13. computation of live load for 3rd floor slab .............................................................. 101
Table 3.14. computation of live load for 4th floor slab ............................................................. 102
Table 3.15. dead load computation for ground floor slab .......................................................... 103
Table 3.16. dead load computation for 1st and 2nd floor slab ..................................................... 105
Table 3.17. dead load computation for 3rd floor slab ................................................................. 108
Table 3.18. dead load computation for 4th floor slab ................................................................. 110
Table 3.19. partition wall load computation for ground floor slab ............................................ 114
Table 3.20. partition wall load computation for 1st and 2nd floor slab ....................................... 114
Table 3.21. partition wall load computation for 3rd floor slab .................................................. 114
Table 3.22. partition wall load computation for 4th floor slab .................................................. 115
Table 3.23. design load for each panel for ground floor slab .................................................... 115
Table 3.24. design load for each panel for 1st and 2nd floor slab ............................................... 116
Table 3.25. design load for each panel for 3rd floor slab ........................................................... 116
Table 3.26. design load for each panel for 4th floor slab ........................................................... 117
Table 3.27. Identification of method of analysis for 4th floor slabs ........................................... 118
Table 3.28. Computation of span and filed moments for ground floor slab .............................. 120
Table 3. 29. Computation of span and filed moments for 1st and 2nd floor slab ........................ 120
Table 3.30. Computation of span and filed moments for 3rd floor slab ..................................... 121
Table 3.31. Computation of span and filed moments for 4th floor slab ..................................... 121
Table 3.32. Moment acting on the Cantilever for the ground floor slab ................................... 124
Table 3.33. Moment acting on the Cantilever for the 1st and 2nd floor slab............................... 124
Table 3.34. Moment acting on the Cantilever for the 3rd floor slab........................................... 124
Table 3.35. Moment acting on the Cantilever for the 4th floor slab ........................................... 124
Table 3.36. Moment adjustment for ground floor slab .............................................................. 133
Table 3.37. Moment adjustment for 1st and 2nd floor slab ......................................................... 133
Table3. 38. moment adjustment for 3rd floor slab...................................................................... 134
Table 3.39. moment adjustment for 4th floor slab ...................................................................... 134
Table 3.40. Flexural Reinforcement calculation for the ground floor slab ................................ 149
Table 3.41. Flexural Reinforcement calculation for 1st and 2nd floor slab................................. 151
Table 3.42. Flexural Reinforcement calculation for the 3rd floor slab ....................................... 152
Table 3.43. Flexural Reinforcement calculation for the 4th floor slab ....................................... 154

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page XIII

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Table 3.44. REINFORCEMENT FOR STRIP METHOD FOR S-2 ......................................... 157
Table 3. 45. Load Transfer to the Supporting Beams for ground floor slab .............................. 158
Table 3.46. Load Transfer to the Supporting Beams for 1st and 2nd floor slab .......................... 160
Table3. 47. Load Transfer to the Supporting Beams for 3rd floor slab ...................................... 162
Table 3.48. Load Transfer to the Supporting Beams for 4th floor slab ...................................... 163
Table 3.49. Load transfer to beam from one-way cantilever slab for ground floor slab ........... 165
Table 3.50. Load transfer to beam from one-way cantilever slab for 1st and 2nd floor slab ...... 166
Table3. 51. Load transfer to beam from one-way cantilever slab for 3rd floor slab .................. 166
Table 3.52. Load transfer to beam from one-way cantilever slab for 4th floor slab ................... 166
Table 3.53. Values of the coefficient α6 .................................................................................... 173
Table 5.1. Value of behaviour factor, qo for systems regular in elevation (ES EN-8 Table 5.1)189
Table 5.2. Slenderness Check for Regularity.............................................................................. 191
Table 5.3. Center of mass and center of rigidity and eccentricity of each floor ......................... 191
Table 5.4. Torsional stiffness to the lateral stiffness and torsional radius of each floor ............ 192
Table 5.5. Eccentricity and Torsional Radius Check .................................................................. 192
Table 5.6. Stiffness regularity check in EQ+X direction ............................................................ 194
Table 5.7. Stiffness regularity check in EQ-X direction ............................................................. 194
Table 5.8. Stiffness regularity check in EQ+Y direction ............................................................ 195
Table 5.9. Stiffness regularity check in EQ-Y direction ............................................................. 195
Table 5.10. Mass Regularity Check ............................................................................................ 196
Table 5.11. Consequences of Structural Regularity on Seismic Analysis and Design ............... 197
Table 5.12. Modal participating mass ratio ................................................................................ 197
Table 5.13. Stability Index Check in X-direction ....................................................................... 199
Table 5.14. Stability Index Check in Y-direction ....................................................................... 199
Table 5.15. Consideration of P-∆ effects Analysis Based on Values of θ .................................. 200
Table 5.16. Seismic parameters for the different ground types (ES EN-8, Table 3.1) ............... 202
Table 5.17. Parameters of the Elastic Response Spectrum Type 1 (ES EN-8, Table 3.2).......... 203
Table 5.18. Parameters of the Elastic Response Spectrum Type 2 (ES EN-8, Table 3.3).......... 204
Table 5.19. Self-weight of the building ...................................................................................... 206
5.20. Live load on structure ........................................................................................................ 208
Table 5.21. Live load incidence factor, ψ ................................................................................... 209

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page XIV

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

5.22. Distribution of base shear to each floor ............................................................................. 210

Table 5.23. Story stiffness result from ETABS .......................................................................... 223
Table 5.24. Center of mass and center of rigidity result from ETABS ...................................... 226
Table 5.25. Story Data this building model ................................................................................ 234
Table 5.26. Grid Data of this building model ............................................................................. 235
Table 5.27. Material Properties – Summary ............................................................................... 236
Table 5.28. Frame Sections - Summary ...................................................................................... 237
Table 5.29. Shell Sections - Summary ........................................................................................ 237
Table 5.30. Load Patterns ........................................................................................................... 238
Table 6.55. computation of dead load from parfait wall on roof beam ..................................... 249
Table 6.56. computation of dead load from partition wall on 4th floor beam ........................... 250
Table 6.57. computation of dead load from partition wall on 3rd floor beam ........................... 250
Table 6.58. computation of dead load from partition wall on 1st and 2nd floor beam ............... 251
Table 6.59. Basic ratios of span/effective depth for reinforced concrete members without axial
compression ................................................................................................................................ 253
Table 6.60. Flexural design for top tie beam on axis D ............................................................. 258
Table 6.61. Flexural design for top tie beam on axis 6 .............................................................. 259
Table 6.62. Flexural design for 4th floor beam on axis D ......................................................... 259
Table 6.63. Flexural design for 4th floor beam on axis 5 ........................................................... 260
Table 6.64. Flexural design for 3rd floor beam on axis D ......................................................... 260
Table 6.65. Flexural design for 3rd floor beam on axis 6 ........................................................... 260
Table 6.66. Flexural design for 1st and 2nd floor beam on axis D .............................................. 261
Table 6.67. Flexural design for 1st and 2nd floor beam on axis 5 ............................................... 261
Table 6.68. Flexural design for ground floor beam on axis D ................................................... 261
Table 6.69. Flexural design for ground floor beam on axis 5 .................................................... 262
Table 6.70. value of α1,α2,α3,α4,and α5 coefficients................................................................ 270
Table 6.71. Values of the coefficient ......................................................................................... 272
Table 7.1. Reinforcement design for footing column C-8,C-16 and C-20 ................................. 316
Table 7.2. Reinforcement design for basement column C-8,C-16 and C-20 .............................. 316
Table 7.3. Reinforcement design for first floor column C-8,C-16 and C-20.............................. 316
Table 7.4. Reinforcement design for second floor column C-8,C-16 and C-20 ......................... 317

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page XV

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Table 7.5. Reinforcement design for third floor column C-8,C-16 and C-20 ............................ 317
Table 7.6. Reinforcement design for forth floor column C-8,C-16 and C-20 ............................ 317
Table 72.7. Reinforcement design for roof floor column C-8,C-16 and C-20 ........................... 317
Table 9.73. footing grouping and its base reaction .................................................................... 336
Table 9.74. Total summary of footing ....................................................................................... 337

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page XVI

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

List of figures
Figure 1.1. Project architectural plan .............................................................................................. 3
Figure 1.2. Wrongly oriented columns ........................................................................................... 6
Figure 1.3. Final structural plan ..................................................................................................... 8
Figure 1.4. Compressive strength of concrete curve..................................................................... 11
Figure 1.5. Stress-strain curve of reinforcing steel ...................................................................... 13
Figure 2.1. Cd Values for Concrete and Masonry Buildings ........................................................ 17
Figure 2.2. Key for flat roof (ES EN -1 Part 1- 4, Figure -7.6) .................................................... 21
Figure 2.3. Variation of external pressure coefficient for buildings with size of the loaded area A.
....................................................................................................................................................... 22
Figure 2.4.Wind force direction on flat roof at 0o......................................................................... 24
Figure 2.5. Wind force direction on flat roof at 180o.................................................................... 26
Figure 2.6. Wind force direction on flat roof at 90o...................................................................... 28
Figure 2.7. Wind force direction on flat roof at 270o.................................................................... 30
Figure 2.8.Wind force direction on flat roof at 0o......................................................................... 35
Figure 2.9.Wind force direction on flat roof at 180o..................................................................... 37
Figure 2.10. Wind force direction on flat roof at 90o.................................................................... 39
Figure 2.11.Wind force direction on flat roof at 270o................................................................... 41
Figure 2.12. Layout and naming of roof slab 1............................................................................ 47
Figure 2.13. Layout and naming of roof slab 1............................................................................. 48
Figure 2.14. Moment distribution ................................................................................................. 54
Figure 2.15. Equivalent area conversion for RFS-2 ..................................................................... 58
Figure 2.16. Strip method boundary condition for slab with free edge in the long direction. ...... 58
Figure 2.17. Unadjusted moment for roof slab 1(KNm) .............................................................. 61
Figure 2.18. Adjusted roof slab moment for roof one ................................................................. 66
Figure 2.19. Adjusted roof slab moment for roof two ................................................................. 67
Figure 2.20. Distribution of load on a beam supporting a two-way spanning slab ...................... 75
Figure 2.21. Adjacent laps ............................................................................................................ 82
Figure 3.1. basement slab layout................................................................................................... 87
Figure 3.2. Ground floor slab layout ............................................................................................ 88
Figure 3.3. 1st and 2nd floor slab layout ......................................................................................... 89

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page XVII

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Figure 3.4. 3rd floor slab layout ..................................................................................................... 90

Figure 3.5. 4th floor slab layout .................................................................................................... 91
Figure 3.7. strip method boundary condition for slab with free edge in the long direction. ..... 125
Figure 3.6. Equivalent area conversion for S-2 ......................................................................... 125
Figure 3.8. unadjusted moment for ground floor slab ............................................................... 128
Figure 3.9. unadjusted moment for 1st and 2nd floor slab........................................................... 129
Figure 3.10. unadjusted moment for 3rd floor slab..................................................................... 130
Figure 3.11. unadjusted moment for 4th floor slab ..................................................................... 131
Figure 3.12. adjusted moment for ground floor slab ................................................................. 142
Figure 3.13. adjusted moment for 1st and 2nd floor slab............................................................. 143
Figure 3.14. adjusted moment for 3rd floor slab......................................................................... 144
Figure 3.15. adjusted moment for 4th floor slab ......................................................................... 145
Figure 3.16. distribution of load on a beam supporting a two-way spanning slab .................... 158
Figure 3.17. Adjacent laps ......................................................................................................... 172
Figure 4.1. Architectural layout of the staircase ......................................................................... 180
Figure 4.2. Stair geometry .......................................................................................................... 180
Figure 4.5. Shear force diagram for the staircase ...................................................................... 184
Figure 4.4 deformed shape of the stair........................................................................................ 184
Figure 4.3. Load on the staircase ................................................................................................ 184
Figure 4.6. Bending moment diagram for the staircase .............................................................. 184
Figure5.1. Structural types of moment resisting frames (ES EN-8) ........................................... 189
Figure 5.2. Shape of the Elastic Response Spectrum (ES EN-8, Figure 3.1) ............................. 203
Figure 5.3. Elastic Response Spectrum Type 1 for Damping 5% (ES EN-8, Figure 3.2) .......... 204
Figure 5.4. Elastic Response Spectrum Type 2 for Damping 5% (ES EN-8, Figure 3.3) .......... 205
Figure 5.5. Location of Seismic Loads on the Building ............................................................. 206
Figure 5.6. 3D model of B+G+ 5-hotel building ........................................................................ 232
Figure 5.7. Axial force result on axis D ...................................................................................... 240
Figure 5.8. Shear force result on axis D...................................................................................... 241
Figure 5.9. Moment 2-2 result on axis D .................................................................................... 242
Figure 5.10. Moment 3-3 result on axis D .................................................................................. 243
Figure 6.1. simple beam that supports its own dead weight, w per unit length ......................... 244

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page XVIII

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Figure 6.2. Bending moment diagram (M3-3 on axis D) .......................................................... 255

Figure 6.3. Internal forces in a cracked beam without web reinforcement ................................ 263
Figure 6.4. Shear force diagram of beam in axis D ................................................................... 264
Figure 6.5. Methods of anchorage other than by a straight bar (ES-EN 2 2015, 8.4) ................ 268
Figure 6.6. Adjacent laps ............................................................................................................ 272
Figure 7.1. Axial force on axis D............................................................................................... 283
Figure 7.2. Moment 2-2 on axis D .............................................................................................. 284
Figure 7.3. First floor column layout .......................................................................................... 285
Figure 7.4. Combo envelop max axial force ............................................................................... 288
Figure 7.5. Envelop max shear 2-2 ............................................................................................. 289
Figure 7.6. Envelop max moment 2-2 ........................................................................................ 289
Figure 7.7. Envelop max shear 2-2 ............................................................................................. 290
Figure 7.8. Envelop max moment 2-2 ........................................................................................ 290
Figure 7.9. Envelop max axial force for C-16 ............................................................................ 299
Figure 7.10. Envelop max moment 2-2 for C-16 ........................................................................ 300
Figure 7.11. Envelop max axial force for C-20 .......................................................................... 309
Figure 7.12. Envelop max moment 2-2 for C-20 ........................................................................ 310
Figure 8.1. 3D model of shear wall............................................................................................. 320
Figure 8.2. Axial and shear force on shear wall ......................................................................... 323
Figure 8.3. Moment 2-2 and moment 3-3 on shear wall ............................................................. 324
Figure 8.4. Detailing of shear wall.............................................................................................. 327
Figure 9.1. Isolated or spread footing ........................................................................................ 329
Figure 9.2. Combined footing .................................................................................................... 330
Figure 9.3. Cantilever or strap footing ........................................................................................ 330
Figure 9.4. Wall or continuous footing ...................................................................................... 331
Figure 9.5. Mat or raft footing ................................................................................................... 331
Figure 9.6. base reaction of this building................................................................................... 335
Figure 10.1. General proportioning of retaining wall ................................................................ 389
Figure 10.2. Proportioning of retaining wall ............................................................................. 390

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page XIX

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

CHAPTER ONE
STRUCTURAL PLANNING
1.1. Introduction
Structural design is the methodical investigation of the stability, strength and rigidity of
structures. The basic objective in structural analysis and design is to produce a structure capable
of resisting all applied loads without failure during its intended life. The primary purpose of a
structure is to transmit or support loads. If the structure is improperly designed or
fabricated, or if the actual applied loads exceed the design specifications, the device will
probably fail to perform its intended function, with possible serious consequences. A well-
engineered structure greatly minimizes the possibility of costly failures.
A structural design project may be divided into the following Phases,

1. Planning Phase:-The planning phase usually involves the establishment of the functional
requirements of the proposed structure, the general layout and dimensions of the
structure, consideration of the possible types of structures (e.g., rigid frame or truss) that
may be feasible and the types of materials to be used (e.g., structural steel or reinforced
concrete). This phase may also involve consideration of nonstructural factors, such as
aesthetics, environmental impact of the structure, and so on. The outcome of this phase is
usually a structural system that meets the functional requirements and is expected to be
the most economical. This phase is perhaps the most crucial one of the entire project and
requires experience and knowledge of construction practices in addition to a thorough
understanding of the behavior of structures.
2. Preliminary Structural Design: - In the preliminary structural design phase, the sizes of
the various members of the structural system selected in the planning phase are estimated
based on approximate analysis, past experience, and code requirements. The member
sizes thus selected are used in the next phase to estimate the weight of the structure.
3. Estimation of Loads: - Estimation of loads involves determination of all the loads that
can be expected to act on the structure.
4. Structural Analysis: - In structural analysis, the values of the loads are used to carry out
an analysis of the structure in order to determine the stresses or stress resultants in the
members and the deflections at various points of the structure.

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 1

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

5. Safety and Serviceability Checks: - The results of the analysis are used to determine
whether or not the structure satisfies the safety and serviceability requirements of the
design codes. If these requirements are satisfied, then the design drawings and the
construction specifications are prepared, and the construction phase begins.
6. Revised Structural Design: - If the code requirements are not satisfied, then the member
sizes are revised, and phases 3 through 5 are repeated until all the safety and
serviceability requirements are satisfied.
In this chapter our primary focus will be on the planning phase.
Any structural design project begins with architectural drawings and ends eventually with the
produced structural drawings. Therefore, these drawings are an essential associate to the
structural engineer throughout the span of the project, as they portray the features and conditions
of the structure through perceivable and manageable drawing sheets, and showcase the results of
all the design work conducted throughout. One of the integral and initial duties of a structural
engineer at the beginning of any project is to transform the primary architectural plan
into a structural plan. The structural plan serves as a good initiation step towards commencing
with the design procedures. Thus, it is crucial at this juncture to provide a detailed explanation
for both architectural and structural drawings, followed by a direct comparison between both.
At the very beginning of the Project, we were handed an architectural drawings (floor plans,
elevations, cross sections, specific details and etc...).We immediately started Study & understand
the architectural drawings Study & understand the architectural drawings.
The typical floor of the this building consisted of 14 shops, 9 bed rooms, 1 café and
restaurant with balconies, bathrooms and a kitchen. In addition to this, the building
consisted of 2 staircases and lift shear wall. Figure bellow shows the initial architectural plan
handed at the beginning of the project, and figure number 3 displays the produced project
structural plan.

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 2

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Figure 1.1. Project architectural plan

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 3

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

After study and understand an architectural plan of this building the structural planning of the
building frame is done. This involves the determination of the following:
1) Position and orientation of columns
The Following points are some of the building principles, which help in deciding the columns
positions.
 Columns should preferably be located at (or) near the corners of a building, and at the
intersection of beams/walls.
 Select the position of columns so as to reduce bending moments in beams.
 Avoid larger spans of beams.
 Avoid larger center-to-center distance between columns.
 Columns on property line.
Orientation of columns:
Avoid projection of columns:- The projection of columns outside the wall in the room should be
avoided as they not only give bad appearance but also obstruct the use of floor space, creating
problems in placing furniture flush with the wall. The width of the column is required to be kept
not less than 200mm to prevent the column from being slender.
The spacing of the column should be considerably reduced so that the load on column on each
floor is less and the necessity of large sections for columns does not arise.
Orient the column so that the depth of the column is contained in the major plane of bending or
is perpendicular to the major axis of bending.This is provided to increase moment of inertia and
hence greater moment resisting capacity. It will also reduce Leff/d ratio resulting in increase in
the load carrying capacity of the column.
Column orientation depends on Architectural and structural requirements. Architectural
requirements. Architectures are concerned with aesthetics and usability of space. and Structural
Engineers are concerned with stability, serviceability and strength.
2) Positioning of Beams
 Beams shall normally be provided under the walls or below a heavy concentrated load to
avoid these loads directly coming on slabs.
 Avoid larger spacing of beams from deflection and cracking criteria.

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 4

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

3) Spanning of Slabs
This is decided by supporting arrangements. When the supports are only on opposite edges or
only in one direction, then the slab acts as a one way supported slab. When the rectangular slab is
supported along its four edges it acts as a one way slab when Ly/Lx < 2.
The two way action of slab not only depends on the aspect ratio but also on the ratio of
reinforcement on the directions. In one way slab, main steel is provided along with short span
only and the load is transferred to two opposite supports. The steel along the long span just acts
as the distribution steel and is not designed for transferring the load but to distribute the load and
to resist shrinkage and temperature stresses.
Since, the slab is also supported over the short edge there is a tendency of the load on the slab by
the side of support to be transferred to the nearer support causing tension at top across this short
supporting edge.
Since, there does not exist any steel at top across this short edge in a one way slab
interconnecting the slab and the side beam, cracks develop at the top along that edge. The cracks
may run through the depth of the slab due to differential deflection between the slab and the
supporting short edge beam/wall.
Therefore, care should be taken to provide minimum steel at top across the short edge support to
avoid this cracking.

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 5

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Figure 1.2. Wrongly oriented columns

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 6

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

In this floor plan some columns are oriented in wrong direction. According to Architectural
requirement the column should not be projected out inside the building that will affect the
aesthetics of the building as well as the usage of the building. In this floor plan on axis 4 and 5 vs
with axis D, This columns are oriented in the right direction as per structural requirements. But
oriented in the wrong direction as per the architectural requirement.
Changing of the orientation of this column is not good from the aesthetic view (architectural
requirement). And even though what will happened is created obstruction in the usage of the
building. What will happened if we orient in this direction. This particular column needs little
more steel if we orient in the revers of this direction.
According to the structural requirement the columns should be oriented in such a way that, the
depth of the column should be perpendicular to the major axis of bending. In order to get the
grater moment of resistance.
Most of the columns in this floor plan are the longer width of the columns are oriented in the
horizontal longer span. This means the major axis of bending is perpendicular to the depth of the
column. So the column has to be oriented in such a way that the major axis of bending is
perpendicular to the depth of the column. That means the larger moment should be perpendicular
to the axis of bending. This is provided to increase the moment of inertia and hence greater
moment resisting capacity.
We have also provide additional column on axis 6 to reduce the beam span and to reduce the
bending moment in the beam.
Regarding beams, we chose to place them above walls. Furthermore, due to the omitting of some
columns, we decided on the beams that would be considered as primary beams and
those as secondary ones. Also, some additional beams were added in order to divide big spans of
slabs, to avoid any deflection concerns. Hence, the final positions for columns, cores, beams and
slabs
Were decided on, and it was instantly required to showcase these features through the structural
Plan.

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 7

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Figure 1.3. Final structural plan

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 8

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

1.2. Project Back Ground and Technical Information

The aim of this thesis project is, to examine the structural design techniques used in the design of
a building. Now a day’s it has being practical to choose types of structural members for different
criteria especially economy after assuring safety. This thesis project deals about the structural
analysis and design of G+5 hotel building considering all the external effects according to ES EN
2015.
Building structures are solids, which are composed of architectural and structural parts.
The structural part of the building supports the body of the building preventing it from any
collapse or failure. Therefore, structural design involves the determination of the different
sections of the skeletal part of the building to make it stable and sustainable throughout its design
life.
A structural design is executed in such a way that the building will remain fit with appropriate
degrees of reliability and in an economic way. It should sustain all the actions and influences
during execution and use. Therefore, structural design focuses on structural safety and
serviceability with due durability. It must also optimize the cost expended in building the
structure and maintenance.
The structural design of this building involves design flat roof slab, floor slabs, stairs,
beams, columns, shear walls, foundation and analysis of frames for lateral loads. The building is
composed of solid slab for the floors. This structural design is executed based on the Ethiopian
Standard based on Euro Norms (ES-EN) prepared in 2015 G.C. This code follows the Limit
State design approach. Limit state is a state beyond which the structure no longer satisfies the
design performance requirements. Its main concern is the safety of structure and people.
Serviceability Limit states are those associated to conditions beyond which a structure
does not accomplish specified service requirements. It is mainly concerned about the function of
construction works, comfort of people, and appearance. The design of any structure is
categorized in to functional design and structural design. The intended building for this project is
located in DILLA town.
The town is placed under a category III and Seismic zone 3 according to ES EN 1998:2015.
Hence,
analysis for the wind load becomes vital and the building shall be wind pressure load resistant,
which provides an adequate energy dissipation capacity to the structure without substantial

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 9

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

reduction of its overall resistance against external and internal wind pressure. The overall design
of a building includes design of roof slab, design of slab, design of beam, design of stair, design
of column, frame analysis, and design of foundation. The analysis will be compute using
applicable software ETAB 2016.
1.3. Design criteria of the building
Structures are designed in a way they can provide their intended service throughout their design
period safely. In doing so they should fulfill the following four requirements.
 Appropriateness: The arrangement of spaces, spans, ceiling heights, access, and traffic flow
must complement the intended use. The structure should fit its environment and be
aesthetically pleasing.
 Economy. The overall cost of the structure should not exceed the client’s budget. Frequently,
teamwork in design will lead to overall economies.
 Structural adequacy: Structural adequacy involves two major aspects. (a) A structure must be
strong enough to support all anticipated loadings safely. (b) A structure must not deflect, tilt,
vibrate, or crack in a manner that impairs its usefulness.
 Maintainability. A structure should be designed so as to require a minimum unit of simple
maintenance procedures.
1.3.1. Design considerations
a) Safety
When we talk about safety of structures we are talking about the low probability of partial or
complete collapse (failure) of the structure not only at service loads but also under extreme load
conditions such as earth quake and wind. The collapse of the structure may be due to
 The exceedance of the load caring capacity of the members, fatigue failure of members
,buckling of members and
 The overall instability of the structure, such as sliding and overturning
 A structure’s safety is insured by designing it to sustain the logical combination of all
loads acting on it.
b) Serviceability
Serviceability of a structure refers to its capacity to serve its intended purpose without creating
discomfort or stress on the users. Structures serviceability is checked under service loads.
The discomforts may be caused by:
 Excessive deflection

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 10

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

 Vibration
 Crack
 Insufficient acoustic insulation
 Insufficient thermal insulation and others.
1.4. Material Properties
a) Concrete
Compressive strength of concrete
Generally, the term concrete strength is taken to refer to the uniaxial compressive strength as
measured by a compression test of a standard test cylinder, because this test is used to monitor
the concrete. Strength for quality control or acceptance purposes. For convenience, other strength
parameters, such as tensile or bond strength, are expressed relative to the compressive strength.
For the usual range of concrete strengths, the strain at failure is in the range of 0.003 to 0.005.
The higher the concrete grade, in figure 1-1 the steeper is the initial portion of the stress-strain
curve, the sharper the peak of the curve, and the less the failure strain. For low-strength concrete,
the curve has a relatively flat top, and a high failure strain.

Figure 1.4. Compressive strength of concrete curve

Factors affecting concrete compressive strength
Water/Cement ratio, type of cement, supplementary cementations’ materials, aggregate, mixing
water, moisture conditions during curing, and temperature conditions during curing, age of
concrete, maturity of concrete and rate of loading.

Concrete in tension

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 11

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Concrete has a low failure strain in uniaxial tension. It is found to be in the range of 0.0001 to
0.0002. The stress-strain curve in tension is generally approximated as a straight line from the
origin to the failure point. The modulus of elasticity in tension is taken to be the same as that in
compression.
As the tensile strength of concrete is very low, and often ignored in design, the tensile stress-
strain relation is of little practical value.
Characteristic cube compressive strength (fcu): this is the strength of a 150mm cube concrete
specimen. This value is used to classify the grade of concrete. For example C-25 is concrete with
characteristics compressive strength of 25 MPa.
Characteristic cylinder compressive strength (fck): The size of the specimen is 150 mm
diameter cylinder with 300 mm height with h/d ratio of 2. 𝑓𝑐𝑘 = 0.8∗𝑓𝑐𝑢.

The compressive strength of concrete is denoted by concrete strength classes which relate to the
Characteristic (5%) cylinder strength fck, or the cube strength fck cube in accordance with EN
206-1
Characteristic tensile strength (fctk): conducting a direct tensile test on concrete does not
provide reliable results. According to EBCS-2 1995 in the absence of more accurate data fctk can
be calculated from the fck of the concrete using the formula 𝑓𝑐𝑡𝑘=0.21∗𝑓𝑐𝑘2/3.

Design strength (fcd): is the design strength of the concrete after reduction by partial safety
factor.
𝑓𝑐𝑑 =𝑓𝑐𝑘𝛾𝑐

Where,
𝛾𝑐 is the partial safety factor for concrete

𝛾𝑐=1.5 for class one works

𝛾𝑐=2 for class two works

We have used C-20/25 concrete for slab and stair, C-25/30 for beam and C-30/37 for column and
foundation. The properties of the concrete have summarized as follows:
Table 1.1. Property of C20/25 Concrete
Strength Standard value in Modules of Elasticity Poisson’s Weight
Class MPa Ec (GPa) ratio density kN/m3

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 12

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

fck fct,k,0.05
C20/25 20 1.5 30 0.2 25

Table 1.2. Property of C25/30 Concrete

Strength Standard value in Modules of Elasticity Poisson’s Weight
Class MPa Ec (GPa) ratio density kN/m3
fck fct,k,0.05
C25/30 25 1.5 31 0.2 25

Table 1.3. Property of C30/37 Concrete

Strength Standard value in Modules of Elasticity Poisson’s Weight
Class MPa Ec (GPa) ratio density kN/m3
fck fct,k,0.05
C30/37 30 1.5 31 0.2 25

b) Reinforcement steel
The stress-strain curve of reinforcing steel is obtained by performing a standard tension test.
Typical stress-strain curves for the three grades of steel are depicted in the figure 1-2.

Figure 1.5. Stress-strain curve of reinforcing steel

 The characteristics strength of steel is given as its grade.
We have used S-400 for slab and stair main reinforcement and for stirrup of beam and column,
and S-420 for column, beam and foundation main reinforcement.
For S-400 has a characteristics strength of 𝑓𝑦𝑘 = 400 𝑀𝑃𝑎

For S-420 has a characteristics strength of 𝑓𝑦𝑘 = 420 𝑀𝑃𝑎

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 13
B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Design tensile strength (fyd)

𝑓𝑦𝑑=𝑓𝑦𝑘/𝛾𝑠

Where
𝛾𝑠 - the partial safety factor for steel which is equal to 1.15 𝐸𝑆 = 200𝐺𝑃𝑎

For S-400, 𝑓𝑦𝑑 = 400/1.15 = 347.83 𝑀𝑃𝑎

For S-420, 𝑓𝑦𝑑 = 420/1.15 = 365.22 𝑀𝑃𝑎

1.5. Design philosophy

There are four major design philosophies in the design of RC
1. Working stress method of design (WSM)
2. Ultimate load method (ULM)
3. Reliability - based methods (RBM)
4. Limit states method (LSM)
Working stress method of design (WSM)
In this method basically assumes that the structural material behaves in a linear elastic manner,
and that adequate safety can be ensured by suitably restricting the stresses in the material
induced by the expected “working loads’ (service loads) on the structure.
Ultimate load method (ULM)
In this method the load acting is increased by multiplying it with a factor of safety while using
the ultimate strength of the material. Disadvantage of ULMthe satisfactory ‘strength’
performance at ultimate loads does not guarantee satisfactory ‘serviceability’ performance atthe
normal service loads. The designs sometimes result in excessive deflections and crack-widths
under service loads, owing to the slender sections resulting from the use of high strength
reinforcing steel and concrete

Limit states method (LSM)

In this method a partial factor of safety is applied to both the load and the material’s strength.
The Euro code Standard is based on the limit state design philosophy. Limit state of reinforced
concrete structures can be grouped in to the following three groups:-
 Ultimate limit states
Involve a structural collapse of part or all of the structure. Such a limit state should have a very
low probability of occurrence, because it may lead to loss of life and major financial losses

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 14

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

including: Loss of equilibrium, Rupture, Progressive collapse, Formation of a plastic,

Mechanism, Instability and Fatigue.
 Serviceability limit states
Involve disruption of the functional use of the structure, but not collapse. Because there is less
danger of loss of life, a higher probability of occurrence can generally be tolerated than in the
Case of an ultimate limit state including: Excessive deflections, Excessive crack widths and
Undesirable vibrations.
 Special limit states
Involves damage or failure due to abnormal conditions or abnormal loadings including:
 Damage or collapse in extreme earthquakes,
 Structural effects of fire, explosions, or vehicular collisions
 Structural effect of corrosion or deterioration
 Long – term physical or chemical instability
N.B. The limit state design philosophy will be in the design of the building.
 Euro code’s recommendations for limit states design
The main actions to be used in load cases used for design are: - Permanent actions G: e.g. self‐
weight of structures and fixed equipment; Variable actions Q: e.g. imposed loads on building
floors and beams; snow loads on roofs; wind loading on walls and roofs Accidental actions.

1.6. Design Codes

The building will be analyzed in accordance with the Ethiopian standards. The following parts of
the Ethiopian standards are used:
 ES EN 0: Basis of Structural Design
 ES EN 1: Actions on Structures (Part 1.1, 1.2, 1.4, 1.5, 1.7)
 ES EN 2: Design of Concrete Structures (Part 1, 1.1 and 1.2)
 ES EN 7: Design of Foundation (Part 1)
 ES EN 8: Design of Structures for Earthquake Resistance (Part 1 and 5)

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 15

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

CHAPTER TWO
ANANYSIS AND DESIGN OF ROOF SLAB
2.1. INTRODUCTION
Roof is mainly designed for wind load and self-weight of the roof. Therefore, analysis of wind
load is required to design the roof. Wind loads are dynamic loads and there are two methods of
analysis of dynamic loads. The first method is Quasi-Static method which is applied to stiff
structures in which the movement of the structure with wind is negligible. The second method of
wind load analysis is the dynamic analysis in which the movement of structures with wind loads
in considered.
Wind is a moving air which in turn possesses energy and this kinetic energy should be resisted
by using appropriate design for different kind of structural elements like roofs, walls. The action
of wind can be a type of suction or pressure to our structures both externally or internally.
However, these effects are more magnified for structure with more openings and large surface
areas and we focus on sensitive part of the building that is roof. The intensity of wind load on a
structure is related to the square of the wind velocity and the dimensions of the members that are
resisting the wind (frontal area). Wind velocity is dependent on geographical location, the height
of the structure, the topography of the area and the roughness of the surrounding terrain.
2.2. Method of wind load Analysis
Based on the roof structure buildings are classified into two:
 Flat roof buildings( slabs)
 Sloped roof building(truss structure)
The building in this design report has a type of roof called flat slab roof.
According to ES EN-1 Section, there are two methods for wind load analysis:

1. The quasi-static method

2. Detailed dynamic analysis
The former analysis applied to structures whose structural properties do not make them
susceptible to dynamic exaltation. The latter analysis applied to structures, which are likely to be
susceptible to dynamic exaltation. The choice of the above two methods depends on the value of
the structure and of their dynamic coefficient. The dynamic coefficient depends on the type of
structure, the height of the structure and its breadth.

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 16

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

The quasi-static method is more preferred for use in structures whose Cd value is less or equal to
1.2 (ES ES-1). For our case, the height of building is 19.7m and width of the building is 14.98m.
From figure 1.1 below (figure 3.7 of ES EN-1, 2015) the value of the dynamic coefficient of this
building is Cd≈ 0.90 that is Cd<1.2 and height of the building is less than200m.

Figure 2.4. Cd Values for Concrete and Masonry Buildings

This implies that the simple procedure of ES EN method of analysis is the appropriate method to
use. Therefore, as per the justification of the above sentence the design of the roof is analysis by
quasi-static method.
We have divided the building in to two roof parts according to their elevation as follows:
 Roof-1 :( solid slab roof) elevation=17.9m
 Roof-2 :( solid slab roof) elevation=19.7m
Terrain Category
The building is located in DILLA is considered as Suburban or industrial areas and permanent
forests area which is terrain category III. According to ES EN-1, Part 1-4 section 4.3.2 table 4.1
shows the structure is to be designed for a terrain category of III (Area with regular cover of
vegetation or buildings or with isolated obstacles with separations of maximum 20 obstacle
heights
(Such as villages, suburban terrain, and permanent forest).

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 17

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

2.3. Wind Load Analysis

1. For roof - 1
As the sun shines on the earth different parts of the land and sea heat at different speeds, forming
high and low pressure area. This results in lift and fall of air that passes across the whole globe.
Wind is air in motion. Structure deflects or stops the wind, converting the wind’s kinetic energy
in to potential energy of pressure.
2.3.1. External Pressure
As per ES EN-1 Part 1-4 Section 5.2, the wind pressure acting on the external surfaces we,
computed from the expression (5.1, ES EN-1).
We = q p (Ze ). Cpe
Where, qp (ze) - is the peak velocity pressure
ze - is the reference height for the external pressure given in Section 7
cpe - is the pressure coefficient for the external pressure, see Section 7.
As per ES EN-1 Part 1-4 Section 4.5, the peak velocity pressure qp(z) at height z, which includes
mean and short-term velocity fluctuations, should be determined from expression (4.8, ES EN1).
q p (z) = Ce (z). q b
Where, qb is the basic velocity pressure given in Expression (4.10, ES EN-1)
1
q b = . ρ. vb 2
2
Where: ρ is the air density, which depends on the altitude, temperature and barometric pressure
to be expect in the region during windstorms.
Reference wind pressure (qref)
q ref = 0.5 ∗ ρ ∗ Vref 2
Where,
Vref = is the reference wind velocity defined as the 10-minute mean wind velocity at 10m above
ground of terrain category II (see Table) having an annual probability of expedience of 0.02
(commonly referred to as having a mean return period of 50 years). It is determined from
Vref = CDIR* CTEM *CALT* V ref, 0… (ES EN-1, 2015)
CDIR is the directional factor to be taken as 1.0
CTEM is the temporary (seasonal) factor to be taken as 1.0

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 18

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

CALT is the altitude factor to be taken as 1.0 as per (ES EN-1, 2015).
Therefore, Vref =1*1*1*22m/sec =22m/sec
ρ is air density and is dependent on altitude: From table 3.1 ES EN-1 as follows.
Table 2.1. Values of Air Density ρ
Site Altitude Above sea level (m) ρ (kg/m3)
0 1.20
500 1.12
1000 1.06
1500 1.00
2000 0.94
Site altitude of Dilla is 1570m above mean sea level obtained from website.
The air density for Dilla town are calculate by interpolation from the above table.
Site Altitude(m) above sea level  (kg/m3)
1500 1.00
1570 ?
2000 0.94
So air density of Dilla is comes to be equal to 0.992kg/m3.
Since, Vref = 1*1*1*22 m/s = 22 m/s finally we get the reference wind pressure as
qref = 0.5*(0.99kg/m3) *(22m/s) 2 = 0.24 KN/m2
Exposure coefficients (Ce (Ze))
According to ES EN-1 2015, the exposure coefficient given by:
7 ∗ KT
Ce(Ze) = 𝐶𝑟 (𝑍)2 ∗ Ct (Z)2 ∗ (1 + )
Cr (Z) ∗ Ct (Z)
Where, KT – is the terrain factor
Cr (Z) – is the roughness coefficient
Ct (Z) – is the topography coefficient and taken to be as unity.
From the above for the terrain classification, the site regular cover of vegetation or buildings or
with isolated obstacles with separations of maximum 20 obstacle heights (such as villages,
suburban terrain, permanent forest. Then, from table 4.1 of ES ES-1, 2015 we can classify the
terrain as category III with the following coefficients:

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 19

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building
Ze
K 𝑇 ∗ ln (Zo) … … … … … . . for Z𝑚𝑖𝑛 ≤ Ze ≤ 200
KT = 0.22, Zo=0.3 and Zmin = 5 Cr(Z) = {
C𝑟 (Zmin) … … … … … … … … … … for Z𝑒 ≤ Z𝑚𝑖𝑛
Where, Zo- is the roughness coefficient
Zmin-is the minimum height
Ze-is actual length of the building
Ze
For our building, we have Ze =17.9m for roof 1 and we use the formula Cr(Ze) = KT ∗ ln(Zo)
17.9
Cr(Ze) = 0.22 ∗ ln( 0.3 ) = 0.89
7∗0.22
Since, Ce(Ze) = (0.89)2 ∗ (1)2 ∗ (1 + 0.89∗1) = 2.16

Therefore, 𝑊𝑒 = qref*Ce (Ze)*Cpe = 0.24*2.16*Cpe

We = 0.52*Cpe……………………………………. Equation-1
Determination of External pressure coefficient (Cpe)
The roof of our building is solid flat slab within 2% slope.
Flat roofs:
1) Flat roofs defined as having a slope (α) of -5^0<α<5^0.
2) The roof divided into zones as shown in Figure-2 (ES EN-1 Part 1-4 Section 7.2.3, Figure
7.6).
3) The reference height for flat roofs with parapets taken as h + hp, (ES EN-1 Part 1-4 Section
7.2.3, Figure 7.6).
4) Pressure coefficients for each zone given in Table A.2.
5) The resulting pressure coefficient on the parapet should be determined using 7.4
Now we have determined the design value of Cpe for each zone by using ES EN-1 2015 as
shown below. In our cause, the solid slab is within parapets around the peripheral of the building.

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 20

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Figure 2.2. Key for flat roof (ES EN -1 Part 1- 4, Figure -7.6)
Table 4.2. External Pressure Coefficients for flat roofs (ES EN-1 Part 1-4, Table 7.2)

For roofs with parapets or curved eaves, linear interpolation may be used for intermediate values
of hp/h and r/h.

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 21

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

External Pressure coefficients

The external pressure coefficients cpe for buildings and parts of buildings depend on the size of
the loaded area A, which is the area of the structure that produces the wind action in the section
to be calculated. The external pressure coefficients given for loaded areas A of 1 m2 and 10 m2
in the tables for the appropriate building configurations as cpe1, for local coefficients, and cpe,
10, for overall coefficients, respectively.
NOTE-1: Values for Cpe, 1 are intended for the design of small elements and fixings with an
area per element of 1 m2 or less such as cladding elements and roofing elements. Values for Cpe,
10 used for the design of the overall load bearing structure of buildings.
NOTE-2: The National Annex may give a procedure for calculating external pressure
coefficients for loaded areas above 1 m2 based on external pressure coefficients Cpe, 1 and Cpe,
10. The recommended procedure for loaded areas up to 10 m2 given in.
The divided area for each zone will become as the following figure. The external pressure
coefficients Cpe for buildings and individual parts of buildings depend on the size of the loaded
area A. For loaded areas A of 1 m2 and 10m2 in the relevant tables for the appropriate building
configurations as Cpt, 1 and Cpe, 10 respectively. For other loaded areas, the variation of the
values obtained from figure below.
Note: The loaded area is the area of the structure, which produces the wind action in the section
to be calculated.

Figure 2.3. Variation of external pressure coefficient for buildings with size of the loaded area
A.
Different zones of the loaded area are subjected to different magnitude. The Cpe values are
denoted below:

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 22

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Cpe = Cpe, 1……………………………………………………………. A≤1m2

Cpe = Cpe, 1 + (Cpe, 10 − Cpe, 1) log A 10 … … … … … … … … … … … 1m2 < A < 10m2
Cpe = Cpe, 10 …………………………………………………………… A ≥ 10m2
The values of Cpe, l0 and Cpe, l in the above Table given for orthogonal wind directions at
0°,90°,180° and 270° but represent highest values obtained in a range of wind direction θ=± 45°
either side of the relevant orthogonal direction. These values are only applicable to buildings.
i. Wind direction at 0° and 180°
b = 22.8m
b = 22.8 m e = min { e = 22.8m
2h = 35.8m
d = 14.0 m e/2 = 11.4m e/10 = 2.28m
h = 17.9 m e/4 = 5.7

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 23

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

a) At 𝟎°

Figure 2.4.Wind force direction on flat roof at 0o

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 24

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Table 2.3. Values of external pressure coefficient at 𝟎°

Zone Area (m2) Cpe (+ve) Cpe (-ve)

F1 10 - -1.4

F2 9.33 - -0.17

G 7.38 - -0.78

H 163.33 - -0.7

I 64.43 0.2 -0.2

Determine the external wind pressure for flat roof – 1 at 0o

We = qref * ce(ze) *cpe
We = 0.52*Cpe……………………………………. Equation-1
Zone Cpe We (KN/m²)
F1 -1.4 -0.73
F2 -0.17 -0.09
G -0.78 -0.41
H -0.7 -0.36
-0.2 -0.104
I
+0.2 0.104

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 25

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

b) At 𝟏𝟖𝟎°

Figure 2.5. Wind force direction on flat roof at 180o

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 26

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Table 2.4. Values of external pressure coefficient at 𝟏𝟖𝟎°

Zone Area(m2) Cpe (+ve) Cpe (-ve)

F1 9.45 - -1.36

F2 8.8 - -1.32

G 18.83 - -0.9

H 167.6 - -0.7

I 43.34 0.2 -0.2

Determine the external wind pressure for flat roof – 1 at 180o

Zone Cpe We (KN/m²)
F1 -1.36 -0.71
F2 -1.32 -0.68
G -0.9 -0.47
H -0.7 -0.36
-0.2 -0.104
I
+0.2 0.104

ii. Wind direction at 90° and 270°

b = 14.98 m
b = 14.98 m e = min { e = 14.9 m
2h = 35.8 m
d = 22.8 m e/2 = 7.49 m e/10 = 1.5 m
h = 17.9 m e/4 = 3.75 m

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 27

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

a) At 𝟗𝟎°

Figure 2.6. Wind force direction on flat roof at 90o

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 28

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Table 2.5. Values of external pressure coefficient at 𝟗𝟎°

Zone Area (m2) Cpe (+ve) Cpe (-ve)

F1 5.62 - -1.05

F2 0 - 0

G 3.21 - -0.46

H 70.44 - -0.7

I 170.52 0.2 -0.2

Determine the external wind pressure for flat roof – 1 at 90o

Zone Cpe We (KN/m²)
F1 -1.05 -0.55
F2 0 0
G -0.46 -0.24
H -0.7 -0.36
-0.2 -0.104
I
+0.2 0.104

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 29

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

b) At 𝟐𝟕𝟎°

Figure 2.7. Wind force direction on flat roof at 270o

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 30

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Table 2.6.Values of external pressure coefficient at 𝟐𝟕𝟎°

Zone Area (m2) Cpe (+ve) Cpe (-ve)

F1 2.11 - -0.45

F2 1.95 - -0.41

G 11.22 - -0.9

H 77.24 - -0.7

I 157.36 0.2 -0.2

Determine the external wind pressure for flat roof – 1 at 90o

Zone Cpe We (KN/m²)
F1 -0.45 -0.23
F2 -0.41 -0.21
G -0.9 -0.45
H -0.7 -0.36
-0.2 -0.104
I
+0.2 0.104

2.3.2. Internal Wind Pressure

Internal and external pressures shall be considered to act at the same time. The worst
combination of external and internal pressures shall be considered for every combination of
possible openings and other leakage paths. The internal pressure coefficient, cpi, depends on
the size and distribution of the openings in the building envelope.
Where an external opening, such as a door or a window, would be dominant when open but is
considered to be closed in the ultimate limit state, during severe windstorms, the
condition with the door or window open should be considered as an accidental design
situation in accordance with ES EN 1990.
𝑾𝒊 = 𝐪𝒓𝒆𝒇 ∗ 𝐂𝐞(𝐙𝐞) ∗ 𝐂𝐩𝐢 (ES EN-1 1990)
The internal wind pressure is the pressure found inside the house due to opening of windows and
door. The value qref and Ce (Ze) are calculated above and there is no need to calculate it again.
Wi = 0.52*Cpi……………………………………. Equation-2

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 31

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Internal pressure coefficient (Cpi)

For closed buildings with internal partitions and opening windows the extreme values are to be
used:Cpi = 0.8 or -0.5
cpi = +0.8 for internal pressure
cpi = -0.5 for internal suction
For cpi = +0.8 for internal pressure (wi +ve)
Zone Ce(zi) Cpi qref Wi (KN/m²)
F 2.16 +0.8 0.240 +0.415
G 2.16 +0.8 0.240 +0.415
H 2.16 +0.8 0.240 +0.415
I 2.16 +0.8 0.240 +0.415

For cpi = -0.5 for internal suction (wi –ve)

Zone Ce(zi) Cpi qref Wi (KN/m²)
F 2.16 -0.5 0.240 -0.26
G 2.16 -0.5 0.240 -0.26
H 2.16 -0.5 0.240 -0.26
I 2.16 -0.5 0.240 -0.26

Net wind pressure on the roof surface

The net wind pressure is given by the sum of the internal and external pressure.
Wnet =We -Wi = q p (Z)*(Cpe -Cpi)
Case – 1 at 0o
Region F1 F2 G H I
We in KN/m² -0.73 -0.09 -0.41 -0.36 0.104
Wi (+ve) in KN/m² 0.415 0.415 0.415 0.415 0.415
Wi (-ve) in KN/m² -0.26 -0.26 -0.26 -0.26 -0.26
Wnet = (We-Wi(+ve)) in KN/m² -1.15 -0.51 -0.83 -0.78 -0.31
Wnet = (We-Wi(-ve) in KN/m² -0.47 0.17 -0.15 -0.10 0.364

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 32

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Case – 2 at 180o
Region F1 F2 G H I
We in KN/m² -0.71 -0.68 -0.47 -0.36 0.104
Wi (+ve) in KN/m² 0.415 0.415 0.415 0.415 0.415
Wi (-ve) in KN/m² -0.26 -0.26 -0.26 -0.26 -0.26
Wnet = (We-Wi(+ve)) in KN/m² -1.13 -1.09 -0.89 -0.78 -0.31
Wnet = (We-Wi(-ve) in KN/m² -0.45 -0.42 -0.21 -0.10 0.364

Case – 3 at 90o
Region F1 F2 G H I
We in KN/m² -0.55 0 -0.24 -0.36 0.104
Wi (+ve) in KN/m² 0.415 0.415 0.415 0.415 0.415
Wi (-ve) in KN/m² -0.26 -0.26 -0.26 -0.26 -0.26
Wnet = (We-Wi(+ve)) in KN/m² -0.97 0 -0.66 -0.78 -0.31
Wnet = (We-Wi(-ve) in KN/m² -0.29 0 0.02 -0.10 0.364

Case – 4 at 270o
Region F1 F2 G H I
We in KN/m² -0.23 -0.21 -0.45 -0.36 0.104
Wi (+ve) in KN/m² 0.415 0.415 0.415 0.415 0.415
Wi (-ve) in KN/m² -0.26 -0.26 -0.26 -0.26 -0.26
Wnet = (We-Wi(+ve)) in KN/m² -0.65 -0.63 -0.87 -0.78 -0.31
Wnet = (We-Wi(-ve) in KN/m² 0.03 0.05 -0.19 -0.10 0.364

Note: Positive sign indicates that the pressure acting towards the wall and negative sign
indicates
that the pressure is acting away from the wall. From the above two case the maximum values of
suction and pressures for the design of this building is taken;
The critical suction wind pressure found to be,
 when the wind is at θ = 0o
[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 33
B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Wnet (-ve) = -1.15KN/m2 (suction) - occurs on zone F

The critical wind pressure is found to be
 When the wind is at θ = 0o , 180o,90o and 270o
Wnet (+ve) = 0.364KN/m2 (pressure) – occurs on zone I
2. For roof-2
External wind pressure
We = qref Ce(ze) Cpe
Exposure coefficient Ce(ze):
 7 KT 
Ce(ze) = Cr ( z ) * Ct ( z ) 1 
2 2

 Cr ( z ) * Ct ( z ) 
KT = Terrain Factor = 0.22 (for terrain category III)
Z 
C r (z ) = Roughness Coefficient = KT ln   for Z > Zmin
 Zo 
= Cr ( zmin ) for Z < Zmin
In our project, dilla can be considered as a sub urban area and therefore the terrain category falls
as category III
For terrain category III, Zmin = 5m
Z = Reference height - can be taken as the overall height of the building = 19.7m
Z 
Therefore, Z > Zmin ; C r (z ) = KT ln  
 Zo 
19.7
Cr(Ze) = 0.22 ∗ ln ( ) = 0.92
0.3
7∗0.22
Since, Ce(Ze) = (0.92)2 ∗ (1)2 ∗ (1 + 0.92∗1) = 2.26

Therefore, 𝑊𝑒 = qref*Ce (Ze)*Cpe = 0.24*2.26*Cpe

We = 0.54*Cpe……………………………………. Equation-3
Determination of External pressure coefficient (Cpe) for roof - 2
i. Wind direction at 0° and 180°
b = 5.2m
b = 5.2 m e = min { e = 5.29m
2h = 39.4m
d = 8.29 m e/2 = 2.6m e/10 = 0.52m

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 34

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

h = 19.7 m e/4 = 1.3m

a) At 𝟎°

Figure 2.8.Wind force direction on flat roof at 0o

Table 2.7. Values of external pressure coefficient at 𝟎°

Zone Area (m2) Cpe (+ve) Cpe (-ve)

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 35

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

F1 0 - 0

F2 0.67 - -2.28

G 1.14 - -0.067

H 7.4 - -0.7

I 29.6 0.2 -0.2

Determine the external wind pressure for flat roof – 2 at 0o

We = qref * ce(ze) *cpe
We = 0.54*Cpe……………………………………. Equation-1

Zone Cpe We (KN/m²)

F1 0 0
F2 -2.28 -1.23
G -0.067 -0.04
H -0.7 -0.38
-0.2 -0.108
I
+0.2 0.108

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 36

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

b) At 𝟏𝟖𝟎°

Figure 2.9.Wind force direction on flat roof at 180o

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 37

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Table 2.8. Values of external pressure coefficient at 𝟏𝟖𝟎°

Zone Area(m2) Cpe (+ve) Cpe (-ve)

F1 0.67 - -2.28

F2 0.67 - -2.28

G 1.35 - -0.154

H 10.8 - -0.7

I 25.3 0.2 -0.2

Determine the external wind pressure for flat roof – 2 at 180o

Zone Cpe We (KN/m²)
F1 -2.28 -1.23
F2 -2.28 -1.23
G -0.154 -0.08
H -0.7 -0.38
-0.2 -0.108
I
+0.2 0.108

ii. Wind direction at 90° and 270°

b = 5.2m
b = 5.2 m e = min { e = 5.29m
2h = 39.4m
d = 8.29 m e/2 = 2.6m e/10 = 0.52m
h = 19.7 m e/4 = 1.3m

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 38

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

a) At 𝟗𝟎°

Figure 2.10. Wind force direction on flat roof at 90o

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 39

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Table 2.9.Values of external pressure coefficient at 𝟗𝟎°

Zone Area(m2) Cpe (+ve) Cpe (-ve)

F1 0 - 0

F2 1.74 - -0.404

G 3.04 - -0.57

H 25.3 - -0.7

I 8.7 0.2 -0.2

Determine the external wind pressure for flat roof – 2 at 90o

Zone Cpe We (KN/m²)
F1 0 0
F2 -0.404 -0.22
G -0.57 -0.31
H -0.7 -0.38
-0.2 -0.108
I
+0.2 0.108

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 40

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

b) At 𝟐𝟕𝟎°

Figure 2.11.Wind force direction on flat roof at 270o

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 41

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Table 2.10Values of external pressure coefficient at 𝟐𝟕𝟎°

Zone Area(m2) Cpe (+ve) Cpe (-ve)

F1 1.74 - -0.404

F2 1.74 - -0.404

G 3.4 - -0.63

H 25.9 - -0.7

I 6.04 0.2 -0.2

Determine the external wind pressure for flat roof – 2 at 270o

Zone Cpe We (KN/m²)
F1 -0.404 -0.22
F2 -0.404 -0.22
G -0.63 -0.34
H -0.7 -0.38
-0.2 -0.108
I
+0.2 0.108

Internal Wind Pressure

Internal pressure Wi is given by:
𝑾𝒊 = 𝐪𝒓𝒆𝒇 ∗ 𝐂𝐞(𝐙𝐞) ∗ 𝐂𝐩𝐢 (ES EN-1 1990)
The internal wind pressure is the pressure found inside the house due to opening of windows and
door. The value qref and Ce (Ze) are calculated above and there is no need to calculate it again.
Wi = 0.54*Cpi……………………………………. Equation-4
Internal pressure coefficient (Cpi)
For closed buildings with internal partitions and opening windows, the extreme values are to be
used:Cpi = 0.8 or -0.5
cpi = +0.8 for internal pressure
cpi = -0.5 for internal suction
For cpi = +0.8 for internal pressure (wi +ve)

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 42

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Zone Ce(zi) Cpi qref Wi (KN/m²)

F 2.26 +0.8 0.240 +0.434
G 2.26 +0.8 0.240 +0.434
H 2.26 +0.8 0.240 +0.434
I 2.26 +0.8 0.240 +0.434

For cpi = -0.5 for internal suction (wi –ve)

Zone Ce(zi) Cpi qref Wi (KN/m²)
F 2.26 -0.5 0.240 -0.27
G 2.26 -0.5 0.240 -0.27
H 2.26 -0.5 0.240 -0.27
I 2.26 -0.5 0.240 -0.27

Net wind pressure on the roof surface

The net wind pressure is given by the sum of the internal and external pressure.
Wnet =We -Wi = q p (Z)*(Cpe -Cpi)
Case – 1 at 0o
Region F1 F2 G H I
We in KN/m² 0 -1.23 -0.04 -0.38 0.108
Wi (+ve) in KN/m² 0.434 0.434 0.434 0.434 0.434
Wi (-ve) in KN/m² -0.27 -0.27 -0.27 -0.27 -0.27
Wnet = (We-Wi(+ve)) in KN/m² 0 -1.66 -0.47 -0.81 -0.33
Wnet = (We-Wi(-ve) in KN/m² 0 -0.96 0.23 -0.11 0.378

Case – 2 at 180o
Region F1 F2 G H I
We in KN/m² -1.23 -1.23 -0.08 -0.38 0.108
Wi (+ve) in KN/m² 0.434 0.434 0.434 0.434 0.434
Wi (-ve) in KN/m² -0.27 -0.27 -0.27 -0.27 -0.27

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 43

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Wnet = (We-Wi(+ve)) in KN/m² -1.66 -1.66 -0.51 -0.81 -0.33

Wnet = (We-Wi(-ve) in KN/m² -0.96 -0.96 0.19 -0.11 0.378

Case – 3 at 90o
Region F1 F2 G H I
We in KN/m² 0 -0.22 -0.31 -0.38 0.108
Wi (+ve) in KN/m² 0.434 0.434 0.434 0.434 0.434
Wi (-ve) in KN/m² -0.27 -0.27 -0.27 -0.27 -0.27
Wnet = (We-Wi(+ve)) in KN/m² 0 -0.65 -0.74 -0.81 -0.33
Wnet = (We-Wi(-ve) in KN/m² 0 0.05 -0.04 -0.11 0.378

Case – 4 at 270o
Region F1 F2 G H I
We in KN/m² -0.22 -0.22 -0.34 -0.38 0.108
Wi (+ve) in KN/m² 0.434 0.434 0.434 0.434 0.434
Wi (-ve) in KN/m² -0.27 -0.27 -0.27 -0.27 -0.27
Wnet = (We-Wi(+ve)) in KN/m² -0.65 -0.65 -0.77 -0.81 -0.33
Wnet = (We-Wi(-ve) in KN/m² 0.05 0.05 -0.07 -0.11 0.378

Note: Positive sign indicates that the pressure acting towards the wall and negative sign
indicates
that the pressure is acting away from the wall. From the above two case the maximum values of
suction and pressures for the design of this building is taken;
The critical suction wind pressure found to be,
 when the wind is at θ = 0o
Wnet (-ve) = -1.66KN/m2 (suction) - occurs on zone F
The critical wind pressure is found to be
 When the wind is at θ = 0o , 180o,90o and 270o
Wnet (+ve) = 0.3748KN/m2 (pressure) – occurs on zone I

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 44

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

2.4. Determination of governing concrete cover

The concrete cover is the distance from the surface of the reinforcement closest to the nearest
concrete surface (including links and stirrups and surface reinforcement where relevant) and the
nearest concrete surface. Based on ES EN 2015 governing design cover is obtained as following;
Since slabs are strong in shear and it is even difficult to insert stirrups if required, the design here
is only for longitudinal bars.
Cnom = Cmin+ ∆Cdev
Requirements with regard to minimum cover, Cmin
As per ES EN-2 2015, section 4.4.1.2(2) P, puts the determination of Cmin satisfying the
requirements for both bond and environmental conditions. The nominal cover shall be specified
on the drawings. It is defined as a minimum cover, Cmin (see 4.4.1.2), plus an allowance in
design for deviation, ∆Cdev (see 4.4.1.3).
Cmin = max {Cmin, b; Cmin, dur+∆Cdur, y-∆Cdur, st-∆Cdur, add; 10mm}
Where:
Cmin, b (minimum cover due to bond requirement, see 4.4.1.2 (3)
Cmin, dur (minimum cover due to environmental conditions, see 4.4.1.2 (5)
∆Cdur, γ (additive safety element, see 4.4.1.2 (6)
∆Cdur, st (reduction of minimum cover for use of stainless steel, see 4.4.1.2 (7)
∆Cdur, add (reduction of minimum cover for use of additional protection, see 4.4.1.2 (8)
However, ES EN-2 2015 also puts the recommendation values for ∆Cdur, γ = 0 from section
4.4.1.2 (6), for ∆Cdur, st = 0 from section 4.4.1.2 (7) and for ∆Cdur, add = 0 from section 4.4.1.2 (8).
Requirements with regard to bond Cmin, b
As per ES EN-2 2015, Table 4.2, gives the nominal aggregate size to be less than 32 mm and for
the separated arrangement of reinforcement bars the minimum requirements of cover regard ton
bond is the diameter of the main bars. In our case, the minimum cover regard to bond Cmin, b is 10
mm.
Requirements with regard to durability for reinforcement steel Cmin, dur
Then from ES EN-2 2015, Table 4.4N, the recommended Cmin, dur value with regard to durability
for reinforcing steel is given as 15 mm, using XC1 and structural class of S-4 according to,
section 4.4.1.2 (5).
Cmin = max {Cmin, b; Cmin, dur; 10 mm}
[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 45
B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Cmin = max {10 mm; 15 mm; 10 mm}

Cmin = 15 mm
Allowance in design for deviation (∆Cdev)
Assuming no special quality control, we take the recommended value of ∆Cdev as 10mm from ES
EN-2 2015, section 4.4.13(2).
∆Cdev = 10mm
Therefore, determination of nominal cover Cnom is computed using equation-2 as follows:
Cnom = Cmin + ∆Cdev
Cnom = 15 mm+10 mm
Cnom = 25 mm is the required concrete cover for our slab case.

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 46

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

2.5. FLAT ROOF SLAB DESIGN

2.5.1. Layout and naming of roof slab

Figure 2.12. Layout and naming of roof slab 1

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 47

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Figure 2.13. Layout and naming of roof slab 1

2.5.2 Computation of Depth for Deflection

As per ES EN-2 2015, section 7.4.2 (2) the minimum depth of a slab for deflection requirement
is computed by using the expression:
3⁄
𝐿 𝜌 𝜌 2 500
= 𝐾 ⌊11 + 1.5√𝑓𝑐𝑘 𝜌 + 3.2√𝑓𝑐𝑘 (𝜌 − 1) ⌋ ∗ 𝑓𝑦𝑘 𝑖𝑓 𝝆 ≤ 𝝆𝒐 1
𝑑 𝑜 𝑜

𝐿 𝑜𝜌 1 𝜌 500
= 𝐾 ⌊11 + 1.5√𝑓𝑐𝑘 𝜌−𝜌 ′ + 12 √𝑓𝑐𝑘 √𝜌 ⌋ ∗ 𝑓𝑦𝑘 𝑖𝑓 𝝆 > 𝝆𝒐 2
𝑑 𝑜

Where:
L/d is the limit span/depth
K is the factor to take into account the different structural systems
ρ0 is the reference reinforcement ratio = √fck *10-3
ρ is the required tension reinforcement ratio at mid-span to resist the moment due to the
design loads (at support for cantilevers).
ρ’ is the required compression reinforcement ratio at mid-span to resist the moment due to
design loads (at support for cantilevers)
fck is characteristic strength of concrete in MPa units

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 48

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

 In the depth determination of the minimum deflection requirement, the largest calculated
effective depth of is taken.
Assumption: Slab is lightly reinforced (𝜌 = 0.5 %) i.e. 𝜌 = 5 * 10-3
𝜌𝑜 = √𝑓𝑐𝑘 ∗ 10−3
𝜌𝑜 = √20 ∗ 10−3= 4.5∗ 10−3
Therefore, 𝜌 = 5 * 10-3 > 𝜌𝑜 = √20 ∗ 10−3= 4.5∗ 10−3
So, the requirement for depth calculation is done by using the Equation 2 above.
𝐿 𝑜 𝜌 1 𝜌
= 𝐾 ⌊11 + 1.5√𝑓𝑐𝑘 𝜌−𝜌 ′
+ 12 √𝑓𝑐𝑘 √𝜌 ⌋ ∗ 500/𝑓𝑦𝑘
𝑑 𝑜

Depth determination: Serviceability Requirement for all panel

Sample calculation for roof slab 1 (RFS-2):-
K=1.3 for end span, K=1.5 for interior span and K=0.4 for Cantilever span according to ES EN -
2, 2015 Table 7.4N (Page 134)
𝐿 𝑜 𝜌 1 𝜌′
= 1.3 ⌊11 + 1.5√𝑓𝑐𝑘 𝜌−𝜌 ′ + 12 √𝑓𝑐𝑘 √𝜌 ⌋
𝑑 𝑜

0.0045 1 0
=1.3 ⌊11 + 1.5√20 0.005−0 + 12 √20√0.0045 ⌋=22.15

500
𝑙 /𝑑 = 22.15 because we used S-400 multiply the value by 𝑓 = 1.25
𝑦𝑘

𝑙x /𝑑 = 22.15 *1.25 = 27.69 for end span

Lx=4.89m
The effective depth d’ = lx/27.69= 4.89/27.69 * 1000 = 176.6 mm
For cantilever roof slab CS-1
For cantilever floor panel 1 or CS-1 – Cantilever from Table 7.4N K=0.4
500
𝑙 /𝑑= 6.82 because we used S-400 multiply the value by 𝑓 = 1.25
𝑦𝑘

LX = 1.22m
𝑙x /𝑑 = 6.81*1.25 = 8.52
The effective depth d’ = lx/8.52= 1.22/8.52 * 1000 = 143.19 mm
Computation of the rest of the panel for floor slab in Tabular form below.

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 49

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Table 2.11. Computation of effective depth for roof slabs

Ly Lx d
Panel Support Ly/Lx Type K Lx /d
(m) (m) (mm)
RFS-1 End 4.36 2.52 1.7 Two Way 1.3 27.69 91.1
RFS-2 End 6.86 4.89 1.4 Two Way 1.3 27.69 176.6
RFS-3 End 5.39 4.89 1.1 Two Way 1.3 27.69 176.6
RFS-4 End 5.39 3.30 1.6 Two Way 1.3 27.69 119.17
RFS-5 End 6.86 3.74 1.8 Two Way 1.3 27.69 135.1
RFS-6 End 5.39 3.74 1.4 Two Way 1.3 27.69 135.1
RFS-7 End 6.86 4.11 1.7 Two Way 1.3 27.69 148.43
RFS-8 End 5.39 4.11 1.3 Two Way 1.3 27.69 148.43
RFS-9 End 4.15 3.35 1.2 Two way 1.3 27.69 120.1
RFS-10 Interior 2.65 2.4 1.1 Two Way 1.5 31.9 77.5
RFS-11 End 5.39 2.07 2.6 One Way 1.3 27.69 74.7
CS-1 Cantilever 2.52 1.22 2.01 One Way 0.4 8.52 143.2
CS-2 Cantilever 3.88 1.06 3.7 One Way 0.4 8.52 124.4
CS-3 Cantilever 4.89 1.50 3.3 One Way 0.4 8.52 176.1
CS-4 Cantilever 2.60 1.50 1.7 Two Way 0.4 8.52 176.1
CS-5 Cantilever 4.90 1.50 3.3 One Way 0.4 8.52 176.1
CS-6 Cantilever 6.85 1.5 1.2 Two Way 0.4 8.52 176.1

The maximum effective depth is d’max = 176.6 mm

The overall depth is computed as D = d’max+cover+ main dia. /2 = 176.6+25+10/2=206.6mm
Use the overall depth, D = 210 mm for analysis.
Hence; use the effective depth d’ = 210 – 25-10/2 = 180 𝑚𝑚

Sample calculation for roof slab 2 (RFS-1):-

K=1.3 for end span, K=1.5 for interior span and K=0.4 for Cantilever span according to ES EN -
2, 2015 Table 7.4N (Page 134)
𝐿 𝑜 𝜌 1 𝜌′
= 1.3 ⌊11 + 1.5√𝑓𝑐𝑘 𝜌−𝜌 ′ + 12 √𝑓𝑐𝑘 √𝜌 ⌋
𝑑 𝑜

0.0045 1 0
=1.3 ⌊11 + 1.5√20 0.005−0 + 12 √20√0.0045 ⌋=22.15

500
𝑙 /𝑑 = 22.15 because we used S-400 multiply the value by 𝑓 = 1.25
𝑦𝑘

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 50

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

𝑙x /𝑑 = 22.15 *1.25 = 27.69 for end span

Lx=4.89m
The effective depth d’ = lx/27.69= 4.89/27.69 * 1000 = 176.6 mm
For cantilever roof slab 2 CS-1
For cantilever floor panel 1 or CS-1 – Cantilever from Table 7.4N K=0.4
500
𝑙 /𝑑= 6.82 because we used S-400 multiply the value by 𝑓 = 1.25
𝑦𝑘

LX = 1.22m
𝑙x /𝑑 = 6.81*1.25 = 8.52
The effective depth d’ = lx/8.52= 1.22/8.52 * 1000 = 143.19 mm
Ly Lx d
Panel Support Ly/Lx Type K Lx /d
(m) (m) (mm)
RFS-1 End 6.42 3.3 1.9 Two Way 1.3 27.69 119.17
CS-1 Cantilever 3.3 1.5 2.2 one Way 0.4 8.52 176.1
CS-2 Cantilever 5.77 1.5 3.8 one Way 0.4 8.52 176.1

The maximum effective depth is d’max = 176.6 mm

The overall depth is computed as D = d’max+cover+ main dia. /2 = 176.6+25+10/2=206.6mm
Use the overall depth, D = 210 mm for analysis.
Hence; use the effective depth d’ = 210 – 25-10/2 = 180 𝑚𝑚
2.5.3. Loading of roof slabs
 For roof one
According to ES EN-2 2015, section 2.1(1) tells that the self-weight of construction works
should be classified as permanent fixed action. Thus,
Dead load = self-weight + weight of partition + weight of floor finish (selecting marble + cement
screed + plastering)
1. Dead load analysis
 Self-weight of 210 mm RC slab =0.21*25KN/m3 = 5.25KN/m2
 20mm water proofing material = 0.02*14KN/m3 = 0.28KN/m2
 Bottom finishing loads(25mm plastering &painting ceiling)
= 0.025*23KN/m3= 0.58 KN/m2
 30mm cement screed = 0.06*23KN/m3=1.38KN/m2

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 51

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Total dead load=7+0.28+1.38+0.58 = 7.49kN/m2

2. Live load analysis
 LL = 1KN/m2 for flat roof
3. Wind load
 Wnet = 1.15KN/m2 for suction
 Wnet = 0.364KN/m2 for pressure
Load combination
1. COMBO 1: Psd =1.35DL+1.5LL
= 1.35*7.49+1.5*1
= 11.62 KN/m2
2. COMBO 2: Psd=0.9DL+1.5WL
= 0.9*7.49+1.5*(1.15)
=8.47 KN/m2… for suction
3. COMBO 3: Psd = 0.9DL+1.6WL
= 0.9*7.49+1.6*(0.364)
= 7.32KN/m2…... for pressure
The governing load combination and design load
COMBO 1: Psd =1.35 DL+1.5LL
=1.35*7.49+1.5*1
= 11.63KN/m2
 For roof two
1. Dead load analysis
 Self-weight of 210 mm RC slab =0.21*25KN/m3 = 5.25KN/m2
 20mm water proofing material = 0.02*14KN/m3 = 0.28KN/m2
 Bottom finishing loads(25mm plastering &painting ceiling)
= 0.025*23KN/m3= 0.58 KN/m2
 30mm cement screed = 0.06*23KN/m3=1.38KN/m2
 DL from 10000 Liter water
1 Liter of water = 1 Kilogram
1Kg = 9.81N

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 52

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

1oooo Ltr = 10000Kg = 98100N = 98.1KN

Area of the slab = 21.186m2
98.1KN /21.186m2 = 4.63KN/m2
Total dead load=5.25+0.28+1.38+0.58+4.63= 12.12kN/m2
2. Live load analysis
 LL = 1KN/m2 for flat roof
3. Wind load
 Wnet = -1.66KN/m2 for suction
 Wnet = 0.3748KN/m2 for pressure
Load combination
4. COMBO 1: Psd =1.35DL+1.5LL
= 1.35*12.12+1.5*1
= 17.86 KN/m2
5. COMBO 2: Psd=0.9DL+1.5WL
= 0.9*12.12+1.5*(1.66)
=13.39 KN/m2… for suction
6. COMBO 3: Psd = 0.9DL+1.6WL
= 0.9*12.12+1.6*(0.374)
= 11.51KN/m2…... for pressure
The governing load combination and design load
COMBO 1: Psd =1.35 DL+1.5LL
=1.35*12.12+1.5*1
Pd = 17.86KN/m2
2.5.4. Moment Analysis
2.5.4.1. Moment calculation for two way slab using coefficient method
The first stage of design is to determine support and span moments for all panels.
The support and span moments are calculated as

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 53

 B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Figure 2.14. Moment distribution

Mi= αipdlx2
Mxs = αxs*pd* Lx²
Mxf = αxf*pd*Lx²
Mys=αys*pd*Lx²
Myf=αyf*pd*Lx²
Where
Mi=Design moment per unite width of reference
Pd=Uniformly Distributed Design Load
αi=Coefficient given in table A-1
(Ly/Lx)= Support condition.
Mxs =Support moment in the shorter direction of a panel.
Mxf =Field moment in the shorter direction of a panel
Mys Support moment in the longer direction of a panel.
Myf = field moment in the longer direction of a panel
 For roof one
Table 2.12. Computation of span and filed moments by using coefficient method for roof one
support bending moment coefficients Banding moments
PANEL type
ly/lx Pd lx s ys XF YF Mxs Mys Mxf Myf
RFS-1
1.7 11.62 2.52 0.085 0.047 0.064 0.036 7.558 4.169 5.944 3.194

RFS-3
1.4 11.62 4.89 0.068 0.039 0.051 0.030 22.716 13.023 17.04 10.02
Case 1

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 54

 B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

RFS-3
1.4 11.62 4.89 0.050 0.032 0.037 0.024 16.71 10.68 12.36 8.02
Case 2
RFS-4
1.1 11.62 4.89 0.044 0.039 0.033 0.029 14.698 13.028 11.024 9.687

RFS-5
1.6 11.62 3.30 0.086 0.039 0.045 0.029 13.08 5.933 6.85 4.41

RFS-6
1.8 11.62 3.74 0.064 0.039 0.048 0.029 12.506 7.621 9.383 5.667

RFS-7
1.4 11.62 3.74 0.055 0.039 0.041 0.029 10.74 7.62 8.01 5.66

RFS-8
1.7 11.62 4.11 0.060 0.039 0.046 0.029 14.16 9.2 10.86 6.84

RFS-9
1.3 11.62 4.15 0.069 0.047 0.051 0.036 16.601 11.308 12.270 8.662

RFS-10
1.1 11.62 2.65 0.042 0.032 0.032 0.024 6.58 5.02 5.02 3.76

RFS-11
1.2 11.62 2.07 0.048 0.036 0.039 0.029 2.873 2.335 2.155 1.736

 For roof two

Table 2.13. Computation of span and filed moments by using coefficient method for roof two
support bending moment coefficients Banding moments
PANEL type
ly/lx Pd lx s ys XF YF Mxs Mys Mxf Myf
RFS-1
1.9 17.86 3.3 0.091 0.047 0.068 0.036 17.69 9.14 13.22 7.00
Case-1
RFS-1
1.9 17.86 3.3 0 0.058 0.101 0.044 0 11.28 19.64 8.56
Case-2

The maximum moment occurs in case 2 take those moments for design.

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 55

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

2.5.4.2. Moment calculation for cantilevers on roof sable

𝑷𝒅 ∗𝑳𝒙𝟐
𝑴= 𝟐

Where:-
Pd - Factored design load of the cantiliver
Lx – Shorter span of the panel
 For roof one
CS-1

Pd =11.62KN/m2
LX=1.22
𝑷𝒅 ∗𝑳𝒙𝟐
𝑴=
𝟐
= 13.97KN/m2*(1.22m)2 /2
= 8.647m2
CS-2

Pd = 11.62KN/m2
LX = 1.06m
𝑷𝒅 ∗𝑳𝒙𝟐
𝑴=
𝟐
= 13.97KN/m2*(1.06m)2/2
= 6.528KN/m2
For CS-3, CS-4 ,CS-5 & CS-6

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 56

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Pd = 11.62 KN/m2
LX = 1.5m
𝑷𝒅 ∗𝑳𝒙𝟐
𝑴=
𝟐
= 13.97KN/m2*(1.5 m)2/2
=13.07KN/m2
 for roof two
CS-1 and CS-2

Pd =17.86KN/m2
LX=1.5
𝑷𝒅 ∗𝑳𝒙𝟐
𝑴= 𝟐

M =17.86KN/m2 * (1.5m)2/2
= 20.09KN
2.5.4.3. Moment calculation for RFS-2 using strip method
Problems with unsupported edges could not be handled by conventional procedures so easily.
The real power of the strip method becomes evident when dealing with non-standard problems,
such as slabs with unsupported edge, slabs with holes, or slabs with reentrant edges (L – shaped
slabs). For a slab with one edge unsupported, a reasonable basis for analysis by the simple strip
method is that a strip along the unsupported edge takes a greater load per unit area than the actual
load acting, i.e., the strip along the unsupported edge acts as a support for the strips at right
angles. Such

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 57

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

strips have been referred to by Wood and Armer as “strong bands”. A strong band is, in effect,
an integral beam, usually having the same total depth as the remainder of the slab but containing
a concentration of reinforcement. The strip may be made deeper than the rest of the slab to
increase its carrying capacity, but this will not usually be necessary.

Figure 2.15. Equivalent area conversion for RFS-2

Figure 2.16. Strip method boundary condition for slab with free edge in the long direction.
Overall depth of the slab D = 210mm
Design load Pd = 13.97KN/m2
Assumptions:
Width of strong band along the free edge = 0.65 m
In the main slab portion k1 = 0.45
This implies Slab load in y direction = 0.45 * 13.97 = 6.28 kN/m2 and
In x direction = 0.55 * 13.97 = 7.68 kN/m2
Y direction slab strip

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 58

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

As an initial assumption,
Negative moment at the supported edge = ½ * the free cantilever moment Consider the strip
length as to span up to the center of the strong band;
i.e. 4.24 + 0.65/2 = 4.565m
Hence mys = ½ * (6.28*4.5652)/2 = 32.72 kNm

0.65 2 32.72
0.45(1− ) −2∗ ∗4.892
4.89 13.97
K2 = 0.65 = 0.57
065/4.89(2− )
4.89

Uplift in the strong band for Y direction strips = 0.57 * 13.97 = 7.96 kN/m2
Revised negative moment at the left support
mys = 6.28*4.242/2 – 7.96*0.65*4.565 = 32.83kNm
The maximum positive moment in the Y direction strip will be located at the point of zero shear.
ie. 7.96 * 0.65 – 6.28(y1 – 0.65) = 0
y1 = 1.47m

Strip along A-A

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 59

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Strip along B-B

Strip along C-C

Maximum Positive moment at (y1 = 1.47 m)

= 7.96 * 0.65 * (1.47 – 0.65/2) – 6.28 * (1.47 – 0.65)2/2 = 3.814 kNm
X direction moments:
strip along A-A:
Load = (1+k2)w = (1+0.57) * 13.97 = 21.93 kN/m2
Load per meter run along the strip = 21.93 * 0.65 = 14.26kN/m
Simply supported span moment = 14.26 * 6.862/8 = 83.86 kNm
As Hillerborg the ratio of support and span moment is between 1.5 to 2.5
Cantilever moment: Mx = Mxs + Mxf
Mxs / Mxf = 1.5 to 2.5 ….take as 2
Mxs / Mxf = 2  Mxs = 2* Mxf
Mx = Mxf + 2Mxf = 3Mxf
Mxf = 1/3Mx And Mxs = 2/3 Mx
Negative moment at the supports = (2/3) * 83.86 = 55.91 kNm
Positive moment at the span = (1/3) * 83.86 = 27.95kNm
strip along B-B:
Load per meter run along the strip = 7.68 kN/m
Simply supported span moment = 7.68 * 6.862/8 = 45.12 kNm
Negative moment at the supports = (2/3) * 45.12 = 30.12 kNm
Positive moment at the span = (1/3) * 45.12 = 15.04 kNm

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 60

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Figure 2.17. Unadjusted moment for roof slab 1(KNm)

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 61

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

2.5.5. Moment adjustment for roof slab

For each support over which the slab is continuous there will thus generally be two different
support moments. The difference may be distributed between the panels on either side of the
support to equalize their moments, as in the moment distribution method for frames. Two
methods of differing accuracy are given here for treating the effects of this redistribution on
moments away from the support.
i. Support moment adjustment
 Method-1 it may be used when difference between initial support moment are less than
20 percent of the larger moment. When such a case has occurred dimensioning is
normally carried out either based on the average initial moment at the support.
 Method-2 it may be used when difference between initial support moment are greater
than 20 percent of the larger moment. When such a case has occurred dimensioning is
carried out using the stiffness of the slab and the effective length. Here we use moment
distribution method to adjust support moment.

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 62

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

 For roof one

Adjustment for RFS-1 & CS-1
Mys (RFS-1) = 4.169KNm
Mys (CS-1) = 10.4KNm
𝑀𝐿−𝑀𝑅 10.4−4.169
M = 𝑀𝐿 ∗ 100% = 10.4 ∗ 100 = 59.9 > 20%
we use moment distribution method
Madjusted = ML- KL/(KL+KS) * ∆𝑀
ML = 10.4 , MS = 4.166 , ∆𝑀 = ML – MS … = 6.234
KL = 3/4(I/L) , KS = 3/4(I/L) …KL = 0.615 and KR = 0.17
Madjusted = 10.4 – 0.615/(0.615+0.17) * 6.234 = 5.5KNm
Table 2.14. Adjusted support moment for roof slab
Unadjusted support Adjusted
Moment Method of
panel moment ΔM/Mlarge*100
notation adjustment moment
Ms Ms
Mxs 35.33 Moment
RFS-3&RFS-4 22.716 14.69 17.91
distribution
Mxs 17.81 Average
RFS-4&RFS-6 14.698 12.08 13.39
method
Mys 22.15 Moment
RFS-5&RFS-6 7.621 5.933 6.55
distribution
Mxs 17.89 Average
RFS-5&RFS-7 13.08 10.74 11.91
method
Mxs 14.69 Average
RFS-6&RFS-8 14.16 12.08 13.12
method
Mys 17.18 Average
RFS-7&RFS-8 9.2 7.62 8.41
method
Mxs 35.29 Moment
RFS-7&RFS-9 16.601 10.74 14.09
distribution
Mxs 38.73 Moment
RFS-7&RFS-10 10.74 6.58 9.35
distribution
RFS-10&RFS- Mys 0 Average
5.02 5.02 5.02
11 method
Mxs 53.53 Moment
RFS-11&RFS-8 14.16 6.58 11.63
distribution
ii. Span moment adjustment
If the moment in the adjusted support decreases, the span moment is increased to compensate for
the changes in the support moments. The design moments for the spans are calculated as:
Increase in span moment = change of the support moment * factor given in table A-2

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 63

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

M𝑥𝑓 = M𝑥𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cx
M𝑦𝑓 = M𝑦𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cy
Where ∆M = the change in moment in all supports.
Cx and Cy are coefficients for adjusting span moments
FOR RFS-1
∆M= ML-MD = 10.4 – 4.169 = 6.231
Cx = 0.285
Cy = 0.074
M𝑥𝑓 = M𝑥𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cx = 5.94 + 6.231 * 0.285 = 7.712
M𝑦𝑓 = M𝑦𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cy = 3.194 + 6.231 *0.074 = 3.66
FOR RFS-3
∆M= ML-MD = 22.716 – 14.698 = 8.02
Cx = 0.314
Cy = 0.374
M𝑥𝑓 = M𝑥𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cx = 17.04 + 8.02 * 0.314 = 19.56
M𝑦𝑓 = M𝑦𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cy = 10.02 + 8.02 *0.374 = 13.02
FOR RFS-4
∆M= ML-MD = 14.698 – 12.08 = 2.62
Cx = 0.443
Cy = 0.289
M𝑥𝑓 = M𝑥𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cx = 11.024 + 2.62 * 0.443 = 12.18
M𝑦𝑓 = M𝑦𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cy = 9.687 + 2.62 *0.289 = 10.44
FOR RFS-5
∆M= ML-MD = 13.08 – 10.74 = 2.34
Cx = 0.484
Cy = 0.248
M𝑥𝑓 = M𝑥𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cx = 6.85 + 2.34 * 0.484 = 7.98
M𝑦𝑓 = M𝑦𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cy = 4.41 + 2.34 *0.248 = 4.99
FOR RFS-6
∆M= ML-MD = 7.621 – 5.933 = 1.688

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 64

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Cx = 0.315
Cy = 0.110
M𝑥𝑓 = M𝑥𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cx = 9.35 + 1.688 * 0.315 = 9.88
M𝑦𝑓 = M𝑦𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cy = 5.667 + 1.688 *0.110 = 5.85
FOR RFS-7
∆M= ML-MD = 10.74 – 6.58 = 4.16
Cx = 0.461
Cy = 0.272
M𝑥𝑓 = M𝑥𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cx = 8.06 + 4.16 * 0.461 = 9.98
M𝑦𝑓 = M𝑦𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cy = 5.66 + 4.16 *0.272 = 6.79
FOR RFS-8
∆M= ML-MD = 14.16 – 6.58 = 7.58
Cx = 0.373
Cy = 0.350
M𝑥𝑓 = M𝑥𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cx = 10.86 + 7.58 * 0.373 = 13.61
M𝑦𝑓 = M𝑦𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cy = 6.84 + 7.58 *0.350 = 9.49
FOR RFS-9
∆M= ML-MD = 11.308 – 5.02 = 6.28
Cx = 0.344
Cy = 0.364
M𝑥𝑓 = M𝑥𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cx = 12.27+ 6.28 * 0.344 = 14.43
M𝑦𝑓 = M𝑦𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cy = 8.662 + 6.28 *0.364 = 10.95

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 65

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Figure 2.18. Adjusted roof slab moment for roof one

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 66

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Figure 2.19. Adjusted roof slab moment for roof two

2.5.6. Flexural Reinforcement design for roof slab
Material Data, C-20/25, S-400
Effective depth, d = 180mm
Width, b=1000mm
𝑓𝑐𝑘 20
Fck=20mpa fcd = = 1.5 = 13.33Mpa
1.5
𝑓𝑦𝑘 400
Fyk = 400 Mpa fyd = 1.15 = 1.15 = 347.83Mpa

Checking of depth for flexure for roof slab one

𝑴𝒎𝒂𝒙
d>√
𝟎.𝟐𝟗𝟓∗𝒃∗𝒇𝒄𝒅

effective depth for roof sabe d=1800mm and Mmax = 20.09KNm

20.09∗106
250 > √0.295∗1000∗13.33 = 71.47mm < 180mm……okey!!

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 67

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Checking of depth for flexure for roof slab two

𝑴𝒎𝒂𝒙
d>√
𝟎.𝟐𝟗𝟓∗𝒃∗𝒇𝒄𝒅

effective depth for roof sabe d=180mm and Mmax = 20.09KNm

20.09∗106
250 > √0.295∗1000∗13.33 = 71.47mm < 180mm……okey!!

Reinforcement Design
As =  b*d
For selected bar diameter the spacing is calculated using the following formula:
𝑎𝑠
S
𝐴𝑠

Where : as area of single bar

As calculated area of steel
S spacing
All calculated area of steel (As) is compared with As min and all calculated spacing is compared
with max S as ES-EN provision.

ASmin= min *b*d where min= 0.5/fyk

The spacing of bars should not exceed smax,slabs.
 for the principal reinforcement,
3𝐷
𝑆 = 𝑚𝑖𝑛 { 400 }
𝑆 − 𝑐𝑎𝑙𝑐𝑢𝑙𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑑
 for secondary reinforcement
3.5𝐷
𝑆 = 𝑚𝑖𝑛 { 450 }
𝑆 − 𝑐𝑎𝑙𝑐𝑢𝑙𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑑
 Reinforcement Design for roof slab one
Sample calculation for RFS-1
For Mys = 7.558KNm

 [1 − √1 − 𝑏∗𝑑2𝑀𝑢 𝑓𝑐𝑑

2 ∗𝑓𝑐𝑑 ] 𝑓𝑦𝑑

2∗7.558∗106 13.33
=[1 − √1 − 1000∗2502 ∗13.33] 347.83 = 0.00035

min= 0.5/fyk = 0.5/400 = 0.00125

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 68

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

𝜌 = 0.00035
 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 {𝜌 = 0.00125
} Therefore  = 0.00125
min

As = 0.00125*1000*250 = 312.5mm2
Consider ɸ10mm reinforcement bar
𝜋∗102
𝑎𝑠
S  4
= 251.32𝑚𝑚
𝐴𝑠 312.5

3 ∗ 280 = 840
𝑆 = 𝑚𝑖𝑛 { 400 } Therefore S = 250mm
250
𝑎𝑠 78.5
Area of steel provided (As) =  = 1000 ∗ = 314𝑚𝑚2
𝑆 250

For Mxs = 5.5KNm

 [1 − √1 − 𝑏∗𝑑2𝑀𝑢 𝑓𝑐𝑑

2 ∗𝑓𝑐𝑑 ] 𝑓𝑦𝑑

2∗5.5∗106 13.33
=[1 − √1 − 1000∗2502 ∗13.33] 347.83 = 0.00025

min= 0.5/fyk = 0.5/400 = 0.00125

𝜌 = 0.00025
 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 {𝜌 = 0.00125
} Therefore  = 0.00125
min

As = 0.00125*1000*250 = 312.5mm2
Consider ɸ10mm reinforcement bar
𝜋∗102
𝑎𝑠
S  4
= 251.32𝑚𝑚
𝐴𝑠 312.5

3 ∗ 280 = 840
𝑆 = 𝑚𝑖𝑛 { 400 } Therefore S = 250mm
250
𝑎𝑠 78.5
Area of steel provided (As) =  = 1000 ∗ = 314𝑚𝑚2
𝑆 250

For Mxf = 7.72KNm

 [1 − √1 − 𝑏∗𝑑2𝑀𝑢 𝑓𝑐𝑑

2 ∗𝑓𝑐𝑑 ] 𝑓𝑦𝑑

2∗7.72∗106 13.33
=[1 − √1 − 1000∗2502 ∗13.33] 347.83 = 0.00035

min= 0.5/fyk = 0.5/400 = 0.00125

𝜌 = 0.00025
 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 {𝜌 = 0.00125
} Therefore  = 0.00125
min

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 69

 B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

As = 0.00125*1000*250 = 312.5mm2
Consider ɸ10mm reinforcement bar
𝜋∗102
𝑎𝑠
S  4
= 251.32𝑚𝑚
𝐴𝑠 312.5

3 ∗ 280 = 840
𝑆 = 𝑚𝑖𝑛 { 400 } Therefore S = 250mm
250
𝑎𝑠 78.5
Area of steel provided (As) =  = 1000 ∗ = 314𝑚𝑚2
𝑆 250

For Myf = 3.65KNm

 [1 − √1 − 𝑏∗𝑑2𝑀𝑢 𝑓𝑐𝑑

2 ∗𝑓𝑐𝑑 ] 𝑓𝑦𝑑

2∗3.65∗106 13.33
=[1 − √1 − 1000∗2502 ∗13.33] 347.83 = 0.00017

min= 0.5/fyk = 0.5/400 = 0.00125

𝜌 = 0.00025
 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 {𝜌 = 0.00125
} Therefore  = 0.00125
min

As = 0.00125*1000*250 = 312.5mm2
Consider ɸ10mm reinforcement bar
𝜋∗102
𝑎𝑠
S  4
= 251.32𝑚𝑚
𝐴𝑠 312.5

3 ∗ 280 = 840
𝑆 = 𝑚𝑖𝑛 { 400 } Therefore S = 250mm
250
𝑎𝑠 78.5
Area of steel provided (As) =  = 1000 ∗ = 314𝑚𝑚2
𝑆 250

Table 2.15. Flexural Reinforcement calculation for the roof floor slab one(1)
Adjusted As
panel M
M min  As(mm2) S
provided
provide
b/n RS-1 &
Mxs 10.4 0.00125 0.00093 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
C-S1
Mxf 7.72 0.00125 0.00069 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
On RS-1
Myf 3.66 0.00125 0.00033 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
b/n RS-3 &
Mys 22.716 0.00125 0.00207 372.90 200 392.7 Ø 10 c/c 200
CS-2
b/n RS-3 &
Mxs 15.72 0.00125 0.00142 255.82 250 314.16 Ø 10 c/c 250
C-S3

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 70

 B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

b/n RS-3 &

Mys 17.91 0.00125 0.00162 292.25 250 314.16 Ø 10 c/c 250
RS-4
Mxf 13.02 0.00125 0.00117 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
On RS-3
Myf 19.56 0.00125 0.00178 319.83 200 392.7 Ø 10 c/c 200
b/n RS-4 &
Mys 13.39 0.00125 0.00121 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
RS-6
Mxf 10.44 0.00125 0.00094 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
On RS-4 Myf 12.18 0.00125 0.00110 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
Mxs 13.023 0.00125 0.00117 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
b/n RS-5 &
Mxs 6.55 0.00125 0.00059 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
RS-6
Mxf 4.99 0.00125 0.00045 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
On RS-5 Myf 7.98 0.00125 0.00071 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
Mxs 5.933 0.00125 0.00053 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
Mxf 10.02 0.00125 0.00090 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
On RS-6
Myf 17.04 0.00125 0.00154 277.76 250 314.16 Ø 10 c/c 250
b/n RS-5 &
Mys 11.9 0.00125 0.00107 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
RS-7
b/n RS-6 &
Mys 13.12 0.00125 0.00118 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
RS-8
b/n RS-6 &
Mxs 15.72 0.00125 0.00142 255.82 250 314.16 Ø 10 c/c 250
CS-4
Mxf 5.85 0.00125 0.00052 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
On RS-7 Myf 9.88 0.00125 0.00089 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
Mxs 7.62 0.00125 0.00068 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
b/n RS-7 &
Mxs 8.41 0.00125 0.00075 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
RS-8
b/n RS-7 &
Mxs 14.09 0.00125 0.00127 228.84 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
RS-9
b/n RS-7 &
Mys 9.35 0.00125 0.00084 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
RS-10

Mxf 9.49 0.00125 0.00085 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300

On RS-8
Myf 13.61 0.00125 0.00123 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
b/n RS-8 &
Mxs 15.72 0.00125 0.00142 255.82 250 314.16 Ø 10 c/c 250
CS-5
b/n RS-8 &
Mys 11.63 0.00125 0.00105 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
RS-11
b/n RS-9 &
Mxs 9.2 0.00125 0.00083 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
RS-10
Mxs 10.95 0.00125 0.00098 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
On RS-9
Myf 14.43 0.00125 0.00130 234.46 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
Mxf 3.76 0.00125 0.00034 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
On RS-10
Myf 5.02 0.00125 0.00045 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
b/n RS-10 & Mys 30.22 0.00125 0.00278 500.86 150 523.6 Ø 10 c/c 150

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 71

 B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

CS-6
b/n RS-10 &
Mxs 5.02 0.00125 0.00045 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
RS-11
Mxf 8.68 0.00125 0.00078 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
On RS-11
Myf 12.27 0.00125 0.00110 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
b/n RS-11 &
Mxs 15.72 0.00125 0.00142 255.82 250 314.16 Ø 10 c/c 250
CS-5
b/n RS-11 &
Mys 30.22 0.00125 0.00278 500.86 150 523.6 Ø 10 c/c 150
CS-6

 Reinforcement Design for roof-2

A Sample calculation for RFS-1
For Mys = 20.09KNm

 [1 − √1 − 𝑏∗𝑑2𝑀𝑢 𝑓𝑐𝑑

2 ∗𝑓𝑐𝑑 ] 𝑓𝑦𝑑

2∗20.09∗106 13.33
=[1 − √1 − 1000∗1802 ∗13.33] 347.83 = 0.0018

min= 0.5/fyk = 0.5/400 = 0.00125

𝜌 = 0.0018
 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 {𝜌 = 0.00125
} Therefore  = 0.0018
min

As = 0.0018*1000*180 = 324mm2
Consider ɸ10mm reinforcement bar
𝜋∗102
𝑎𝑠
S  4
= 242𝑚𝑚
𝐴𝑠 324

3 ∗ 210 = 630
𝑆 = 𝑚𝑖𝑛 { 400 } Therefore S = 230mm
230
𝑎𝑠 78.5
Area of steel provided (As) =  = 1000 ∗ = 341.3𝑚𝑚2
𝑆 230

For Mxs = 20.09KNm

 [1 − √1 − 𝑏∗𝑑2𝑀𝑢 𝑓𝑐𝑑

2 ∗𝑓𝑐𝑑 ] 𝑓𝑦𝑑

2∗20.09∗106 13.33
=[1 − √1 − 1000∗1802 ∗13.33] 347.83 = 0.0018

min= 0.5/fyk = 0.5/400 = 0.00125

𝜌 = 0.0018
 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 {𝜌 = 0.00125
} Therefore  = 0.0018
min

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 72

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

As = 0.0018*1000*180 = 324mm2
Consider ɸ10mm reinforcement bar
𝜋∗102
𝑎𝑠
S  4
= 242𝑚𝑚
𝐴𝑠 324

3 ∗ 210 = 630
𝑆 = 𝑚𝑖𝑛 { 400 } Therefore S = 230mm
230
𝑎𝑠 78.5
Area of steel provided (As) =  = 1000 ∗ = 341.3𝑚𝑚2
𝑆 230

For Mxf = 13.22KNm

 [1 − √1 − 𝑏∗𝑑2𝑀𝑢 𝑓𝑐𝑑

2 ∗𝑓𝑐𝑑 ] 𝑓𝑦𝑑

2∗18.45∗106 13.33
=[1 − √1 − 1000∗1802 ∗13.33] 347.83 = 0.0016

min= 0.5/fyk = 0.5/400 = 0.00125

𝜌 = 0.0016
 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 {𝜌 = 0.00125
} Therefore  = 0.0016
min

As = 0.0016*1000*180 = 288mm2
Consider ɸ10mm reinforcement bar
𝜋∗102
𝑎𝑠
S  4
= 272𝑚𝑚
𝐴𝑠 288

3 ∗ 210 = 630
𝑆 = 𝑚𝑖𝑛 { 400 } Therefore S = 250mm
250
𝑎𝑠 78.5
Area of steel provided (As) =  = 1000 ∗ = 314𝑚𝑚2
𝑆 250

For Myf = 7.00KNm

 [1 − √1 − 𝑏∗𝑑2𝑀𝑢 ]
𝑓𝑐𝑑
2 ∗𝑓𝑐𝑑 𝑓𝑦𝑑

2∗9.75∗106 13.33
=[1 − √1 − 1000∗1802 ∗13.33] 347.83 = 0.00087

min= 0.5/fyk = 0.5/400 = 0.00125

𝜌 = 0.00087
 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 {𝜌 = 0.00125
} Therefore  = 0.00125
min

As = 0.00125*1000*180 = 225mm2

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 73

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Consider ɸ10mm reinforcement bar

𝜋∗102
𝑎𝑠
S  4
= 300𝑚𝑚
𝐴𝑠 225

3 ∗ 210 = 630
𝑆 = 𝑚𝑖𝑛 { 400 } Therefore S = 300mm
300
𝑎𝑠 78.5
Area of steel provided (As) =  = 1000 ∗ = 261𝑚𝑚2 
𝑆 300

 REINFORCEMENT FOR STRIP METHOD (RFS-2) on roof one

Table 2.16. Reinforcement for strip method
Sp
Moment Depth St ratio 𝜌min As=ρbd Spacing Dia of
design 2
provide
(KNm) Chk(mm) ρ condition (mm ) (mm) Rod provide
(mm)
X-
Midd
Mxs = 55.91 119.23 0.00533 0.00125 959.4 81.82 80 Ø10 c/c 80
Mxf = 27.97 84.33 0.00257 0.00125 462.6 169.69 150 Ø10 c/c 150
x-
edge
Mxs = 30.12 87.52 0.00277 0.00125 498.6 157.44 150 Ø10 c/c 150
Mxf = 15.04 61.84 0.00136 0.00125 244.8 320.66 300 Ø10 c/c 300
Y-
midd
Mys = 32.83 91.37 0.00303 0.00125 545.4 143.93 140 Ø10 c/c 140
Myf =

2.5.7. Load Transfer to the Supporting Beams

The uniformly distributed loads on slab panels is eventually transferred to the supporting beams
based up on the tributary area the beam is effective in carrying (supporting) the distributed load
and continuity condition of the slab panels.

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 74

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

To facilitate load transfer computation, the recent version of EBCS-2 provides shear force
reaction force transfer coefficient in tabular fore to calculate the load to be transferred to the
supporting beam.
The design loads on beams supporting solid slabs spanning in two directions at right
angles
Supporting uniformly distributed loads may be assessed from the following equations.
𝑽𝒙 = 𝜷𝒗𝒙 ∗ 𝑷𝒅 ∗ 𝑳𝒙
𝑽𝒚 = 𝜷𝒗𝒚 ∗ 𝑷𝒅 ∗ 𝑳𝒙
The load transfer coefficients βvx and βvy are determined from ES EN -2, 2015 Table A-3and the
assumed distribution of the load on the supporting beams is as shown below.

Figure 2.20. Distribution of load on a beam supporting a two-way spanning slab

The design load on a beam determined in the above may be taken as the maximum shear in the
slab at of the support, which will be distributed on 75% of the span of the beam.
 Load transfer for roof one
Sample calculation load transfer from RFS-1 to beam
Pd = 11.62KN/m2
Lx = 2.52m
Ly/Lx = 1.73
vxc = 0.59
vxd = 0.38
vyc = 0
vyd = 0.29
Vxc =vxc *pd*Lx Vxd =vxd *pd*Lx
= 0.590* 16.76 * 2.52 = 16.69KN = 0.38*16.76 *2.52= 11.13KN
Vyc =vyc *pd*Lx Vyd =vyd *pd*Lx

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 75

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

= 0* 16.76 * 2.52 = 0KN = 0.29*16.76 *2.52= 8.49KN

Computation of the rest of the panel for each floor slabs are shown as Tabular form as follow:
Table 2.17. Load Transfer to the Supporting Beams for roof floor slab one
Panel Ly/Lx Lx(m) Pd Shear coefficient Loads transferred

11.62 vxc 0.57 Vxc 16.69

11.62 vxd 0.38 Vxd 11.13
S-1 1.73 2.52
11.62 vyc 0 Vyc 0.00
11.62 vyd 0.29 Vyd 8.49
11.62 vxc 0.43 Vxc 24.43
11.62 vxd 0 Vxd 0.00
S-2 1.4 4.89
11.62 vyc 0.43 Vyc 24.43
11.62 vyd 0 Vyd 0.00
11.62 vxc 0.44 Vxc 19.12
11.62 vxd 0.29 Vxd 12.60
S-3 1.1 3.74
11.62 vyc 0.40 Vyc 17.38
11.62 vyd 0.26 Vyd 11.30
11.62 vxc 0.36 Vxc 13.80
11.62 vxd 0 Vxd 0.00
S-4 1.0 3.3
11.62 vyc 0.36 Vyc 13.80
11.62 vyd 0.24 Vyd 9.20
11.62 vxc 0.465 Vxc 17.83
11.62 vxd 0 Vxd 0.00
S-5 1.6 3.3
11.62 vyc 0.33 Vyc 12.65
11.62 vyd 0 Vyd 0.00
11.62 vxc 0.49 Vxc 21.29
11.62 vxd 0 Vxd 0.00
S-6 1.7 3.74
11.62 vyc 0.36 Vyc 15.65
11.62 vyd 0.24 Vyd 10.43

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 76

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

11.62 vxc 0.43 Vxc 18.69

11.62 vxd 0 Vxd 0.00
S-7 1.4 3.74
11.62 vyc 0.33 Vyc 14.34
11.62 vyd 0 Vyd 0.00
11.62 vxc 0.55 Vxc 26.27
11.62 vxd 0 Vxd 0.00
S-8 1.6 4.11
11.62 vyc 0.40 Vyc 19.10
11.62 vyd 0.24 Vyd 11.46
11.62 vxc 0.44 Vxc 21.22
11.62 vxd 0 Vxd 0.00
S-9 1.3 4.15
11.62 vyc 0.36 Vyc 17.36
11.62 vyd 0.24 Vyd 11.57
11.62 vxc 0.42 Vxc 12.93
11.62 vxd 0 Vxd 0.00
S-10 1.2 2.65
11.62 vyc 0.36 Vyc 11.09
11.62 vyd 0.24 Vyd 7.39
11.62 vxc 0.52 Vxc 16.01
11.62 vxd 0 Vxd 0.00
S-11 2 2.65
11.62 vyc 0.36 Vyc 11.09
11.62 vyd 0.24 Vyd 7.39

 Load transfer for roof two

Sample calculation load transfer from RFS-1 to beam on roof 2
Pd = 17.86KN/m2
Lx = 3.3m
Ly/Lx = 1.9
vxc = 0.58
vxd = 0.39
vyc = 0.4

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 77

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

vyd = 0.26
Vxc =vxc *pd*Lx Vxd =vxd *pd*Lx
= 0.58* 17.86 * 3.3 = 34.18KN = 0.39*17.86 *3.3= 22.99KN
Vyc =vyc *pd*Lx Vyd =vyd *pd*Lx
= 0.4* 17.86 * 3.3 = 23.58KN = 0.26*17.86 *3.3= 15.3KN

Load transfer to beam from one-way cantilever slab

R = P+PDL*Lx
Where:
PDL = unfactored dead load on the cantilever slab
R = dead load transfer to the supporting beam
Sample calculation for roof floor slab CS-1
Pdl = 11.62KN/m2
P = 0KN
Lx = 1.22m
R = 0+11.62*1.22 = 14.17KN/m
Table 2.18. Load transfer to beam from one-way cantilever slab for roof floor slab
Panel Lx PDL(KN/m2) P(KN) R(KN/m)
CS-1 1.22 11.62 0 14.17
CS-2 1.06 11.62 0 12.32
CS-3 1.5 11.62 0 17.43
CS-4 1.5 11.62 0 17.43
CS-5 1.5 11.62 0 17.43
CS-6 1.5 11.62 0 17.43

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 78

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

2.5.8. Verification of the shear resistance for each floor slabs

For the verification of the shear resistance, the following symbols are defined: According to
ESEN-2:2015 Exp (6.2)
VRd,c = is the design shear resistance of the member without shear reinforcement.
VRd,s = is the design value of the shear force which can be sustained by the yielding shear
reinforcement.
VRd,max = is the design value of the maximum shear force which can be sustained by the member,
limited by crushing of the compression struts.
In regions of the member where VEd <= VRd,c no calculated shear reinforcement is
necessary. VEd is the design shear force in the section considered resulting from external loading
and restressing (bonded or unboned).
The design value for the shear resistance VRd,c is given by:
1
𝑉Rd, c = [𝐶Rd, c𝐾(100  𝑓ck)3 + 𝑘1cp] 𝑏w𝑑

With a minimum of
𝑉Rd, c = (𝑉𝑚𝑖𝑛 + 𝐾1𝜎𝐶𝑃)𝑏𝑤𝑑

The design value for the shear resistance VRd, c is given by:

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 79

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building
1
𝑉Rd, c = [𝐶Rd, c𝐾(100  𝑓ck)3 + 𝑘1cp] 𝑏w𝑑

With a minimum of
𝑉Rd, c = (𝑉𝑚𝑖𝑛 + 𝐾1𝜎𝐶𝑃)𝑏𝑤𝑑
Where:
 fck = 20mpa
200 200
 k= 1+ √ ≥ 2.0 = 1 + √180 = 2.054 > 2 … 𝑛𝑜𝑡 𝑜𝑘. 𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒𝑓𝑜𝑟 𝑘 = 2
𝑑

 𝑉𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 0.035 ∗ 𝑘 3⁄2 ∗ 𝑓𝑐𝑘 1⁄2 = 0.4427

 Ast is the area of the tensile reinforcement = 225mm2
 bw is the smallest width of the cross-section in the tensile area (mm) take one meter strip
=1000mm
𝐴𝑠 𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑣𝑖𝑑𝑒𝑑 261.8
 𝜌1 = ≤ 0.02 = 1000∗180 0.00145 < 0.02 … 𝑖𝑡𝑠 𝑜𝑘𝑒𝑦 𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒𝑓𝑜𝑟𝑒 𝜌 = 0.00145
𝑏𝑤𝑑

 Ac is the area of concrete cross-section (mm2)

𝑁𝑒𝑑
 𝜎𝑐𝑝 = = 0𝑁
𝐴𝑠

 𝑁𝑒𝑑: −𝑖𝑠 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑎𝑥𝑖𝑎𝑙 𝑓𝑜𝑟𝑐𝑒 𝑖𝑛 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑐𝑟𝑜𝑠𝑠 𝑠𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 𝑑𝑢𝑒 𝑡𝑜 𝑙𝑜𝑎𝑑𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑜𝑟 𝑝𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑠𝑖𝑛𝑔 [𝑖𝑛 𝑁](𝑁𝑒𝑑 >
0 𝑓𝑜𝑟 𝑐𝑜𝑝𝑚𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑠𝑖𝑜𝑛). 𝑇ℎ𝑒 𝑖𝑛𝑓𝑙𝑢𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑒 𝑜𝑓 𝑖𝑚𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑑 𝑑𝑒𝑓𝑜𝑟𝑚𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛𝑠 𝑜𝑛 𝑁ï` 𝑚𝑎𝑦 𝑏𝑒 𝑖𝑔𝑛𝑜𝑟𝑒𝑑. 𝐴𝑐
Is the area of concrete cross section [mm2].
0.18 0.18
 𝐶Rd, c = = = 0.12
𝛾𝑐 1.5

 K1=0.15
1
 𝑉Rd, c = [𝐶Rd, c𝐾(100  𝑓ck)3 + 𝑘1cp] 𝑏w𝑑

= [0.12*2(100*0.00145 ∗20)1/3 + 0.15*0] 1000 ∗ 180 =56137.14944N = 56.4KN

 𝑉Rd, c = (𝑉𝑚𝑖𝑛 + 𝐾1𝜎𝐶𝑃)𝑏𝑤𝑑
= (0.4427+ 0.15*0) 1000 ∗ 180 = 79686N = 79.686KN
 Maximum shear acting take 79.68KN
Max Vsd in ground floor slab is 26.27KN
 Thus, VRd,c > Vsd…. 79.68KN > 37.89KN….it is okay the section is adequate for shear.

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 80

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

2.5.9. Laps
 Forces are transmitted from one bar to another by:
 Lapping of bars, with or without bends or hooks;
 Welding;
 Mechanical devices assuring load transfer in tension-compression or in compression
only.
 The detailing of laps between bars shall be such that:
 The transmission of the forces from one bar to the next is assured;
 spalling of the concrete in the neighborhood of the joints does not occur;
 Large cracks which affect the performance of the structure do not occur.
 between bars should normally be staggered and not located in areas of high moments
/forces
 (e.g. plastic hinges).
 at any section should normally be arranged symmetrically.
 Lapping should be fulfill the following criteria as ES-EN 2015.
 Laps between bars should normally be staggered and not located in areas of high
moments/forces.
 At any section should normally be arranged symmetrically.
 The clear distance between lapped bars should not be greater than 4Φ or 50 mm,
otherwise the lap length should be increased by a length equal to the clear space where it
exceeds 4Φ or 50 mm;
 The longitudinal distance between two adjacent laps should not be less than 0,3 times the
lap length, l0;
 In case of adjacent laps, the clear distance between adjacent bars should not be less than
2Φ or 20 mm.

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 81

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Figure 2.21. Adjacent laps

Lap Length
The design lap length is:
lo= α1 ∗ α2 ∗ α3 ∗ α5 ∗ α6 lb.rqd ≥ lo,min
Where:
lb.rqd is basic anchorage length
lo,min ≥ max {0.3 α6 lb.rqd; 15∅; 200 mm}
Values of α1, α2, α3 and α5 may be taken from table ;
α6 = Values of α6 are given in Table below.
Table 2.19. Values of the coefficient α6
Percentage of lapped bars relative to the total cross-section < 25% 30% 50% > 50%
Area
α6 1 1.15 1.4 1.5
Note: Intermediate values may be determined by interpolation.

 fbd = 2.25*®1 ∗ ®2 ∗fctd = 2.25*1*1*0.8587 = 1.93MPa

 lb.rqd =(∅/4)(αsd/fbd) = (8/4(434.78/1.93) =450.549
 L0= α1 ∗ α2 ∗ α3 ∗ α5 ∗ α6 lb.rqd ≥ lb.min
= 1*0.7*0.7*0.7*1*450.549 =154.538mm≥ lo,min
 Lo,min ≥ max {0.3 α6 lb,rqd; 15∅; 200 mm}
 lo,min ≥ max {0.3*1∗ 450.549 = 135.165mm; 15∗ 8 =120mm; 200 mm}
Therefore, Take l0 = 200mm

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 82

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

 Anchorage of longitudinal reinforcement for slab(ES EN 1991-1-1:2004 sec 8.4)

Reinforcing bars, wires or welded mesh fabrics shall be so anchored that the bond forces
are safely transmitted to the concrete avoiding longitudinal cracking or spalling. Transverse
reinforcement shall be provided if necessary.

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 83

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 84

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 85

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

CHAPTER THREE
ANALYSIS AND DESIGN OF SLAB
3.1. Introduction
Slabs are plate elements forming floors and roofs in buildings, which normally carry uniformly
distributed loads. Slabs may be simply supported or continuous over one or more supports and
are classified according to the method of support as follows.
 Spanning one –way between beams or walls
 Spanning two-way between the support beams or walls
There are two types of solid slabs based on the load transferring mechanisms. These are one way
and two way solid slabs.
One-way slabs transmit their load in one direction while two way slabs transmit their load in two
directions. These types of slabs are composed of rectangular panels supported at all four edges
by walls or beams stiff enough to be treated as unyielding.
Generally in our case, we have three types of slabs for design with the following major criteria’s.
i. One-way slab
They are those either supported on the two out of four opposite sides or the longer span to short
span ratio is greater than two. It transmits their load in one direction. Main reinforcement in each
element runs in one direction only. The slab is one way if the slab panel longer length to shorter
length ratio is greater than two (i.e. Ly/Lx > 2).
ii. Two-way slab
They are those supported on all four sides and the longer span to short span ratio is less than or
equal to two. It resists the applied load in two directions. Main reinforcement runs in both
directions where ratio of long to short span is less than or equal to two (i.e. Ly/Lx≤ 2).
iii. Cantilever slabs
They are those with a fixed support on only one out of four sides. These types of slabs are
composed of rectangular panels supported at all four edges by walls or beams stiff
enough to be treated as unyielding. In our case, most of the slabs are two-way and need to be
analyzed based on the principle of design. Two-way actions also it is composed of cantilever and
one-way slab.

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 86

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

The basement floor cannot be design it can be mesh with diameter of 8mm rebar or hard
core because of the following reason:
 Cracks adjacent and parallel to perimeter walls
 Cracks in partition walls built off the slab
3.2. Slab layout and naming

Figure 3.5. basement slab layout

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 87

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Figure 3.6. Ground floor slab layout

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 88

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Figure 3.7. 1st and 2nd floor slab layout

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 89

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Figure 3.8. 3rd floor slab layout

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 90

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Figure 3.9. 4th floor slab layout

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 91

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

3.3. Determination of governing concrete cover

The concrete cover is the distance from the surface of the reinforcement closest to the nearest
concrete surface (including links, stirrups, and surface reinforcement where relevant) and the
nearest concrete surface. Based on ES EN 2015 governing design cover is obtained as following;
Since slabs are strong in shear and it is even difficult to insert stirrups if required, the design here
is only for longitudinal bars.
Cnom = Cmin+ ∆Cdev
Requirements with regard to minimum cover, Cmin
As per ES EN-2 2015, section 4.4.1.2(2) P, puts the determination of Cmin satisfying the
requirements for both bond and environmental conditions. The nominal cover shall be specified
on the drawings. It is defined as a minimum cover, Cmin (see 4.4.1.2), plus an allowance in
design for deviation, ∆Cdev (see 4.4.1.3).
Minimum concrete cover, cmin shall be provided in order to ensure:
- the safe transmission of bond forces (see also Sections 7 and 8)
- the protection of the steel against corrosion (durability)
- an adequate fire resistance (see EN 1992-1-2)
The greater value for cmin satisfying the requirements for both bond and environmental conditions
shall be used.
Cmin = max {Cmin, b; Cmin, dur+∆Cdur, y-∆Cdur, st-∆Cdur, add; 10mm}
Where:
Cmin, b (minimum cover due to bond requirement, see 4.4.1.2 (3)
Cmin, dur (minimum cover due to environmental conditions, see 4.4.1.2 (5)
∆Cdur, γ (additive safety element, see 4.4.1.2 (6)
∆Cdur, st (reduction of minimum cover for use of stainless steel, see 4.4.1.2 (7)
∆Cdur, add (reduction of minimum cover for use of additional protection, see 4.4.1.2 (8)
However, ES EN-2 2015 also puts the recommendation values for ∆Cdur, γ = 0 from section
4.4.1.2 (6), for ∆Cdur, st = 0 from section 4.4.1.2 (7) and for ∆Cdur, add = 0 from section 4.4.1.2 (8).
Requirements with regard to bond Cmin, b
As per ES EN-2 2015, Table 4.2, gives the nominal aggregate size to be less than 32 mm and for
the separated arrangement of reinforcement bars the minimum requirements of cover regard ton

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 92

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

bond is the diameter of the main bars. In our case, the minimum cover regard to bond Cmin, b is 10
mm.
Requirements with regard to durability for reinforcement steel Cmin, dur
Then from ES EN-2 2015, Table 4.4N, the recommended Cmin, dur value with regard to durability
for reinforcing steel is given as 15 mm, using XC1 and structural class of S-4 according to,
section 4.4.1.2 (5).
Cmin = max {Cmin, b; Cmin, dur; 10 mm}
Cmin = max {10 mm; 15 mm; 10 mm}
Cmin = 15 mm
Allowance in design for deviation (∆Cdev)
Assuming no special quality control, we take the recommended value of ∆Cdev as 10mm from ES
EN-2 2015, section 4.4.13(2).
∆Cdev = 10mm
Therefore, determination of nominal cover Cnom is computed using equation-2 as follows:
Cnom = Cmin + ∆Cdev
Cnom = 15 mm+10 mm
Cnom = 25 mm is the required concrete cover for our slab case.
3.4. Computation of effective depth for deflection
As per ES EN-2 2015, section 7.4.2 (2) the minimum depth of a slab for deflection requirement
is computed by using the expression:
3⁄
𝐿 𝜌 𝜌 2 500
= 𝐾 ⌊11 + 1.5√𝑓𝑐𝑘 𝜌 + 3.2√𝑓𝑐𝑘 (𝜌 − 1) ⌋ ∗ 𝑓𝑦𝑘 𝑖𝑓 𝝆 ≤ 𝝆𝒐 1
𝑑 𝑜 𝑜

𝐿 𝑜 𝜌 1 𝜌 500
= 𝐾 ⌊11 + 1.5√𝑓𝑐𝑘 𝜌−𝜌 ′ + 12 √𝑓𝑐𝑘 √𝜌 ⌋ ∗ 𝑓𝑦𝑘
𝑖𝑓 𝝆 > 𝝆𝒐 2
𝑑 𝑜

Where:
L/d is the limit span/depth
K is the factor to take into account the different structural systems
ρ0 is the reference reinforcement ratio = √fck *10-3
ρ is the required tension reinforcement ratio at mid-span to resist the moment due to the
design loads (at support for cantilevers).

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 93

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

ρ’ is the required compression reinforcement ratio at mid-span to resist the moment due to
design loads (at support for cantilevers)
fck is characteristic strength of concrete in MPa units
 In the depth determination of the minimum deflection requirement, the largest calculated
effective depth of is taken.
Assumption: Slab is lightly reinforced (𝜌 = 0.5 %) i.e. 𝜌 = 5 * 10-3
𝜌𝑜 = √𝑓𝑐𝑘 ∗ 10−3
𝜌𝑜 = √20 ∗ 10−3= 4.5∗ 10−3
Therefore, 𝜌 = 5 * 10-3 > 𝜌𝑜 = √20 ∗ 10−3= 4.5∗ 10−3
So, the requirement for depth calculation is done by using the Equation 2 above.
𝐿 𝑜𝜌 1 𝜌
= 𝐾 ⌊11 + 1.5√𝑓𝑐𝑘 𝜌−𝜌 ′ + 12 √𝑓𝑐𝑘 √𝜌 ⌋ ∗ 500/𝑓𝑦𝑘
𝑑 𝑜

Sample calculations:
 For ground floor panel 1 or GS-1 – End span from Table 7.4N, K=1.3

𝐿 𝑜 𝜌 1 𝜌′
= 𝐾 ⌊11 + 1.5√𝑓𝑐𝑘 𝜌−𝜌 ′ + 12 √𝑓𝑐𝑘 √𝜌 ⌋
𝑑 𝑜

0.0045 1 0
=1.3 ⌊11 + 1.5√20 0.005−0 + 12 √20√0.0045 ⌋ = 22.15

500
𝑙 /𝑑 = 22.15 because we used S-400 multiply the value by 𝑓 = 1.25
𝑦𝑘

𝑙x /𝑑 = 22.15 *1.25 = 27.69

The effective depth d’ = lx/27.69= 2.7/27.69 * 1000 = 97.52 mm

 For cantilever ground floor panel 1 or CS-1 – Cantilever from Table 7.4N K=0.4
𝐿 𝑜𝜌 1 𝜌′
= K ⌊11 + 1.5√𝑓𝑐𝑘 𝜌−𝜌 ′ + 12 √𝑓𝑐𝑘 √𝜌 ⌋
𝑑 𝑜

0.0045 1 0
= 0.4 ⌊11 + 1.5√20 0.005−0 + 12 √20√0.0045 ⌋ = 6.82

500
𝑙 /𝑑= 6.82 because we used S-400 multiply the value by 𝑓 = 1.25
𝑦𝑘

𝑙x /𝑑 = 6.81*1.25 = 8.52
The effective depth d’ = lx/8.52= 1.35/8.52 * 1000 = 158.45 mm

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 94

 B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Now compute the effective depth for each slab as tabular form
Table 3.5. computation of effective depth for deflection for ground floor slab
d
Panel ID Type Ly Lx Ly/Lx k ρ 𝜌𝑜 l/d
(mm)
GS-1 End 4360 2520 1.73 1.3 0.005 0.0045 27.69 91.01
GS-3 End 5390 4890 1.1 1.3 0.005 0.0045 27.69 176.6
GS-4 End 3370 3300 1.02 1.3 0.005 0.0045 27.69 119.18
GS-5 End 5390 3300 1.63 1.3 0.005 0.0045 27.69 119.18
GS-6 End 6420 3740 1.72 1.3 0.005 0.0045 27.69 135.07
GS-7 End 5390 3740 1.44 1.3 0.005 0.0045 27.69 135.07
GS-8 End 6420 4110 1.56 1.3 0.005 0.0045 27.69 148.43
GS-9 End 5390 4110 1.31 1.3 0.005 0.0045 27.69 148.43
GS-10 End 5390 2650 2.03 1.3 0.005 0.0045 27.69 95.7
CS-1 Cantilever 2490 1220 2.04 0.4 0.005 0.0045 8.52 143.19
CS-2 Cantilever 2600 410 6.34 0.4 0.005 0.0045 8.52 48.12

The maximum effective depth is d’max = 176.6 mm

The overall depth is computed as D = d’max+cover+ main dia. /2 = 176.6+25+10/2 = 206.6 mm
Use the overall depth, D = 210 mm for analysis.
Hence; use the effective depth d’ = 210 – 25-10/2 = 180 𝑚𝑚
Table 3.6. computation of effective depth for deflection for 1st and 2nd floor slab
Panel ID Type Ly Lx Ly/Lx k ρ 𝜌𝑜 l/d d (mm)

S-1 End 4360 2520 1.73 1.3 0.005 0.0045 27.69 91.01
S-3 End 5390 4890 1.1 1.3 0.005 0.0045 27.69 176.6
S-4 End 3370 3300 1.02 1.3 0.005 0.0045 27.69 119.18
S-5 End 5390 3300 1.63 1.3 0.005 0.0045 27.69 119.18
S-6 End 6420 3740 1.72 1.3 0.005 0.0045 27.69 135.07

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 95

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

S-7 End 5390 3740 1.44 1.3 0.005 0.0045 27.69 135.07
S-8 End 6420 4110 1.56 1.3 0.005 0.0045 27.69 148.43
S-9 End 5390 4110 1.31 1.3 0.005 0.0045 27.69 148.43
S-10 End 2650 2250 1.18 1.3 0.005 0.0045 27.69 81.26
S-11 End 5390 2650 2.03 1.3 0.005 0.0045 27.69 95.7
CS-1 Cantilever 2490 1220 2.04 0.4 0.005 0.0045 8.52 143.19
CS-2 Cantilever 2600 410 6.34 0.4 0.005 0.0045 8.52 48.12
CS-3 Cantilever 7030 1500 4.69 0.4 0.005 0.0045 8.52 176.06
CS-4 Cantilever 6690 1500 4.46 0.4 0.005 0.0045 8.52 176.06

The maximum effective depth is d’max = 176.6 mm

The overall depth is computed as D = d’max+cover+ main dia. /2 = 176.6+25+10/2 = 206.6 mm
Use the overall depth, D = 210 mm for analysis.
Hence; use the effective depth d’ = 210 – 25-10/2 = 180 𝑚𝑚
Table 3.7. computation of effective depth for deflection for 3rd floor slab
Panel
Type Ly Lx Ly/Lx k ρ 𝜌𝑜 l/d d (mm)
ID
S-1 End 4360 2520 1.73 1.3 0.005 0.0045 27.69 91.01
S-3 End 5390 4890 1.1 1.3 0.005 0.0045 27.69 176.6
S-4 End 3370 3300 1.02 1.3 0.005 0.0045 27.69 119.18
S-5 End 5390 3300 1.63 1.3 0.005 0.0045 27.69 119.18
S-6 End 6420 3740 1.72 1.3 0.005 0.0045 27.69 135.07
S-7 End 5390 3740 1.44 1.3 0.005 0.0045 27.69 135.07
S-8 End 6420 4110 1.56 1.3 0.005 0.0045 27.69 148.43
S-9 End 5390 4110 1.31 1.3 0.005 0.0045 27.69 148.43
S-10 End 3310 2650 1.25 1.3 0.005 0.0045 27.69 95.7
S-11 End 5390 2650 2.03 1.3 0.005 0.0045 27.69 95.7

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 96

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

CS-1 Cantilever 2490 1220 2.04 0.4 0.005 0.0045 8.52 143.19
CS-2 Cantilever 2600 410 6.34 0.4 0.005 0.0045 8.52 48.12
CS-3 Cantilever 7030 1500 4.69 0.4 0.005 0.0045 8.52 176.06
CS-4 Cantilever 7750 1500 5.17 0.4 0.005 0.0045 8.52 176.06

The maximum effective depth is d’max = 176.6 mm

The overall depth is computed as D = d’max+cover+ main dia. /2 = 176.6+25+10/2 = 206.6 mm
Use the overall depth, D = 210 mm for analysis.
Hence; use the effective depth d’ = 210 – 25-10/2 = 180 𝑚𝑚
Table 3.8. computation of effective depth for deflection for 4th floor slab
Panel
Type Ly Lx Ly/Lx k ρ 𝜌𝑜 l/d d (mm)
ID
S-1 End 4360 2520 1.73 1.3 0.005 0.0045 27.69 91.01
S-3 End 5390 4890 1.1 1.3 0.005 0.0045 27.69 176.6
S-4 End 3370 3300 1.02 1.3 0.005 0.0045 27.69 119.18
S-5 End 5390 3300 1.63 1.3 0.005 0.0045 27.69 119.18
S-6 End 6420 3740 1.72 1.3 0.005 0.0045 27.69 135.07
S-7 End 5390 3740 1.44 1.3 0.005 0.0045 27.69 135.07
S-8 End 6420 4110 1.56 1.3 0.005 0.0045 27.69 148.43
S-9 End 5390 4110 1.31 1.3 0.005 0.0045 27.69 148.43
S-10 End 2650 2250 1.18 1.3 0.005 0.0045 27.69 81.26
S-11 End 5390 2650 2.03 1.3 0.005 0.0045 27.69 95.7
CS-1 Cantilever 2520 1220 2.07 0.4 0.005 0.0045 8.52 143.19
CS-2 Cantilever 3150 400 7.88 0.4 0.005 0.0045 8.52 46.95
CS-3 Cantilever 3880 1500 2.59 0.4 0.005 0.0045 8.52 176.06
CS-4 Cantilever 4890 1500 3.26 0.4 0.005 0.0045 8.52 176.06
CS-5 Cantilever 3740 1500 2.49 0.4 0.005 0.0045 8.52 176.06

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 97

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

CS-6 Cantilever 5490 1500 3.66 0.4 0.005 0.0045 8.52 176.06
CS-7 Cantilever 6690 1500 4.46 0.4 0.005 0.0045 8.52 176.06

The maximum effective depth is d’max = 176.6 mm

The overall depth is computed as D = d’max+cover+ main dia. /2 = 176.6+25+10/2 = 206.6 mm
Use the overall depth, D = 210 mm for analysis.
Hence; use the effective depth d’ = 210 – 25-10/2 = 180 𝑚𝑚
3.5. Loading of slab
According to ES EN-2 2015, section 2.1(1) tells that the self-weight of construction works
should be classified as permanent fixed action. Thus,
Dead load = self-weight + weight of partition + weight of floor finish (selecting marble + cement
screed + plastering)
The following table containing the unit weight of different construction materials:
Table 3.9. Unit weight of construction materials
Materials Unit weight(KN/m2)
Reinforced concrete 25
Cement mortar 23
HCB 14
PVC covering 16
Ceramic 27
Parquet 9
Terrazzo 23
Cement screed 23

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 98

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

According to ES EN-1 2015, section 6.3.1.1, Table 6.1, of the same section, the recommended
value of qk is shown in the table below.
Table 3.10. Categories of live loads qk (KN/m2)
Bed Room General 2 Exhibition Category-C3 5
Bath-Room/Toilet General 2 Public Lobby Category-C3 5
Kitchen General 2 Dance Hall Category-C4 5
Living room General 2 Gymnastic Hall Category-C4 5
Dining Room Category-C1 3 Stage for concert Category-C4 5
Stair Stair 3 Concert Hall Category-C5 5
Balcony Balcony 4 Sport Hall Category-C5 5
Corridor Category-C3 5 Terrace Category-C5 5
Café Category-C1 3 Ware-House Category-D1 5
Restaurant Category-C1 3 Shop Category-D1 5
Reading Room Category-C1 3 Office Store Category-D1 5
Reception Category-C1 3 Library Category-E 6
Church Category-C2 4 <30kn
5
Theatre Category-C2 4 Garage/parking Category-F
Cinema Category-C2 4 >30kN&<160kN 5
Conference Hall Category-C2 4 Garage/parking Category-G
4 Flat roof Flat roof 0.5
Lecture hall Category-C2
4 Slopping 0.2
Assembly Hall Category-C2
Slopping Roof Roof 5
Waiting Room Category-C2 4

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 99

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

3.5.1. Live load analysis

Since an individual panel might have different purpose or function and finishing material, we
might encounter different live load and dead load in a single panel. In such cases we used the
maximum value as a governing dead load or live load for that panel.
Live load computation according to ES EN-1 2015, section 6.3.1.1, Table 6.1
Table 3.11. computation of live load for ground floor slab
Panel Function LL (KN/m2) Governed LL
GS-1 shop 5 5
Shop 5
GS-2 Toilet 2 5
Corridor 4
GS-3 Shop 5 5
GS-4 Corridor 4 4
GS-5 Shop 5 5
Shop 5
GS-6 5
Corridor 4
GS-7 Shop 5 5
Shop 5
GS-8 5
Corridor 4
GS-9 Shop 5 5
GS-10 Shop 5 5
CS-1 Toilet 2 2
CS-2 toilet 2 2

Table 3.12. computation of live load for 1st and 2nd floor slab
Panel Function LL (KN/m2) Governed LL
S-1 shop 5 5
Shop 5
S-2 Toilet 2 5
Corridor 4
S-3 Shop 5 5

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 100

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

S-4 Corridor 4 4
S-5 Shop 5 5
Shop 5
S-6 5
Corridor 4
S-7 Shop 5 5
Shop 5
S-8 5
Corridor 5
S-9 Shop 5 5
S-10 Shop 5 5
S-11 Shop 5 5
CS-1 Toilet 2 2
CS-2 toilet 2 2
CS-3 shop 5 5
CS-4 balcony 4 4

Table 3.13. computation of live load for 3rd floor slab

Panel Function LL (KN/m2) Governed LL
S-1 store 5 5
Store 5
S-2 5
Toilet 2
S-3 Kitchen 2 2
S-4 Corridor 4 4
S-5 Café and ristorante 3 3
S-6 Café and ristorante 3 3
S-7 Café and ristorante 3 3
S-8 Café and ristorante 3 3
S-9 Café and ristorante 3 3
S-10 Balcony 4 4
S-11 Café and ristorante 3 3
CS-1 Toilet 2 2

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 101

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

CS-2 toilet 2 2
CS-3 Café and ristorante 3 3
CS-4 balcony 4 4

Table 3.14. computation of live load for 4th floor slab

Panel Function LL (KN/m2) Governed LL
S-1 bedroom 2 5
bedroom 2
S-2 Toilet 2 4
Corridor 4
S-3 Bedroom 2 2
S-4 Corridor 4 4
S-5 Bedroom 2 2
Bedroom 2
S-6 4
Corridor 4
S-7 Bedroom 2 2
Bedroom 2
S-8 4
Corridor 4
S-9 Bedroom 2 2
S-10 corridor 4 4
S-11 Bedroom 2 2
CS-1 Toilet 2 2
CS-2 toilet 2 2
CS-3 toilet 2 2
CS-4 Toilet 4 4
CS-5 Toilet 2 2
CS-6 Toilet 2 2
CS-7 Balcony 4 4

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 102

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

3.5.2. Dead load analysis

Sample calculation of dead load calculation for GS-1

Self-weight of RC slab = 𝜸*D = 25 KN/m3*0.21m = 5.25 KN/m2

Floor finishing
- 20cm terrazzo till = 0.02*23 KN/m3 = 0.46 KN/m2
-
30mm cement screed = 0.03*23 KN/m3 = 0.69 KN/m2

Ceiling
-
20mm plastering & painting = 0.02*23KN/m3 = 0.46 kN/m2
-
Total dead load = 6.86KN/m2
Table 3.15. dead load computation for ground floor slab
Panel function material Thickness (KN/m3) DL(KN/m2) Total DL
Terrazzo 0.02 23 0.46
Cement screed 0.03 23 0.69
GS-1 Shop 6.86
RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46
Terrazzo 0.02 23 0.46
Cement screed 0.03 23 0.69 6.86
Shop
RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46
Ceramic 0.02 21 0.42
Cement screed 0.02 23 0.46 6.59
GS-2 Toilet
RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46
Terrazzo 0.02 23 0.46
Cement screed 0.03 23 0.69 6.86
Corridor
RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46
Terrazzo 0.02 23 0.46
6.86
GS-3 Shop Cement screed 0.03 23 0.69
RC slab 0.21 25 5.25

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 103

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Plastering 0.02 23 0.46

Terrazzo 0.02 23 0.46
Cement screed 0.03 23 0.69 6.86
GS-4 Corridor
RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46
Terrazzo 0.02 23 0.46
Cement screed 0.03 23 0.69 6.86
GS-5 shop
RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46
Terrazzo 0.02 23 0.46
Cement screed 0.03 23 0.69 6.86
Shop
RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46
GS-6
Terrazzo 0.02 23 0.46
Cement screed 0.03 23 0.69 6.86
corridor
RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46
Terrazzo 0.02 23 0.46
Cement screed 0.03 23 0.69 6.86
GS-7 shop
RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46
Terrazzo 0.02 23 0.46
Cement screed 0.03 23 0.69 6.86
shop
RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46
GS-8
Terrazzo 0.02 23 0.46
Cement screed 0.03 23 0.69 6.86
corridor
RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46
GS-9 shop Terrazzo 0.02 23 0.46 6.86

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 104

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Cement screed 0.03 23 0.69

RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46
Terrazzo 0.02 23 0.46
Cement screed 0.03 23 0.69 6.86
GS-10 shop
RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46
Ceramic 0.02 21 0.42
Cement screed 0.02 23 0.46 6.59
CS-1 toilet
RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46
Ceramic 0.02 21 0.42
Cement screed 0.02 23 0.46 6.59
CS-2 Toilet
RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46

Table 3.16. dead load computation for 1st and 2nd floor slab
Panel function material Thickness (KN/m3) DL(KN/m2) Total DL
Terrazzo 0.02 23 0.46
Cement screed 0.03 23 0.69
S-1 Shop 6.86
RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46
Terrazzo 0.02 23 0.46
Cement screed 0.03 23 0.69 6.86
Shop
RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46
S-2
Ceramic 0.02 21 0.42
Cement screed 0.02 23 0.46 6.59
Toilet
RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 105

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Terrazzo 0.02 23 0.46

Cement screed 0.03 23 0.69 6.86
Corridor
RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46
Terrazzo 0.02 23 0.46
Cement screed 0.03 23 0.69 6.86
S-3 Shop
RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46
Terrazzo 0.02 23 0.46
Cement screed 0.03 23 0.69 6.86
S-4 Corridor
RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46
Terrazzo 0.02 23 0.46
Cement screed 0.03 23 0.69 6.86
S-5 shop
RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46
Terrazzo 0.02 23 0.46
Cement screed 0.03 23 0.69 6.86
Shop
RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46
S-6
Terrazzo 0.02 23 0.46
Cement screed 0.03 23 0.69 6.86
corridor
RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46
Terrazzo 0.02 23 0.46
Cement screed 0.03 23 0.69 6.86
S-7 shop
RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46
Terrazzo 0.02 23 0.46 6.86
S-8 shop
Cement screed 0.03 23 0.69

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 106

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

RC slab 0.21 25 5.25

Plastering 0.02 23 0.46
Terrazzo 0.02 23 0.46
Cement screed 0.03 23 0.69 6.86
corridor
RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46
Terrazzo 0.02 23 0.46
6.86
Cement screed 0.03 23 0.69
S-9 shop
RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46
Terrazzo 0.02 23 0.46
Cement screed 0.03 23 0.69 6.86
S-10 shop
RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46
Terrazzo 0.02 23 0.46
6.86
Cement screed 0.03 23 0.69
S-11 Shop
RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46
Ceramic 0.02 21 0.42
Cement screed 0.02 23 0.46 6.59
CS-1 toilet
RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46
Ceramic 0.02 21 0.42
Cement screed 0.02 23 0.46 6.59
CS-2 Toilet
RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46
Terrazzo 0.02 23 0.46
Cement screed 0.03 23 0.69 6.86
Shop
CS-3 RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 107

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Terrazzo 0.02 23 0.46

Cement screed 0.03 23 0.69 6.86
CS-4 Balcony
RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46

Table 3.17. dead load computation for 3rd floor slab

Panel function material Thickness (KN/m3) DL(KN/m2) Total DL
Parquet 0.03 9 0.27
Cement screed 0.02 23 0.46
S-1 Store 6.44
RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46
Parquet 0.03 9 0.27
Cement screed 0.02 23 0.46
Store 6.44
RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46
S-2
Ceramic 0.02 21 0.42
Cement screed 0.02 23 0.46 6.59
Toilet
RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46
Parquet 0.03 9 0.27
Cement screed 0.02 23 0.46
S-3 Kitchen 6.44
RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46
Terrazzo 0.03 23 0.69
Cement screed 0.02 23 0.46 6.86
S-4 Corridor
RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46
Terrazzo 0.03 23 0.69
Café and 6.86
S-5 Cement screed 0.02 23 0.46
restaurant
RC slab 0.21 25 5.25

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 108

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Plastering 0.02 23 0.46

Terrazzo 0.03 23 0.69
Café and Cement screed 0.02 23 0.46 6.86
S-6
restaurant RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46
Terrazzo 0.03 23 0.69
Café and Cement screed 0.02 23 0.46 6.86
S-7
restaurant RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46
Terrazzo 0.03 23 0.69
Café and Cement screed 0.02 23 0.46 6.86
S-8
restaurant RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46
Terrazzo 0.03 23 0.69
Café and Cement screed 0.02 23 0.46 6.86
S-9
restaurant RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46
Terrazzo 0.02 23 0.46
Cement screed 0.03 23 0.69 6.86
S-10 Balcony
RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46
Terrazzo 0.03 23 0.69
Café and Cement screed 0.02 23 0.46 6.86
S-11
restaurant RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46
Ceramic 0.02 21 0.42
Cement screed 0.02 23 0.46 6.59
CS-1 toilet
RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46
CS-2 Toilet Ceramic 0.02 21 0.42 6.59

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 109

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Cement screed 0.02 23 0.46

RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46
Terrazzo 0.03 23 0.69
Café and Cement screed 0.02 23 0.46 6.86
CS-3 restaurant RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46
Terrazzo 0.02 23 0.46
Cement screed 0.03 23 0.69 6.86
CS-4 Balcony
RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46

Table 3.18. dead load computation for 4th floor slab

Panel function material Thickness (KN/m3) DL(KN/m2) Total DL
Parquet 0.03 9 0.27
Cement screed 0.02 23 0.46
S-1 Bedroom 6.44
RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46
Parquet 0.03 9 0.27
Cement screed 0.02 23 0.46
Bedroom 6.44
RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46
Ceramic 0.02 21 0.42
Cement screed 0.02 23 0.46 6.59
S-2 Toilet
RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46
Terrazzo 0.03 23 0.69
Cement screed 0.02 23 0.46 6.86
Corridor
RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 110

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Parquet 0.03 9 0.27

Cement screed 0.02 23 0.46
S-3 Bedroom 6.44
RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46
Terrazzo 0.03 23 0.69
Cement screed 0.02 23 0.46 6.86
S-4 Corridor
RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46
Parquet 0.03 9 0.27
Cement screed 0.02 23 0.46
S-5 Bedroom 6.44
RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46
Parquet 0.03 9 0.27
Cement screed 0.02 23 0.46
Bedroom 6.44
RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46
S-6
Terrazzo 0.02 23 0.46
Cement screed 0.03 23 0.69 6.86
Corridor
RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46
Parquet 0.03 9 0.27
Cement screed 0.02 23 0.46
S-7 Bedroom 6.44
RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46
Parquet 0.03 9 0.27
Cement screed 0.02 23 0.46
S-8 Bedroom 6.44
RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46
Terrazzo 0.02 23 0.46 6.86
Corridor
Cement screed 0.03 23 0.69

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 111

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

RC slab 0.21 25 5.25

Plastering 0.02 23 0.46
Parquet 0.03 9 0.27
Cement screed 0.02 23 0.46
S-9 Bedroom 6.44
RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46
Terrazzo 0.02 23 0.46
Cement screed 0.03 23 0.69 6.86
S-10 Corridor
RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46
Parquet 0.03 9 0.27
Cement screed 0.02 23 0.46
S-11 Bedroom 6.44
RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46
Ceramic 0.02 21 0.42
Cement screed 0.02 23 0.46 6.59
CS-1 toilet
RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46
Ceramic 0.02 21 0.42
Cement screed 0.02 23 0.46 6.59
CS-2 Toilet
RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46
Ceramic 0.02 21 0.42
Cement screed 0.02 23 0.46 6.59
Toilet
CS-3 RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46
Ceramic 0.02 21 0.42
Cement screed 0.02 23 0.46 6.59
CS-4 Toilet
RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 112

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Ceramic 0.02 21 0.42 6.59

CS-5 Toilet
Cement screed 0.02 23 0.46
RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46
Ceramic 0.02 21 0.42
Cement screed 0.02 23 0.46 6.59
CS-6 Toilet
RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46
Terrazzo 0.02 23 0.46
Cement screed 0.03 23 0.69 6.86
CS-7 Balcony
RC slab 0.21 25 5.25
Plastering 0.02 23 0.46

3.5.3. Partition wall load computation

Material data
- Thickness of HCB = 15 cm and 20cm
- Thickness of plastering on two sides = 2cm
- Unit weight of HCB = 14 KN/m3
- Unit weight of plastering = 23 KN/m3
- Height of HCB wall = 3.24m
Dead load of partition wall = Dead load of plaster + Dead load of HCB
 General calculation for 15 cm thickness HCB wall
DLpw = DLplastering + DLHCB
DLpw(KN) = Hpl ∗ Lpl ∗ tpl ∗ γpl) + (Hpw ∗ Lpw ∗ tpw ∗ γHCB
DLpw(KN) = 3.24*Lpl*0.02*23 +3.24*Lpw*0.15*14, where Lpw=Lpl
DLpw(KN) = 8.29*Lpw……………………………………………..Equation-1
 General calculation for 20 cm thickness HCB wall
DLpw = DLplastering + DLHCB
DLpw(KN) = Hpl ∗ Lpl ∗ tpl ∗ γpl) + (Hpw ∗ Lpw ∗ tpw ∗ γHCB
DLpw(KN) = 3.24*Lpl*0.02*23 +3.24*Lpw*0.2*14, where Lpw=Lpl
DLpw(KN) = 10.56*Lpw……………………………………………..Equation-2

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 113

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

 Sample calculation of partition wall load for 3rd floor S-2

The overall length of partion wall Lpw on panel S-2 is 5.01 m.
Therefore, DLpw(KN) = 8.29*Lpw = 8.29*5.01 = 41.54 KN
Since, distribute over the panel area = 41.54 KN/ (4.89*6.87) = 1.24 KN/m2
Therefore, the factored design partition wall load for S-2 per unit area is
1.35*1.24 = 1.67KN/m2
Computation of partition wall load as tabular form for each floor slab
Table 3.19. partition wall load computation for ground floor slab
Panel Thickness Unit Thickness Unit L(m) H(m) Load Area Load
of HCB weight of weigh of
of HCB plastering plastering (KN) (m2) KN/m2
CS-1 0.15 14 0.02 23 4.11 3.2 34.11 3.04 11.228
CS-2 0.2 14 0.02 23 2 3.2 20.89 1.06 19.57

Table 3.20. partition wall load computation for 1st and 2nd floor slab
Panel Thickness Unit Thickness Unit L(m) H(m) Load Area Load
of HCB weight of weigh of 2
of HCB plastering plastering (KN) (m ) KN/m2
CS-1 0.15 14 0.02 23 4.11 3.2 34.11 3.04 11.228
CS-2 0.2 14 0.02 23 2 3.2 20.89 1.06 19.57
CS-3 0.2 14 0.02 23 7.23 3.2 75.42 10.84 6.95

Table 3.21. partition wall load computation for 3rd floor slab
Panel Thickness Unit Thickness Unit L(m) H(m) Load Area Load
of HCB weight of weigh of 2
of HCB plastering plastering (KN) (m ) KN/m2
S-2 0.15 14 0.02 23 5.01 3.2 41.54 33.59 1.24
CS-1 0.15 14 0.02 23 4.11 3.2 34.11 3.04 11.228
CS-2 0.2 14 0.02 23 2 3.2 20.89 1.06 19.57
CS-3 0.2 14 0.02 23 7.23 3.2 75.42 10.84 6.95

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 114

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Table 3.22. partition wall load computation for 4th floor slab
Unit Thickness Unit Load
Thickness Area Load
Panel weight of weigh of L(m) H(m)
of HCB
of HCB plastering plastering (m2) KN/m2
(KN)
S-1 0.15 14 0.02 23 1.52 3.2 12.45 10.98 1.13
S-2 0.15 14 0.02 23 5.01 3.2 41.04 33.59 1.22
S-3 0.15 14 0.02 23 5.24 3.2 42.93 26.36 1.63
S-5 0.15 14 0.02 23 5.24 3.2 42.93 17.8 2.41
S-6 0.15 14 0.02 23 2.94 3.2 24.08 24.1 1.00
S-7 0.15 14 0.02 23 5.24 3.2 42.93 18.7 2.30
S-8 0.15 14 0.02 23 3.11 3.2 25.48 26.4 0.97
S-9 0.15 14 0.02 23 10.48 3.2 85.85 22.15 3.88
CS-1 0.15 14 0.02 23 4.11 3.2 33.67 3.04 11.08
CS-2 0.2 14 0.02 23 2 3.2 20.86 1.06 19.68
CS-3 0.2 14 0.02 23 4.86 3.2 50.70 4.12 12.31
CS-4 0.2 14 0.02 23 6.35 3.2 66.24 7.32 9.05
CS-5 0.2 14 0.02 23 2.7 3.2 28.17 5.61 5.02
CS-6 0.2 14 0.02 23 7.1 3.2 74.07 8.24 8.99

3.5.4. Design load for each panel

An individual panel might have different purpose (function) and finishing material, we might
encounter different live load and dead load in a single panel. In such case, we used the maximum
value as a governing dead load or live load for that panel.
Table 3.23. design load for each panel for ground floor slab
Slab Partition Total Total Design
Panel
load load DL LL load
GS-1 6.86 6.86 5 16.76
GS-2 6.86 6.86 5 16.76
GS-3 6.86 6.86 5 16.76
GS-4 6.86 6.86 4 15.26
GS-5 6.86 6.86 5 16.76
GS-6 6.86 6.86 5 16.76
GS-7 6.86 6.86 5 16.76
GS-8 6.86 6.86 5 16.76
GS-9 6.86 6.86 5 16.76
GS-10 6.86 6.86 5 16.76

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 115

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

CS-1 6.59 11.23 17.82 2 27.06

CS-2 6.59 19.57 26.16 2 38.32

Table 3.24. design load for each panel for 1st and 2nd floor slab
Slab Partition Total Total Design
Panel
load load DL LL load
S-1 6.86 6.86 5 16.76
S-2 6.86 6.86 5 16.76
S-3 6.86 6.86 5 16.76
S-4 6.86 6.86 4 15.26
S-5 6.86 6.86 5 16.76
S-6 6.86 6.86 5 16.76
S-7 6.86 6.86 5 16.76
S-8 6.86 6.86 5 16.76
S-9 6.86 6.86 5 16.76
S-10 6.86 6.86 5 16.76
S-11 6.86 6.86 5 16.76
CS-1 6.59 11.23 17.82 2 27.06
CS-2 6.59 19.57 26.16 2 38.32
CS-3 6.86 6.95 13.81 5 26.14
CS-4 6.86 6.86 4 15.26

Table 3.25. design load for each panel for 3rd floor slab
Slab Partition Total Total Design
Panel
load load DL LL load
S-1 6.44 6.44 5 16.19
S-2 6.59 1.24 7.83 5 18.07
S-3 6.44 6.44 2 11.69
S-4 6.86 6.86 4 15.26
S-5 6.86 6.86 3 13.76
S-6 6.86 6.86 3 13.76
S-7 6.86 6.86 3 13.76
S-8 6.86 6.86 3 13.76
S-9 6.86 6.86 3 13.76
S-10 6.86 6.86 4 15.26
S-11 6.86 6.86 3 13.76
CS-1 6.59 11.23 17.82 2 27.06

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 116

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

CS-2 6.59 19.57 26.16 2 38.32

CS-3 6.86 6.95 13.81 3 23.14
CS-4 6.86 6.86 4 15.26

Table 3.26. design load for each panel for 4th floor slab
Slab Partition Total Total Design
Panel
load load DL LL load
S-1 6.44 1.13 7.57 5 17.72
S-2 6.86 1.22 8.08 4 16.91
S-3 6.44 1.63 8.07 2 13.89
S-4 6.86 6.86 4 15.26
S-5 6.44 2.41 8.85 2 14.95
S-6 6.86 1 7.86 4 16.61
S-7 6.44 2.3 8.74 2 14.80
S-8 6.86 0.97 7.83 4 16.57
S-9 6.44 3.88 10.32 2 16.93
S-10 6.86 6.86 4 15.26
S-11 6.44 6.44 2 11.69
CS-1 6.59 11.23 17.82 2 27.06
CS-2 6.59 19.57 26.16 2 38.32
CS-3 6.59 12.31 18.9 2 28.52
CS-4 6.59 9.05 15.64 4 27.11
CS-5 6.59 5.02 11.61 2 18.67
CS-6 6.59 8.99 15.58 2 24.03
CS-7 6.86 6.86 4 15.26

3.6. Moment analysis

Method of analysis
Case-I: Use coefficient method for panels surrounded by beams in all four directions and which
have uniform load across the panel. The uniformity of the load applied on a panel is checking as:
Partion wall load∗100%
< 20% Use coefficient method.
Pd′

Case II: If the panel is one way cantilever we use cantilever beam modeling method by
considering 1m strip of the slab along the longer direction.

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 117

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building
partition load∗100%
Case III: Strip method is used for panels where ≥ 20% or if we have opening
Pd′

within the panel or if the panel is two way cantilever and for.
Table 3.27. Identification of method of analysis for 4th floor slabs
1.35𝐷𝐿𝑝𝑤
Panel Support Pd(KN/m2 1.35DLpw(KN/m2) ∗ 100 Method used
𝑃𝑑

S-1 End 17.72 1.53 8.61 Coefficient method

S-2 End 16.91 1.65 9.74 Coefficient method

S-3 End 13.89 2.20 15.84 Coefficient method

S-4 End 15.26 0.00 0.00 Coefficient method

S-5 End 14.95 3.25 17.68 Coefficient method

S-6 End 16.61 1.35 8.13 Coefficient method

S-7 End 14.8 3.11 16.46 Coefficient method

S-8 End 16.57 1.31 7.90 Coefficient method

S-9 End 16.93 5.24 19.70 Coefficient method

S-10 End 15.26 0.00 0.00 Coefficient method

S-11 End 11.69 0.00 0.00 Coefficient method

Slabs with side ratio less than 2 are treated as two way slabs and analysis can be made by means
of coefficients on the basis of the following assumptions and procedures.
 The slab is composed of rectangular panels, supported at all four edges by walls or
beams, stiff enough to be treated as an unyielding.
 Slabs are subjected to uniform load or concentrated load which can be converted to
equivalent uniform load not exceeding 20% of the total load.

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 118

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

The support and span moments are calculated as

Mi= αipdlx2
Mxs = αxs*pd* Lx²
Mxf = αxf*pd*Lx²
Mys=αys*pd*Lx²
Myf=αyf*pd*Lx²
Where
Mi=Design moment per unite width of reference
Pd=Uniformly Distributed Design Load
αi=Coefficient given in table A-1
(Ly/Lx)= Support condition.
Mxs =Support moment in the shorter direction of a panel.
3.6.1. Moment analysis for each floor for two way slab using coefficient method
Sample calculation for ground floor slabs GS-1
𝑙𝑦
= 1.73 αxs = 0.091 αxf = 0.068 Lx2 = 6.35m αys = - αyf = 0.044
𝑙𝑥

Pd = 16.76KN/m2
Mxs = αxs * Pd * Lx2 = 0.091*16.76*6.35 = 9.68KNm
Mys = αys * Pd * Lx2 = -
Mxf = αxf * Pd * Lx2 = 0.068*16.76*6.35 = 7.17KNm
Myf = αyf * Pd * Lx2 = 0.044*16.76*6.35 = 4.68KNm

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 119

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Table 3.28. Computation of span and filed moments for ground floor slab

support
bending moment coefficients Banding moments
PANEL condition
ly/lx Pd lx aCs ays aXF aYF Mxs Mys Mxf Myf

S-1 1.73 16.76 2.52 0.086 0.047 0.064 0.036 9.68 5.29 7.20 4.05

16.76
S-3 1.1 3.74 0.049 0.039 0.036 0.029 9.52 7.58 6.99 5.63
16.76
S-4 1 3.3 0.039 0.039 0.029 0.029 6.48 6.48 4.82 4.82

16.76
S-5 1.6 3.3 0.062 0.039 0.044 0.029 10.09 6.35 7.16 4.72

16.76
S-6 1.7 3.`74 0.063 0.039 0.046 0.029 14.64 9.06 10.69 6.74

16.76
S-7 1.4 3.74 0.05 0.032 0.037 0.024 10.35 6.62 7.66 4.97

16.76
S-8 1.6 4.11 0.082 0.047 0.061 0.036 22.95 13.16 17.07 10.08
16.76
S-9 1.3 4.15 0.052 0.039 0.039 0.029 15.16 11.37 11.37 8.46

16.76
S-10 1.2 2.65 0.056 0.039 0.042 0.03 6.00 4.18 4.50 3.21

Table 3. 29. Computation of span and filed moments for 1st and 2nd floor slab
support
bending moment coefficients Bending moments
PANEL type
ly/lx Pd lx s ys XF YF Mxs Mys Mxf Myf

S-1 1.73 16.76 2.52 0.091 0 0.068 0.044 9.69 0 7.24 4.68

S-3 1.1 16.76 3.74 0.056 0.047 0.042 0.036 13.13 11.02 9.85 8.44

S-4 1 15.26 3.3 0.039 0.039 0.029 0.029 6.48 6.48 4.82 4.82

S-5 1.6 16.76 3.3 0.055 0.032 0.046 0.024 10.04 5.84 8.40 4.38

S-6 1.7 16.76 3.74 0.063 0.039 0.046 0.029 14.77 9.14 10.78 6.80

S-7 1.4 16.76 3.74 0.05 0.032 0.037 0.024 11.72 7.50 8.67 5.63

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 120

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

S-8 1.6 16.76 4.11 0.082 0.047 0.061 0.036 23.22 13.31 17.27 10.19

S-9 1.3 16.76 4.15 0.052 0.039 0.039 0.029 15.01 11.26 11.26 8.37

S-10 1.2 16.76 2.25 0.056 0.039 0.042 0.03 4.75 3.31 3.56 2.55

S-11 2 16.76 2.65 0.067 0.039 0.05 0.029 7.89 4.59 5.88 3.41

Table 3.30. Computation of span and filed moments for 3rd floor slab
support
bending moment coefficients Bending moments
PANEL condition
ly/lx Pd lx s ys XF YF Mxs Mys Mxf Myf

S-1 1.73 16.19 2.52 0.091 0 0.068 0.044 9.36 0 6.99 4.52

S-3 1.1 11.69 3.74 0.056 0.047 0.042 0.036 9.16 7.69 6.87 5.89

S-4 1 15.26 3.3 0.039 0.039 0.029 0.029 6.48 6.48 4.82 4.82

S-5 1.6 13.76 3.3 0.055 0.032 0.046 0.024 8.24 4.80 6.89 3.60

S-6 1.7 13.76 3.74 0.063 0.039 0.046 0.029 12.13 7.51 8.85 5.58

S-7 1.4 13.76 3.74 0.05 0.032 0.037 0.024 9.62 6.16 7.12 4.62

S-8 1.6 13.76 4.11 0.082 0.047 0.061 0.036 19.06 10.92 14.18 8.37

S-9 1.3 13.76 4.15 0.052 0.039 0.039 0.029 12.32 9.24 9.24 6.87

S-10 1.2 15.26 2.65 0.056 0.039 0.042 0.03 6.00 4.18 4.50 3.21

S-11 2 13.76 2.65 0.067 0.039 0.05 0.029 6.47 3.77 4.83 2.80

Table 3.31. Computation of span and filed moments for 4th floor slab
support
bending moment coefficients Bending moments
PANEL condition
ly/lx Pd lx s ys XF YF Mxs Mys Mxf Myf

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 121

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

S-1 1.73 17.72 2.52 0.086 0.047 0.064 0.036 9.68 5.29 7.20 4.05

S-3 1.1 13.89 3.74 0.049 0.039 0.036 0.029 9.52 7.58 6.99 5.63

S-4 1 15.26 3.3 0.039 0.039 0.029 0.029 6.48 6.48 4.82 4.82

S-5 1.6 14.95 3.3 0.062 0.039 0.044 0.029 10.09 6.35 7.16 4.72

S-6 1.7 16.61 3.74 0.063 0.039 0.046 0.029 14.64 9.06 10.69 6.74

S-7 1.4 14.8 3.74 0.05 0.032 0.037 0.024 10.35 6.62 7.66 4.97

S-8 1.6 16.57 4.11 0.082 0.047 0.061 0.036 22.95 13.16 17.07 10.08

S-9 1.3 16.93 4.15 0.052 0.039 0.039 0.029 15.16 11.37 11.37 8.46

S-10 1.2 15.26 2.65 0.056 0.039 0.042 0.03 6.00 4.18 4.50 3.21

S-11 2 11.69 2.65 0.063 0.032 0.048 0.024 5.17 2.63 3.94 1.97

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 122

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

3.6.2. Moment calculation for one way cantilever slabs

Taking 1m strip of the slab along the shorter direction

(Lx )2
Mxs = Pd(self−weight) + DLpw ∗ Lx
2

 Sample calculation for one way cantilever for ground floor slabs CS-1
Pd =16.76KN/m2
P= 11.23KN
Lx = 1.22m
𝑷𝒅 ∗𝑳𝒙𝟐 𝟏𝟔.𝟕𝟔∗𝟏.𝟐𝟐𝟐
𝑴= + 𝑷 ∗ 𝑳𝒙 = + 𝟏𝟏. 𝟐𝟑 ∗ 𝟏. 𝟐𝟐 = 𝟐𝟔. 𝟏𝟕𝑲𝑵𝒎
𝟐 𝟐

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 123

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Table 3.32. Moment acting on the Cantilever for the ground floor slab
panel Pd P Lx M
CS-1 16.76 11.23 1.22 26.17
CS-2 16.76 11.23 0.41 9.43

Table 3.33. Moment acting on the Cantilever for the 1st and 2nd floor slab
panel Pd P Lx M
CS-1 16.76 11.23 1.22 26.17
CS-2 16.76 19.57 0.41 9.43
CS-3 16.76 6.95 1.5 29.28
CS-4 16.76 0 1.5 18.86

Table 3.34. Moment acting on the Cantilever for the 3rd floor slab
panel Pd P Lx M
CS-1 13.76 11.23 1.22 23.94
CS-2 13.76 19.57 0.41 9.18
CS-3 13.76 6.95 1.5 25.91
CS-4 13.76 0 1.5 15.48

Table 3.35. Moment acting on the Cantilever for the 4th floor slab
panel Pd P Lx M
CS-1 11.89 11.23 1.22 22.55
CS-2 11.89 19.57 0.41 9.02
CS-3 11.89 12.31 1.06 19.73
CS-4 11.89 9.05 1.5 26.95
CS-5 11.89 5.02 1.5 20.91
CS-6 11.89 8.99 1.5 26.86
CS-7 11.89 0 1.5 13.38

3.6.3. Moment calculation for S-2 using strip method

Problems with unsupported edges could not be handled by conventional procedures so easily.
The real power of the strip method becomes evident when dealing with non-standard problems,
such as slabs with unsupported edge, slabs with holes, or slabs with reentrant edges (L – shaped
slabs). For a slab with one edge unsupported, a reasonable basis for analysis by the simple strip
method is that a strip along the unsupported edge takes a greater load per unit area than the actual

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 124

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

load acting, i.e., the strip along the unsupported edge acts as a support for the strips at right
angles. Such
strips have been referred to by Wood and Armer as “strong bands”. A strong band is, in effect,
an integral beam, usually having the same total depth as the remainder of the slab but containing
a concentration of reinforcement. The strip may be made deeper than the rest of the slab to
increase its carrying capacity, but this will not usually be necessary.

Figure 3.6. Equivalent area conversion for S-2

Figure 3.7. strip method boundary condition for slab with free edge in the long direction.
Overall depth of the slab D = 210mm
Design load Pd = 16.76KN/m2
Assumptions:
Width of strong band along the free edge = 0.65 m
In the main slab portion k1 = 0.45

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 125

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

This implies Slab load in y direction = 0.45 * 16.76 = 7.54 kN/m2 and
In x direction = 0.55 * 16.76 = 9.22 kN/m2
Y direction slab strip
As an initial assumption,
Negative moment at the supported edge = ½ * the free cantilever moment Consider the strip
length as to span up to the center of the strong band;
i.e. 4.24 + 0.65/2 = 4.565m
Hence mys = ½ * (7.54*4.5652)/2 = 39.28kNm

0.65 2 39.28
0.45(1− ) −2∗ ∗4.892
4.89 16.76
K2 = 0.65 = 0.53
065/4.89(2− )
4.89

Uplift in the strong band for Y direction strips = 0.53 * 16.76 = 8.95 kN/m2
Revised negative moment at the left support
mys = 7.54*4.242/2 – 8.95*0.65*4.565 = 41.22kNm
The maximum positive moment in the Y direction strip will be located at the point of zero shear.
ie. 8.95 * 0.65 – 7.54(y1 – 0.65) = 0
y1 = 1.42m

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 126

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Strip along A-A

Strip along B-B

Strip along C-C

Maximum Positive moment at (y1 = 1.42 m)

= 8.95 * 0.65 * (1.42 – 0.65/2) – 7.54 * (1.42 – 0.65)2/2 = 4.13 kNm

X direction moments:
Strip along A-A:
Load = (1+k2)w = (1+0.53) * 16.76 = 25.64 kN/m2
Load per meter run along the strip = 25.64 * 0.65 = 16.66kN/m
Simply supported span moment = 16.66 * 6.862/8 = 98.05 kNm
As Hillerborg the ratio of support and span moment is between 1.5 to 2.5
Cantilever moment: Mx = Mxs + Mxf
Mxs / Mxf = 1.5 to 2.5 ….take as 2
Mxs / Mxf = 2  Mxs = 2* Mxf
Mx = Mxf + 2Mxf = 3Mxf
Mxf = 1/3Mx And Mxs = 2/3 Mx

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 127

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Negative moment at the supports = (2/3) * 98.05 = 65.36 kNm

Positive moment at the span = (1/3) * 98.05 = 32.68kNm
strip along B-B:
Load per meter run along the strip = 9.22 kN/m
Simply supported span moment = 9.22 * 6.862/8 = 54.23 kNm

Figure 3.8. unadjusted moment for ground floor slab

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 128

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Figure 3.9. unadjusted moment for 1st and 2nd floor slab

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 129

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Figure 3.10. unadjusted moment for 3rd floor slab

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 130

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Figure 3.11. unadjusted moment for 4th floor slab

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 131

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

3.7. Moment adjustment

For each support over which the slab is continuous there will thus generally be two different
support moments. The difference may be distributed between the panels on either side of the
support to equalize their moments, as in the moment distribution method for frames. Two
methods of differing accuracy are given here for treating the effects of this redistribution on
moments away from the support.
3.7.1. Support moment adjustment
 Method-1 it may be used when difference between initial support moment are less than
20 percent of the larger moment. When such a case has occurred dimensioning is
normally carried out either based on the average initial moment at the support.
 Method-2 it may be used when difference between initial support moment are greater
than 20 percent of the larger moment. When such a case has occurred dimensioning is
carried out using the stiffness of the slab and the effective length. Here we use moment
distribution method to adjust support moment.

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 132

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Sample moment Adjustment for GFS-3 & GFS-5

Mxs (GFS-3) = 9.52KNm
Mxs (GFS-5) = 10.09KNm
𝑀𝐿−𝑀𝑅 10.09−9.52
M = 𝑀𝐿 ∗ 100% = ∗ 100 = 5.65 < 20%
10.09
we use Average method
Madjusted = (ML+MS)/2 = (10.09 + 9.52) = 9.81KNm
Table 3.36. Moment adjustment for ground floor slab
Unadjusted support
Moment Method of Adjusted
panel moment ΔM/Mlarge*100
notation adjustment moment
Ms Ms
Average
GFS-3&GFS-5 Mxs 10.09 9.52 5.65 9.81
method
Average
GFS-4&GFS-5 Mys 6.48 6.35 2.01 6.42
method
Average
GFS-5&GFS-7 Mxs 10.35 10.09 2.51 10.22
method
Moment
GFS-4&GFS-6 Mxs 14.64 6.48 55.74 13.39
distribution
Moment
GFS-6&GFS-7 Mys 9.06 6.62 26.93 8.98
distribution
Moment
GFS-6&GFS-8 Mxs 22.95 14.64 36.21 21.32
distribution
Moment
GFS-7&GFS-9 Mxs 15.16 10.35 31.73 14.56
distribution
Average
GFS-8&GFS-9 Mys 13.16 10.74 18.39 11.95
method
Moment
GFS-9&GFS-10 Mxs 15.16 6 60.42 13.99
distribution

Table 3.37. Moment adjustment for 1st and 2nd floor slab
Unadjusted support
Moment Method of Adjusted
Panel moment ΔM/Mlarge*100
notation adjustment moment
Ms Ms
Moment
S-3 & S-5 Mxs 13.13 10.04 23.53 12.91
distribution
Average
S-4 & S-5 Mys 6.48 5.84 9.88 6.16
method
Average
S-5 & S-7 Mxs 11.72 10.04 14.33 10.88
method
Moment
S-4 & S-6 Mxs 14.77 6.48 56.13 13.51
distribution
Average
S-6 & S-7 Mys 9.14 7.5 17.94 8.32
method

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 133

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Moment
S-6 & S-8 Mxs 23.22 14.77 36.39 22.53
distribution
Moment
S-7 & S-9 Mxs 15.01 11.72 21.92 14.6
distribution
Average
S-8 & S-9 Mys 13.31 11.26 15.40 12.28
method
Moment
S-9 & S-11 Mxs 15.01 7.89 47.44 14.11
distribution
Moment
S-8 & S-10 Mxs 23.22 3.31 85.75 20.22
distribution
Average
S-10 & S-11 Mys 4.75 4.59 3.37 4.67
method

Table3. 38. moment adjustment for 3rd floor slab

Unadjusted support
Moment Method of Adjusted
Panel moment ΔM/Mlarge*100
notation adjustment moment
Ms Ms
Average
S-3 & S-5 Mxs 9.16 8.24 10.04 8.74
method
Moment
S-4 & S-5 Mys 6.48 4.8 25.93 6.34
distribution
Average
S-5 & S-7 Mxs 9.62 8.24 14.35 8.93
method
Moment
S-4 & S-6 Mxs 12.13 6.48 46.58 11.27
distribution
Average
S-6 & S-7 Mys 7.51 6.16 17.98 7.84
method
Moment
S-6 & S-8 Mxs 19.06 12.13 36.36 18.49
distribution
Moment
S-7 & S-9 Mxs 12.32 9.62 21.92 11.98
distribution
Average
S-8 & S-9 Mys 10.92 9.24 15.38 10.08
method
Moment
S-9 & S-11 Mxs 12.32 6.47 47.48 11.57
distribution
Moment
S-8 & S-10 Mxs 19.06 4.18 78.07 16.82
distribution
Moment
S-10 & S-11 Mys 6 3.77 37.17 5.82
distribution

Table 3.39. moment adjustment for 4th floor slab

Unadjusted support
Moment Method of Adjusted
Panel moment ΔM/Mlarge*100
notation adjustment moment
Ms Ms
Average
S-3 & S-5 Mxs 10.09 9.52 5.65 9.81
method

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 134

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Average
S-4 & S-5 Mys 6.48 6.35 2.01 6.42
method
Average
S-5 & S-7 Mxs 10.35 10.09 2.51 10.22
method
Moment
S-4 & S-6 Mxs 14.64 6.48 55.74 13.39
distribution
Average
S-6 & S-7 Mys 9.09 6.62 27.17 7.86
method
Moment
S-6 & S-8 Mxs 22.95 14.64 36.21 22.27
distribution
Moment
S-7 & S-9 Mxs 15.16 10.35 31.73 22.35
distribution
Average
S-8 & S-9 Mys 13.16 11.37 13.60 12.27
method
Moment
S-9 & S-11 Mxs 15.16 5.17 65.90 15.04
distribution
Moment
S-8 & S-10 Mxs 22.95 4.18 81.79 22.79
distribution
Moment
S-10 & S-11 Mys 6 2.63 56.17 5.73
distribution

3.7.2. Span moment adjustment

If the moment in the adjusted support decreases, the span moment is increased to compensate for
the changes in the support moments. The design moments for the spans are calculated as:
Increase in span moment = change of the support moment * factor given in table A-2
M𝑥𝑓 = M𝑥𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cx
M𝑦𝑓 = M𝑦𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cy
Where ∆M = the change in moment in all supports.
Cx and Cy are coefficients for adjusting span moments
For ground floor slab
FOR GFS-4
∆M= ML-MD = 14.77 – 6.48 = 8.29
Cx = 0.380
Cy = 0.280
M𝑥𝑓 = M𝑥𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cx = 4.82 + 8.29 * 0.380 = 7.97
M𝑦𝑓 = M𝑦𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cy = 4.82+ 8.29 *0.280 = 7.14
FOR GFS-5
∆M= ML-MD = 6.48 – 5.84 = 0.64

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 135

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Cx = 0.295
Cy = 0.083
M𝑥𝑓 = M𝑥𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cx = 8.40 + 0.64 * 0.295 = 8.56
M𝑦𝑓 = M𝑦𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cy = 4.38+ 0.64 *0.083 = 4.56
FOR GFS-6
∆M= ML-MD = 23.22 – 14.77 = 8.45
Cx = 0.461
Cy = 0.272
M𝑥𝑓 = M𝑥𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cx = 10.78 + 8.45 * 0.461 = 14.67
M𝑦𝑓 = M𝑦𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cy = 6.80 + 8.45 *0.272 = 9.1
FOR GFS-7
∆M= ML-MD = 15.16 – 10.3 = 4.86
Cx = 0.398
Cy = 0.331
M𝑥𝑓 = M𝑥𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cx = 7.66 + 4.86 * 0.398 = 9.59
M𝑦𝑓 = M𝑦𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cy = 4.97 + 4.86 *0.331 = 6.58
FOR RFS-9
∆M= ML-MD = 13.16 – 11.37 = 1.79
Cx = 0.325
Cy = 0.135
M𝑥𝑓 = M𝑥𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cx = 11.37 + 1.79 * 0.325 = 11.95
M𝑦𝑓 = M𝑦𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cy = 8.46 + 1.79 *0.135 = 8.71
FOR RFS-10
∆M= ML-MD = 15.16 – 6.06 = 9.10
Cx = 0.325
Cy = 0.135
M𝑥𝑓 = M𝑥𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cx = 4.50 + 9.1 * 0.325 = 7.46
M𝑦𝑓 = M𝑦𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cy = 3.21 + 9.1 *0.135 = 4.44

For 1st and 2nd floor slab

FOR S-4

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 136

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

∆M= ML-MD = 14.77 – 6.48 = 8.29

Cx = 0.380
Cy = 0.280
M𝑥𝑓 = M𝑥𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cx = 4.82 + 8.29 * 0.380 = 7.97
M𝑦𝑓 = M𝑦𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cy = 4.82+ 8.29 *0.280 = 7.14
FOR S-5
∆M= ML-MD = 6.48 – 5.84 = 0.64
Cx = 0.295
Cy = 0.083
M𝑥𝑓 = M𝑥𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cx = 8.40 + 0.64 * 0.295 = 8.56
M𝑦𝑓 = M𝑦𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cy = 4.38+ 0.64 *0.083 = 4.56
FOR S-6
∆M= ML-MD = 23.22 – 14.77 = 8.45
Cx = 0.461
Cy = 0.272
M𝑥𝑓 = M𝑥𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cx = 10.78 + 8.45 * 0.461 = 14.67
M𝑦𝑓 = M𝑦𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cy = 6.80 + 8.45 *0.272 = 9.1
FOR S-7
∆M= ML-MD = 9.14 – 7.5 = 1.64
Cx = 0.398
Cy = 0.331
M𝑥𝑓 = M𝑥𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cx = 9.85 + 1.64 * 0.398 = 10.51
M𝑦𝑓 = M𝑦𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cy = 8.44 + 1.64 *0.331 = 8.98
FOR S-9
∆M= ML-MD = 13.31 – 11.26 = 2.05
Cx = 0.325
Cy = 0.135
M𝑥𝑓 = M𝑥𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cx = 11.26 + 2.05 * 0.325 = 11.93
M𝑦𝑓 = M𝑦𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cy = 8.37+ 2.05 *0.135 = 9.01
FOR S-10

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 137

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

∆M= ML-MD = 23.22 – 4.35 = 18.87

Cx = 0.338
Cy = 0.172
M𝑥𝑓 = M𝑥𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cx = 3.56 + 18.87 * 0.338 = 9.94
M𝑦𝑓 = M𝑦𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cy = 2.55 + 18.87 * 0.172 = 5.79
FOR S-11
∆M= ML-MD = 18.86 – 7.89 = 10.97
Cx = 0.484
Cy = 0.248
M𝑥𝑓 = M𝑥𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cx = 5.88 + 10.97 * 0.484 = 11.19
M𝑦𝑓 = M𝑦𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cy = 3.44 + 10.97 *0.248 = 6.16

For 3rd floor slab

FOR S-4
∆M= ML-MD = 12.13 – 6.48 = 5.65
Cx = 0.380
Cy = 0.280
M𝑥𝑓 = M𝑥𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cx = 4.82 + 5.65 * 0.380 = 6.97
M𝑦𝑓 = M𝑦𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cy = 4.82 + 5.65 *0.280 = 6.40
FOR S-5
∆M= ML-MD = 9.62 – 8.24 = 1.38
Cx = 0.295
Cy = 0.083
M𝑥𝑓 = M𝑥𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cx = 6.89 + 1.38 * 0.295 = 7.29
M𝑦𝑓 = M𝑦𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cy = 3.60 + 1.38 *0.083 = 3.72
FOR S-6
∆M= ML-MD = 19.02 – 12.13 = 6.89
Cx = 0.461
Cy = 0.272
M𝑥𝑓 = M𝑥𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cx = 8.85 + 6.89 * 0.461 = 12.03
M𝑦𝑓 = M𝑦𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cy = 5.58 + 6.89 *0.272 = 7.45

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 138

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

FOR S-7
∆M= ML-MD = 12.32 – 9.62 = 2.7
Cx = 0.398
Cy = 0.331
M𝑥𝑓 = M𝑥𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cx = 7.12 + 2.7 * 0.398 = 8.19
M𝑦𝑓 = M𝑦𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cy = 4.62 + 2.7 *0.331 = 5.52
FOR S-9
∆M= ML-MD = 10.92 – 9.24 = 1.68
Cx = 0.325
Cy = 0.135
M𝑥𝑓 = M𝑥𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cx = 9.24 + 1.68 * 0.325 = 9.79
M𝑦𝑓 = M𝑦𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cy = 6.87 + 1.68 *0.135 = 7.10
FOR S-10
∆M= ML-MD = 19.06 – 4.18 = 14.88
Cx = 0.338
Cy = 0.172
M𝑥𝑓 = M𝑥𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cx = 4.83 + 14.88 * 0.338 = 9.86
M𝑦𝑓 = M𝑦𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cy = 2.8 + 14.88 * 0.172 = 5.36
FOR S-11
∆M= ML-MD = 15.48 – 6.47 = 9.01
Cx = 0.484
Cy = 0.248
M𝑥𝑓 = M𝑥𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cx = 4.83 + 9.01 * 0.484 = 9.19
M𝑦𝑓 = M𝑦𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cy = 2.8 + 9.01 *0.248 = 5.04

For 4th floor slab

FOR S-1
∆M= ML-MD = 22.15 – 5.29 = 16.86
Cx = 0.285
Cy = 0.074
M𝑥𝑓 = M𝑥𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cx = 7.2 + 16.86 * 0.285 = 12.01

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 139

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

M𝑦𝑓 = M𝑦𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cy = 4.05 + 16.86 *0.074 = 5.30

FOR S-3
∆M= ML-MD = 26.95 – 7.58 = 19.37
Cx = 0.356
Cy = 0.220
M𝑥𝑓 = M𝑥𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cx = 6.99 + 19.37 * 0.356 = 13.89
M𝑦𝑓 = M𝑦𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cy = 5.65 + 19.37 *0.220 = 9.91
FOR S-4
∆M= ML-MD = 14.64 – 6.48 = 8.16
Cx = 0.380
Cy = 0.280
M𝑥𝑓 = M𝑥𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cx = 4.82 + 8.16 * 0.380 = 7.92
M𝑦𝑓 = M𝑦𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cy = 4.82 + 8.16 *0.280 = 7.11
FOR S-6
∆M= ML-MD = 22.95 – 14.64 = 8.31
Cx = 0.461
Cy = 0.272
M𝑥𝑓 = M𝑥𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cx = 10.69 + 8.31 * 0.461 = 14.52
M𝑦𝑓 = M𝑦𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cy = 6.74 + 8.31 *0.272 = 9.00
FOR S-7
∆M= ML-MD = 20.91 – 6.62 = 14.29
Cx = 0.398
Cy = 0.331
M𝑥𝑓 = M𝑥𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cx = 7.66 + 14.29 * 0.398 = 13.35
M𝑦𝑓 = M𝑦𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cy = 4.97 + 14.29 *0.331 = 9.70
FOR S-9
∆M= ML-MD = 13.16 – 11.37 = 1.79
Cx = 0.325
Cy = 0.135
M𝑥𝑓 = M𝑥𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cx = 11.37 + 1.79 * 0.325 = 11.95

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 140

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

M𝑦𝑓 = M𝑦𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cy = 8.46 + 1.79 *0.135 = 8.70

FOR S-10
∆M= ML-MD = 22.95 – 4.18 = 18.77
Cx = 0.338
Cy = 0.172
M𝑥𝑓 = M𝑥𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cx = 3.94 + 18.77 * 0.338 = 10.28
M𝑦𝑓 = M𝑦𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cy = 1.97 + 18.77 * 0.172 = 5.20
FOR S-11
∆M= ML-MD = 26.86 – 2.65 = 24.21
Cx = 0.484
Cy = 0.248
M𝑥𝑓 = M𝑥𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cx = 3.94 + 24.21 * 0.484 = 15.66
M𝑦𝑓 = M𝑦𝑓𝑜 + ΔM ∗ Cy = 1.97+ 24.21 *0.248 = 7.97

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 141

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Figure 3.12. adjusted moment for ground floor slab

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 142

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Figure 3.13. adjusted moment for 1st and 2nd floor slab

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 143

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Figure 3.14. adjusted moment for 3rd floor slab

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 144

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Figure 3.15. adjusted moment for 4th floor slab

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 145

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

3.8. Slab reinforcement design

Material Data, C-20/25, S-400
Effective depth, d = 180mm
Width, b=1000mm
𝑓𝑐𝑘 20
Fck=20mpa fcd = = 1.5 = 13.33Mpa
1.5
𝑓𝑦𝑘 400
Fyk = 400 Mpa fyd = 1.15 = 1.15 = 347.83Mpa

Checking of depth for flexure for ground floor slab

𝑴𝒎𝒂𝒙
d>√
𝟎.𝟐𝟗𝟓∗𝒃∗𝒇𝒄𝒅

effective depth for roof sabe d=180mm and Mmax = 26.17KNm on CS-1
26.17∗106
180 > √0.295∗1000∗13.33 = 81.57mm < 180mm……okey!!

Checking of depth for flexure for 1st and 2nd floor slab
𝑴𝒎𝒂𝒙
d>√
𝟎.𝟐𝟗𝟓∗𝒃∗𝒇𝒄𝒅

effective depth for roof sabe d=180mm and Mmax = 26.17KNm on CS-1
26.17∗106
180 > √0.295∗1000∗13.33 = 81.57mm < 180mm……okey!!

Checking of depth for flexure for 3rd floor slab

𝑴𝒎𝒂𝒙
d>√
𝟎.𝟐𝟗𝟓∗𝒃∗𝒇𝒄𝒅

effective depth for roof sabe d=180mm and Mmax = 23.94KNm on CS-1
23.94∗106
180 > √0.295∗1000∗13.33 = 78.03mm < 180mm……okey!!

Checking of depth for flexure for 4th floor slab

𝑴𝒎𝒂𝒙
d>√
𝟎.𝟐𝟗𝟓∗𝒃∗𝒇𝒄𝒅

effective depth for roof sabe d=180mm and Mmax = 22.97KNm on S-6
22.97∗106
180 > √0.295∗1000∗13.33 = 76.43mm < 180mm……okey!!

Reinforcement Design
As =  b*d
For selected bar diameter the spacing is calculated using the following formula:

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 146

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building
𝑎𝑠
S
𝐴𝑠

Where : as area of single bar

As calculated area of steel
S spacing
All calculated area of steel (As) is compared with As min and all calculated spacing is compared
with max S as ES-EN provision.

ASmin= min *b*d where min= 0.5/fyk

The spacing of bars should not exceed smax,slabs.
 for the principal reinforcement,
3𝐷
𝑆 = 𝑚𝑖𝑛 { 400 }
𝑆 − 𝑐𝑎𝑙𝑐𝑢𝑙𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑑
 for secondary reinforcement
3.5𝐷
𝑆 = 𝑚𝑖𝑛 { 450 }
𝑆 − 𝑐𝑎𝑙𝑐𝑢𝑙𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑑
Sample reinforcement calculation for GFS-8
For Mxs = 21.32KNm (adjusted moment)

 [1 − √1 − 𝑏∗𝑑2𝑀𝑢 𝑓𝑐𝑑

2 ∗𝑓𝑐𝑑 ] 𝑓𝑦𝑑

2∗21.32∗106 13.33
=[1 − √1 − 1000∗1802 ∗13.33] 347.83 = 0.00194

min= 0.5/fyk = 0.5/400 = 0.00125

𝜌 = 0.00194
 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 {𝜌 = 0.00125
} Therefore  = 0.00194
min

As = 0.00194*1000*1800 = 349.37mm2
Consider ɸ10mm reinforcement bar
𝜋∗102
𝑎𝑠
S  4
= 224.79𝑚𝑚 𝑢𝑠𝑒 𝑆 = 200𝑚𝑚
𝐴𝑠 349.37

3 ∗ 280 = 840
𝑆 = 𝑚𝑖𝑛 { 400 } Therefore S = 200mm
200
𝑎𝑠 78.5
Area of steel provided (As) =  = 1000 ∗ = 392.7𝑚𝑚2 
𝑆 200

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 147

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Use Ø 10 c/c 200

For Mys = 13.16KNm (adjusted moment)

 [1 − √1 − 𝑏∗𝑑2𝑀𝑢 ]
𝑓𝑐𝑑
2 ∗𝑓𝑐𝑑 𝑓𝑦𝑑

2∗13.16∗106 13.33
=[1 − √1 − 1000∗1802 ∗13.33] 347.83 = 0.00119

min= 0.5/fyk = 0.5/400 = 0.00125

𝜌 = 0.00119
 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 {𝜌 = 0.00125
} Therefore  = 0.00125
min

As = 0.00125*1000*180 = 225mm2
Consider ɸ10mm reinforcement bar
𝜋∗102
𝑎𝑠
S  4
= 349.06𝑚𝑚 𝑢𝑠𝑒 𝑆 = 300𝑚𝑚
𝐴𝑠 225

3 ∗ 280 = 840
𝑆 = 𝑚𝑖𝑛 { 400 } Therefore S = 300mm
300
𝑎𝑠 78.5
Area of steel provided (As) =  = 1000 ∗ = 261.8𝑚𝑚2 
𝑆 300

Use Ø 10 c/c 300

For Mxf = 17.07KNm (adjusted moment)

 [1 − √1 − 𝑏∗𝑑2𝑀𝑢 𝑓𝑐𝑑

2 ∗𝑓𝑐𝑑 ] 𝑓𝑦𝑑

2∗17.07∗106 13.33
=[1 − √1 − 1000∗1802 ∗13.33] 347.83 = 0.00155

min= 0.5/fyk = 0.5/400 = 0.00125

𝜌 = 0.00155
 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 {𝜌 = 0.00125
} Therefore  = 0.00155
min

As = 0.00155*1000*250 = 279mm2
Consider ɸ10mm reinforcement bar
𝜋∗102
𝑎𝑠
S  4
= 281𝑚𝑚 𝑢𝑠𝑒 𝑆 = 250𝑚𝑚
𝐴𝑠 279

3 ∗ 280 = 840
𝑆 = 𝑚𝑖𝑛 { 400 } Therefore S = 250mm
250

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 148

 B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building
𝑎𝑠 78.5
Area of steel provided (As) =  = 1000 ∗ = 314𝑚𝑚2 
𝑆 250

Use Ø 10 c/c 250

For Myf = 10.08KNm (adjusted moment)

 [1 − √1 − 𝑏∗𝑑2𝑀𝑢 ]
𝑓𝑐𝑑
2 ∗𝑓𝑐𝑑 𝑓𝑦𝑑

2∗10.08∗106 13.33
=[1 − √1 − 1000∗1802 ∗13.33] 347.83 = 0.00091

min= 0.5/fyk = 0.5/400 = 0.00125

𝜌 = 0.00091
 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 {𝜌 = 0.00125
} Therefore  = 0.00125
min

As = 0.00125*1000*180 = 225mm2
Consider ɸ10mm reinforcement bar
𝜋∗102
𝑎𝑠
S  4
= 349.06𝑚𝑚 𝑢𝑠𝑒 𝑆 = 300𝑚𝑚
𝐴𝑠 225

3 ∗ 280 = 840
𝑆 = 𝑚𝑖𝑛 { 400 } Therefore S = 300mm
300
𝑎𝑠 78.5
Area of steel provided (As) =  = 1000 ∗ = 261.8𝑚𝑚2 
𝑆 300

Use Ø 10 c/c 300

Table 3.40. Flexural Reinforcement calculation for the ground floor slab
Adjusted d(m As
panel M
M min  m)
As(mm2) S
provided
provide

Mxf 7.2 0.00125 0.00064 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
On GFS-1
Myf 4.07 0.00125 0.00036 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
b/n GFS-
Mxs 9.68 0.00125 0.00155 180 278.25 250 314.16 Ø 10 c/c 250
1&2
b/n GFS-2
Mys 26.17 0.00125 0.00240 180 431.48 150 523.6 Ø 10 c/c 150
& CS-1
b/nGFS-2
Mys 9.43 0.00125 0.00155 180 278.25 250 314.16 Ø 10 c/c 250
& CS-2
Mxs 9.52 0.00125 0.00085 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
Mys 7.58 0.00125 0.00068 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
On GFS-3
Mxf 6.99 0.00125 0.00063 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
Myf 5.63 0.00125 0.00050 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 149

 B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

b/n GFS-
Mys 7.58 0.00125 0.00155 180 278.25 250 314.16 Ø 10 c/c 250
2&3
b/n GFS-
Mss 9.81 0.00125 0.00155 180 278.25 250 314.16 Ø 10 c/c 250
3&5
Mxf 7.97 0.00125 0.00071 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
On GFS-4 Myf 7.14 0.00125 0.00064 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
Mys 6.48 0.00125 0.00058 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
b/n GFS-
Mys 6.42 0.00125 0.00155 180 278.25 250 314.16 Ø 10 c/c 250
4&5
b/n GFS-
Mxs 13.39 0.00125 0.00155 180 278.25 250 314.16 Ø 10 c/c 250
4&6
Mxf 8.56 0.00125 0.00077 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
On GFS-5 Myf 4.86 0.00125 0.00043 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
Mys 6.35 0.00125 0.00057 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
b/n GFS-
Mxs 10.22 0.00125 0.00155 180 278.25 250 314.16 Ø 10 c/c 250
5&7
Mxf 14.67 0.00125 0.00132 180 238.43 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
On GFS-6 Myf 9.1 0.00125 0.00082 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
Mys 9.06 0.00125 0.00081 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
b/n GFS-
Mys 8.98 0.00125 0.00155 180 278.25 250 314.16 Ø 10 c/c 250
6&7
b/n GFS-
Mxs 21.32 0.00125 0.00194 180 349.37 200 392.7 Ø 10 c/c 200
6&8
Mxf 9.59 0.00125 0.00086 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
On GFS-7 Myf 6.58 0.00125 0.00059 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
Mys 6.62 0.00125 0.00059 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
b/n GFS-
Mxs 14.56 0.00125 0.00155 180 278.25 250 314.16 Ø 10 c/c 250
7&9
Mxf 17.07 0.00125 0.00155 180 278.25 250 314.16 Ø 10 c/c 250
On GFS-8 Myf 10.08 0.00125 0.00091 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
Mys 13.16 0.00125 0.00119 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
b/n GFS-
Mys 11.95 0.00125 0.00155 180 278.25 250 314.16 Ø 10 c/c 250
8&9
Mxf 11.95 0.00125 0.00108 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
On GFS-9 Myf 8.71 0.00125 0.00078 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
Mys 11.37 0.00125 0.00102 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
b/n GFS-
Mxs 13.99 0.00125 0.00155 180 278.25 250 314.16 Ø 10 c/c 250
9&10
On GFS-10 Mxf 7.46 0.00125 0.00067 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 150

 B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Myf 4.44 0.00125 0.00040 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
Mxs 6.06 0.00125 0.00054 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
Mys 4.18 0.00125 0.00037 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300

Table 3.41. Flexural Reinforcement calculation for 1st and 2nd floor slab
Adjusted As
panel M
M min  d(mm) As(mm2) S
provided
provide

Mxf 7.24 0.00125 0.00065 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
On S-1
Myf 4.68 0.00125 0.00042 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300

b/n S-1&2 Mxs 9.69 0.00125 0.00156 180 281.58 250 314.16 Ø 10 c/c 250
b/nS-2 & 180 Ø 10 c/c 150
Mys 26.17 0.00125 0.00240 431.48 150 523.6
CS-1
b/nS-2 & 0.00125 0.00156 180 281.58 250 314.16 Ø 10 c/c 250
Mys 9.43
CS-2
Mxs 13.13 0.00125 0.00118 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300

Mys 11.02 0.00125 0.00099 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
On S-3
Mxf 9.85 0.00125 0.00088 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300

Myf 8.44 0.00125 0.00076 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
b/n S-2 & 0.00125 0.00156 180 281.58 250 314.16 Ø 10 c/c 250
Mys 11.02
3
b/n S-3&5 Mss 12.91 0.00125 0.00156 180 281.58 250 314.16 Ø 10 c/c 250

Mxf 7.97 0.00125 0.00071 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300

On S-4 Myf 7.14 0.00125 0.00064 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300

Mys 6.48 0.00125 0.00058 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300

b/n S-4&5 Mys 6.16 0.00125 0.00156 180 281.58 250 314.16 Ø 10 c/c 250

b/n S-4&6 Mxs 13.51 0.00125 0.00156 180 281.58 250 314.16 Ø 10 c/c 250

Mxf 8.56 0.00125 0.00077 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
On S-5
Myf 4.56 0.00125 0.00041 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
b/nS-5 & 29.08 0.00125 0.00267 180 357.79 150 523.6 Ø 10 c/c 150
Mys
CS-3
b/n S-5&7 Mxs 10.88 0.00125 0.00156 180 281.58 250 314.16 Ø 10 c/c 250

Mxf 14.67 0.00125 0.00132 180 238.43 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300

On S-6 Myf 9.1 0.00125 0.00082 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300

Mys 9.14 0.00125 0.00082 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300

b/n S-6&7 Mys 8.32 0.00125 0.00156 180 281.58 250 314.16 Ø 10 c/c 250

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 151

 B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

b/n S-6&8 Mxs 22.53 0.00125 0.00205 180 369.76 200 392.7 Ø 10 c/c 200

Mxf 10.51 0.00125 0.00094 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
On S-7
Myf 8.98 0.00125 0.00081 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
b/n S- 180 Ø 10 c/c 150
Mys 29.08 0.00125 0.00267 357.79 150 523.6
7&CS-3
b/n S-7&9 Mxs 14.6 0.00125 0.00156 180 281.58 250 314.16 Ø 10 c/c 250

Mxf 17.27 0.00125 0.00156 180 281.58 250 314.16 Ø 10 c/c 250

On S-8 Myf 10.19 0.00125 0.00092 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300

Mys 13.31 0.00125 0.00120 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300

b/n S-8&9 Mys 12.28 0.00125 0.00156 180 281.58 250 314.16 Ø 10 c/c 250

Mxf 11.93 0.00125 0.00107 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300

On S-9 Myf 9.01 0.00125 0.00081 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300

Mys 11.26 0.00125 0.00101 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
b/n S- 0.00125 0.00156 180 281.58 250 314.16 Ø 10 c/c 250
Mxs 14.11
9&11
Mxf 9.94 0.00125 0.00089 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300

On S-10 Myf 5.79 0.00125 0.00052 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300

Mys 3.31 0.00125 0.00029 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
b/n S- 0.00125 0.00156 180 281.58 250 314.16 Ø 10 c/c 250
Mys 4.67
10&11
b/nS- 180 Ø 10 c/c 250
Mxs 18.86 0.00125 0.00171 225.00 250 314.16
10&CS-4
Mxf 11.19 0.00125 0.00101 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300

On S-11 Myf 6.16 0.00125 0.00055 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300

Mys 4.59 0.00125 0.00041 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
b/nS- 180 Ø 10 c/c 250
Mxs 18.86 0.00125 0.00171 228.18 250 314.16
11&CS-4

Table 3.42. Flexural Reinforcement calculation for the 3rd floor slab
Adjusted As
panel M
M min  d(mm) As(mm2) S
provided
provide

Mxf 6.98 0.00125 0.00062 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
On S-1
Myf 4.52 0.00125 0.00040 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
b/n S- 0.00125 0.00140 180 225.00 250 314.16 Ø 10 c/c 250
Mxs 9.36
1&2

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 152

 B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

b/nS-2 & 180 Ø 10 c/c 150

Mys 23.94 0.00125 0.00219 393.60 150 523.6
CS-1
b/nS-2 & 0.00125 0.00140 180 225.00 250 314.16 Ø 10 c/c 250
Mys 9.18
CS-2
Mxs 9.16 0.00125 0.00082 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300

Mys 7.69 0.00125 0.00069 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
On S-3
Mxf 6.87 0.00125 0.00061 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300

Myf 5.89 0.00125 0.00053 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
b/n S-2 & 0.00125 0.00140 180 225.00 250 314.16 Ø 10 c/c 250
Mys 7.69
3
b/n S- 0.00125 0.00140 180 225.00 250 314.16 Ø 10 c/c 250
Mxs 8.74
3&5
Mxf 6.97 0.00125 0.00062 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300

On S-4 Myf 6.4 0.00125 0.00057 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300

Mys 6.48 0.00125 0.00058 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
b/n S- 0.00125 0.00140 180 225.00 250 314.16 Ø 10 c/c 250
Mys 6.34
4&5
b/n S- 0.00125 0.00140 180 225.00 250 314.16 Ø 10 c/c 250
Mxs 11.27
4&6
Mxf 7.29 0.00125 0.00065 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
On S-5
Myf 3.72 0.00125 0.00033 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
b/nS-5 & 180 Ø 10 c/c 150
Mys 25.91 0.00125 0.00237 305.11 150 523.6
CS-3
b/n S- 0.00125 0.00140 180 225.00 250 314.16 Ø 10 c/c 250
Mxs 8.93
5&7
Mxf 12.03 0.00125 0.00108 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300

On S-6 Myf 7.45 0.00125 0.00067 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300

Mys 7.51 0.00125 0.00067 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
b/n S- 180 Ø 10 c/c 300
Mys 7.84 0.00125 0.00070 225.00 300 261.8
6&7
b/n S- 180 Ø 10 c/c 250
Mxs 18.49 0.00125 0.00168 301.93 250 314.16
6&8
Mxf 8.19 0.00125 0.00073 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
On S-7
Myf 5.52 0.00125 0.00049 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300

b/n S- Mys 25.91 0.00125 0.00237 180 305.11 150 523.6 Ø 10 c/c 150

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 153

 B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

7&CS-3
b/n S- 0.00125 0.00140 180 225.00 250 314.16 Ø 10 c/c 250
Mxs 11.98
7&9
Mxf 14.18 0.00125 0.00128 180 230.33 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300

On S-8 Myf 8.37 0.00125 0.00075 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300

Mys 10.92 0.00125 0.00098 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
b/n S- 0.00125 0.00140 180 225.00 250 314.16 Ø 10 c/c 250
Mys 10.08
8&9
Mxf 9.79 0.00125 0.00088 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300

On S-9 Myf 7.1 0.00125 0.00064 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300

Mys 9.24 0.00125 0.00083 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
b/n S- 0.00125 0.00140 180 225.00 250 314.16 Ø 10 c/c 250
Mxs 11.57
9&11
Mxf 9.86 0.00125 0.00089 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300

On S-10 Myf 5.36 0.00125 0.00048 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300

Mys 6 0.00125 0.00054 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300

b/n S- 180 255.00 250 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 250
Mys 5.82 0.00125 0.00052
10&11
b/nS- 180 Ø 10 c/c 250
Mxs 15.48 0.00125 0.00140 225.00 250 314.16
10&CS-4
Mxf 9.19 0.00125 0.00082 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300

On S-11 Myf 5.04 0.00125 0.00045 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300

Mys 3.37 0.00125 0.00030 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
b/nS- 15.48 0.00125 0.00140 180 225.00 250 314.16 Ø 10 c/c 250
Mxs
11&CS-4

Table 3.43. Flexural Reinforcement calculation for the 4th floor slab
Adjuste d(mm As
panel M
dM min  )
As(mm2) S
provided
provide

Mxf 12.01 0.00125 0.00108 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
On S-1
Myf 5.3 0.00125 0.00047 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
b/n S- 180 370.10 200 392.7 Ø 10 c/c 200
Mys 22.55 0.00125 0.00206
1&CS-1
180 Ø 10 c/c 300
b/n S-1&2 Mxs 9.68 0.00125 0.00087 225.00 300 261.8

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 154

 B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

b/nS-2 & 180 Ø 10 c/c 300

Mys 9.02 0.00125 0.00081 225.00 300 261.8
CS-2
Mxf 13.89 0.00125 0.00125 180 225.54 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
On S-3
Myf 9.91 0.00125 0.00089 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
b/n S- 180 322.68 200 392.7 Ø 10 c/c 200
19.73 0.00125 0.00179
3&CS-3
b/n S- 180 444.79 150 523.6 Ø 10 c/c 150
26.95 0.00125 0.00247
3&CS-4
b/n S-2 & 180 Ø 10 c/c 300
Mys 7.58 0.00125 0.00068 225.00 300 261.8
3
180 255.00 250 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 250
b/n S-3&5 Mxs 9.81 0.00125 0.00088

Mxf 7.92 0.00125 0.00071 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300

On S-4 Myf 7.11 0.00125 0.00064 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300

Mys 6.48 0.00125 0.00058 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
180 255.00 250 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 250
b/n S-4&5 Mys 6.42 0.00125 0.00057

180 255.00 250 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 250

b/n S-4&6 Mxs 13.39 0.00125 0.00121

Mxf 7.16 0.00125 0.00064 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300

On S-5 Myf 4.72 0.00125 0.00042 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300

Mys 6.35 0.00125 0.00057 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
180 255.00 250 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 250
b/n S-5&7 Mxs 10.22 0.00125 0.00092

Mxf 14.52 0.00125 0.00131 180 235.95 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300

On S-6 Myf 9 0.00125 0.00081 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300

Mys 9.06 0.00125 0.00081 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
180 Ø 10 c/c 300
b/n S-6&7 Mys 7.86 0.00125 0.00070 225.00 300 261.8

180 Ø 10 c/c 200

b/n S-6&8 Mxs 22.27 0.00125 0.00203 365.37 200 392.7

Mxf 13.35 0.00125 0.00120 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
On S-7
Myf 9.7 0.00125 0.00087 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
b/n S- 180 342.48 200 392.7 Ø 10 c/c 200
Mys 20.91 0.00125 0.00190
7&CS-5

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 155

 B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

180 Ø 10 c/c 200

b/n S-7&9 Mxs 22.35 0.00125 0.00204 366.72 200 392.7

Mxf 17.07 0.00125 0.00155 180 278.25 250 314.16 Ø 10 c/c 250

On S-8 Myf 14.78 0.00125 0.00133 180 240.25 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300

Mys 13.16 0.00125 0.00119 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
180 255.00 250 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 250
b/n S-8&9 Mys 12.27 0.00125 0.00110

b/n S- 180 Ø 10 c/c 200

Mxs 22.79 0.00125 0.00208 374.15 200 392.7
8&10
Mxf 11.95 0.00125 0.00108 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
On S-9
Myf 8.7 0.00125 0.00078 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
b/n S- 180 255.00 250 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 250
Mxs 15.04 0.00125 0.00136
9&11
b/n S- 180 443.25 150 523.6 Ø 10 c/c 150
Mys 26.86 0.00125 0.00246
9&CS-6
Mxf 10.28 0.00125 0.00092 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300

On S-10 Myf 5.2 0.00125 0.00046 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300

Mys 6 0.00125 0.00054 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300

b/n S- 180 Ø 10 c/c 250
Mys 5.73 0.00125 0.00051 255.00 250 261.8
10&11
b/nS- 180 500.86 150 523.6 Ø 10 c/c 150
Mxs 30.22 0.00125 0.00278
10&CS-7
Mxf 15.66 0.00125 0.00142 180 254.83 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
On S-11
Myf 7.97 0.00125 0.00071 180 225.00 300 261.8 Ø 10 c/c 300
b/nS- 26.86 0.00125 0.00246 180 443.25 150 523.6 Ø 10 c/c 150
Mxs
11&CS-6

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 156

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

 REINFORCEMENT FOR STRIP METHOD FOR S-2

This reinforcement design is applied for all floors on panel 2.

Table 3.44. REINFORCEMENT FOR STRIP METHOD FOR S-2

design Moment Depth St ratio 𝜌min As=ρbd Spacing Sp Dia of
(KNm) Chk(mm) ρ condition (mm2) (mm) provide Rod provide
(mm)
X-
Midd
Mxs = 18.08 119.23 0.00164 0.00125 295.2 266.1 250 Ø10 c/c 250
Mxf = 36.16 84.33 0.00336 0.00125 604.8 129.86 130 Ø10 c/c 130
x-
edge
Mxs = 32.68 87.52 0.00302 0.00125 543.6 144.48 130 Ø10 c/c 130
Mxf = 65.36 61.84 0.00632 0.00125 1137.6 69.07 60 Ø10 c/c 60
Y-
midd
Mys = 41.22 91.37 0.00385 0.00125 693 113.93 110 Ø10 c/c 110
Myf =

3.9. Load Transfer to the Supporting Beams

The uniformly distributed loads on slab panels is eventually transferred to the supporting beams
based up on the tributary area the beam is effective in carrying (supporting) the distributed load
and continuity condition of the slab panels.
To facilitate load transfer computation, the recent version of EBCS-2 provides shear force
reaction force transfer coefficient in tabular fore to calculate the load to be transferred to the
supporting beam.
The design loads on beams supporting solid slabs spanning in two directions at right
angles
Supporting uniformly distributed loads may be assessed from the following equations.
𝑽𝒙 = 𝜷𝒗𝒙 ∗ 𝑷𝒅 ∗ 𝑳𝒙
𝑽𝒚 = 𝜷𝒗𝒚 ∗ 𝑷𝒅 ∗ 𝑳𝒙

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 157

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

The load transfer coefficients βvx and βvy are determined from ES EN -2, 2015 Table A-3and the
assumed distribution of the load on the supporting beams is as shown below.

Figure 3.16. distribution of load on a beam supporting a two-way spanning slab

The design load on a beam determined in the above may be taken as the maximum shear in the
slab at of the support, which will be distributed on 75% of the span of the beam.
Sample calculation load transfer from GFS-1 to beam
Pd = 16.76KN/m2
Lx = 2.52m
Ly/Lx = 1.73
vxc = 0.59
vxd = 0.38
vyc = 0
vyd = 0.29
Vxc =vxc *pd*Lx Vxd =vxd *pd*Lx
= 0.590* 16.76 * 2.52 = 24.92KN = 0.38*16.76 *2.52= 16.05KN
Vyc =vyc *pd*Lx Vyd =vyd *pd*Lx
= 0* 16.76 * 2.52 = 0KN = 0.29*16.76 *2.52= 12.15KN
Computation of the rest of the panel for each floor slabs are shown as Tabular form as follow:
Table 3. 45. Load Transfer to the Supporting Beams for ground floor slab
Panel Ly/Lx Lx(m) Pd Shear coefficient Loads transferred
16.76 vxc 0.59 Vxc 24.92
16.76 vxd 0.38 Vxd 16.05
GFS-1 1.73 2.52
16.76 vyc 0 Vyc 0.00
16.76 vyd 0.29 Vyd 12.25

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 158

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

16.76 vxc 0.43 Vxc 35.24

16.76 vxd 0 Vxd 0.00
GFS-2 1.4 4.89
16.76 vyc 0.43 Vyc 35.24
16.76 vyd 0 Vyd 0.00
16.76 vxc 0.44 Vxc 27.58
16.76 vxd 0.29 Vxd 18.18
GFS-3 1.1 3.74
16.76 vyc 0.40 Vyc 25.07
16.76 vyd 0.26 Vyd 16.30
16.76 vxc 0.36 Vxc 19.91
16.76 vxd 0 Vxd 0.00
GFS-4 1.0 3.3
16.76 vyc 0.36 Vyc 19.91
16.76 vyd 0.24 Vyd 13.27
16.76 vxc 0.55 Vxc 30.42
16.76 vxd 0 Vxd 0.00
GFS-5 1.6 3.3
16.76 vyc 0.40 Vyc 22.12
16.76 vyd 0.24 Vyd 13.27
16.76 vxc 0.49 Vxc 30.71
16.76 vxd 0 Vxd 0.00
GFS-6 1.7 3.74
16.76 vyc 0.36 Vyc 22.57
16.76 vyd 0.24 Vyd 15.04
16.76 vxc 0.45 Vxc 28.21
16.76 vxd 0 Vxd 0.00
GFS-7 1.4 3.74
16.76 vyc 0.36 Vyc 22.57
16.76 vyd 0.24 Vyd 15.04
16.76 vxc 0.55 Vxc 37.89
16.76 vxd 0 Vxd 0.00
GFS-8 1.6 4.11
16.76 vyc 0.40 Vyc 27.55
16.76 vyd 0.24 Vyd 16.53

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 159

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

16.76 vxc 0.44 Vxc 30.60

16.76 vxd 0 Vxd 0.00
GFS-9 1.3 4.15
16.76 vyc 0.36 Vyc 25.04
16.76 vyd 0.24 Vyd 16.69
16.76 vxc 0.51 Vxc 22.65
16.76 vxd 0.34 Vxd 15.10
GFS-10 1.2 2.65
16.76 vyc 0 Vyc 0.00
16.76 vyd 0.30 Vyd 13.32

Table 3.46. Load Transfer to the Supporting Beams for 1st and 2nd floor slab
Panel Ly/Lx Lx(m) Pd Shear coefficient Loads transferred
16.76 vxc 0.59 Vxc 24.92
16.76 vxd 0.38 Vxd 16.05
S-1 1.73 2.52
16.76 vyc 0 Vyc 0.00
16.76 vyd 0.29 Vyd 12.25
16.76 vxc 0.43 Vxc 35.24
16.76 vxd 0 Vxd 0.00
S-2 1.4 4.89
16.76 vyc 0.43 Vyc 35.24
16.76 vyd 0 Vyd 0.00
16.76 vxc 0.44 Vxc 27.58
16.76 vxd 0.29 Vxd 18.18
S-3 1.1 3.74
16.76 vyc 0.40 Vyc 25.07
16.76 vyd 0.26 Vyd 16.30
16.76 vxc 0.36 Vxc 19.91
16.76 vxd 0 Vxd 0.00
S-4 1.0 3.3
16.76 vyc 0.36 Vyc 19.91
16.76 vyd 0.24 Vyd 13.27
S-5 1.6 3.3 16.76 vxc 0.465 Vxc 25.72

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 160

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

16.76 vxd 0 Vxd 0.00

16.76 vyc 0.33 Vyc 18.25
16.76 vyd 0 Vyd 0.00
16.76 vxc 0.49 Vxc 30.71
16.76 vxd 0 Vxd 0.00
S-6 1.7 3.74
16.76 vyc 0.36 Vyc 22.57
16.76 vyd 0.24 Vyd 15.04
16.76 vxc 0.43 Vxc 26.95
16.76 vxd 0 Vxd 0.00
S-7 1.4 3.74
16.76 vyc 0.33 Vyc 20.69
16.76 vyd 0 Vyd 0.00
16.76 vxc 0.55 Vxc 37.89
16.76 vxd 0 Vxd 0.00
S-8 1.6 4.11
16.76 vyc 0.40 Vyc 27.55
16.76 vyd 0.24 Vyd 16.53
16.76 vxc 0.44 Vxc 30.60
16.76 vxd 0 Vxd 0.00
S-9 1.3 4.15
16.76 vyc 0.36 Vyc 25.04
16.76 vyd 0.24 Vyd 16.69
16.76 vxc 0.42 Vxc 15.84
16.76 vxd 0 Vxd 0.00
S-10 1.2 2.25
16.76 vyc 0.36 Vyc 13.58
16.76 vyd 0.24 Vyd 9.05
16.76 vxc 0.52 Vxc 23.10
16.76 vxd 0 Vxd 0.00
S-11 2 2.65
16.76 vyc 0.36 Vyc 15.99
16.76 vyd 0.24 Vyd 10.66

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 161

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Table3. 47. Load Transfer to the Supporting Beams for 3rd floor slab
Panel Ly/Lx Lx(m) Pd Shear coefficient Loads transferred

16.19 vxc 0.59 Vxc 24.07

16.19 vxd 0.38 Vxd 15.50
S-1 1.73 2.52
16.19 vyc 0 Vyc 0.00
16.19 vyd 0.29 Vyd 11.83
18.07 vxc 0.43 Vxc 38.00
18.07 vxd 0 Vxd 0.00
S-2 1.4 4.89
18.07 vyc 0.43 Vyc 38.00
18.07 vyd 0 Vyd 0.00
11.69 vxc 0.44 Vxc 19.24
11.69 vxd 0.29 Vxd 12.68
S-3 1.1 3.74
11.69 vyc 0.40 Vyc 17.49
11.69 vyd 0.26 Vyd 11.37
15.26 vxc 0.36 Vxc 18.13
15.26 vxd 0 Vxd 0.00
S-4 1.0 3.3
15.26 vyc 0.36 Vyc 18.13
15.26 vyd 0.24 Vyd 12.09
13.76 vxc 0.465 Vxc 21.11
13.76 vxd 0 Vxd 0.00
S-5 1.6 3.3
13.76 vyc 0.33 Vyc 14.98
13.76 vyd 0 Vyd 0.00
13.76 vxc 0.49 Vxc 25.22
13.76 vxd 0 Vxd 0.00
S-6 1.7 3.74
13.76 vyc 0.36 Vyc 18.53
13.76 vyd 0.24 Vyd 12.35
13.76 vxc 0.43 Vxc 22.13
S-7 1.4 3.74
13.76 vxd 0 Vxd 0.00

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 162

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

13.76 vyc 0.33 Vyc 16.98

13.76 vyd 0 Vyd 0.00
13.76 vxc 0.55 Vxc 31.10
13.76 vxd 0 Vxd 0.00
S-8 1.6 4.11
13.76 vyc 0.40 Vyc 22.62
13.76 vyd 0.24 Vyd 13.57
13.76 vxc 0.44 Vxc 25.13
13.76 vxd 0 Vxd 0.00
S-9 1.3 4.15
13.76 vyc 0.36 Vyc 20.56
13.76 vyd 0.24 Vyd 13.70
15.26 vxc 0.42 Vxc 16.98
15.26 vxd 0 Vxd 0.00
S-10 1.2 2.65
15.26 vyc 0.36 Vyc 14.56
15.26 vyd 0.24 Vyd 9.71
13.76 vxc 0.52 Vxc 18.96
13.76 vxd 0 Vxd 0.00
S-11 2 2.65
13.76 vyc 0.36 Vyc 13.13
13.76 vyd 0.24 Vyd 8.75

Table 3.48. Load Transfer to the Supporting Beams for 4th floor slab
Panel Ly/Lx Lx(m) Pd Shear coefficient Loads transferred

17.72 vxc 0.59 Vxc 26.35

17.72 vxd 0.38 Vxd 16.97
S-1 1.73 2.52
17.72 vyc 0 Vyc 0.00
17.72 vyd 0.29 Vyd 12.95
16.91 vxc 0.43 Vxc 35.56
S-2 1.4 4.89 16.91 vxd 0 Vxd 0.00
16.91 vyc 0.43 Vyc 35.56

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 163

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

16.91 vyd 0 Vyd 0.00

13.89 vxc 0.44 Vxc 22.86
13.89 vxd 0.29 Vxd 15.07
S-3 1.1 3.74
13.89 vyc 0.40 Vyc 20.78
13.89 vyd 0.26 Vyd 13.51
15.26 vxc 0.36 Vxc 18.13
15.26 vxd 0 Vxd 0.00
S-4 1.0 3.3
15.26 vyc 0.36 Vyc 18.13
15.26 vyd 0.24 Vyd 12.09
14.95 vxc 0.465 Vxc 22.94
14.95 vxd 0 Vxd 0.00
S-5 1.6 3.3
14.95 vyc 0.33 Vyc 16.28
14.95 vyd 0 Vyd 0.00
16.61 vxc 0.49 Vxc 30.44
16.61 vxd 0 Vxd 0.00
S-6 1.7 3.74
16.61 vyc 0.36 Vyc 22.36
16.61 vyd 0.24 Vyd 14.91
14.8 vxc 0.43 Vxc 23.80
14.8 vxd 0 Vxd 0.00
S-7 1.4 3.74
14.8 vyc 0.33 Vyc 18.27
14.8 vyd 0 Vyd 0.00
16.57 vxc 0.55 Vxc 37.46
16.57 vxd 0 Vxd 0.00
S-8 1.6 4.11
16.57 vyc 0.40 Vyc 27.24
16.57 vyd 0.24 Vyd 16.34
16.93 vxc 0.44 Vxc 30.91
S-9 1.3 4.15 16.93 vxd 0 Vxd 0.00
16.93 vyc 0.36 Vyc 25.29

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 164

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

16.93 vyd 0.24 Vyd 16.86

15.26 vxc 0.42 Vxc 16.98
15.26 vxd 0 Vxd 0.00
S-10 1.2 2.65
15.26 vyc 0.36 Vyc 14.56
15.26 vyd 0.24 Vyd 9.71
11.69 vxc 0.52 Vxc 16.11
11.69 vxd 0 Vxd 0.00
S-11 2 2.65
11.69 vyc 0.36 Vyc 11.15
11.69 vyd 0.24 Vyd 7.43

Load transfer to beam from one-way cantilever slab

R = P+PDL*Lx
Where:
PDL = unfactored dead load on the cantilever slab
R = dead load transfer to the supporting beam
Sample calculation for ground floor slab CS-1
Pdl = 6.59KN/m2
P = 11.23KN
Lx = 1.22m
R = 11.23+6.59*1.22 = 90.28KN/m
Table 3.49. Load transfer to beam from one-way cantilever slab for ground floor slab
Panel Lx PDL(KN/m2) P(KN) R(KN/m)
CS-1 1.22 6.59 11.29 19.27
CS-2 0.41 6.59 19.57 22.27

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 165

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Table 3.50. Load transfer to beam from one-way cantilever slab for 1st and 2nd floor slab
Panel Lx PDL(KN/m2) P(KN) R(KN/m)
CS-1 1.22 6.59 11.29 19.27
CS-2 0.41 6.59 19.57 22.27
CS-3 1.3 6.86 6.95 15.87
CS-4 1.5 6.86 0 10.29

Table3. 51. Load transfer to beam from one-way cantilever slab for 3rd floor slab
Panel Lx PDL(KN/m2) P(KN) R(KN/m)
CS-1 1.22 6.59 11.29 19.27
CS-2 0.41 6.59 19.57 22.27
CS-3 1.3 6.86 6.95 15.87
CS-4 1.5 6.86 0 10.29

Table 3.52. Load transfer to beam from one-way cantilever slab for 4th floor slab
Panel Lx PDL(KN/m2) P(KN) R(KN/m)
CS-1 1.22 6.59 11.29 19.27
CS-2 0.41 6.59 19.57 22.27
CS-3 1.3 6.59 12.31 20.87
CS-4 1.5 6.59 9.05 18.94
CS-5 1.5 6.59 5.02 14.91
CS-6 1.5 6.59 8.99 18.87
CS-7 1.5 6.86 0 9.88

3.10. Verification of the shear resistance for each floor slabs

For the verification of the shear resistance, the following symbols are defined: According to
ESEN-2:2015 Exp (6.2)
VRd,c = is the design shear resistance of the member without shear reinforcement.
VRd,s = is the design value of the shear force which can be sustained by the yielding shear
reinforcement.

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 166

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

VRd,max = is the design value of the maximum shear force which can be sustained by the member,
limited by crushing of the compression struts.
In regions of the member where VEd <= VRd,c no calculated shear reinforcement is
necessary. VEd is the design shear force in the section considered resulting from external loading
and restressing (bonded or unboned).
The design value for the shear resistance VRd,c is given by:
1
𝑉Rd, c = [𝐶Rd, c𝐾(100  𝑓ck)3 + 𝑘1cp] 𝑏w𝑑

With a minimum of
𝑉Rd, c = (𝑉𝑚𝑖𝑛 + 𝐾1𝜎𝐶𝑃)𝑏𝑤𝑑

 For ground floor slab

The design value for the shear resistance VRd, c is given by:
1
𝑉Rd, c = [𝐶Rd, c𝐾(100  𝑓ck)3 + 𝑘1cp] 𝑏w𝑑

With a minimum of
𝑉Rd, c = (𝑉𝑚𝑖𝑛 + 𝐾1𝜎𝐶𝑃)𝑏𝑤𝑑
Where:
 fck = 20mpa
200 200
 k= 1+ √ ≥ 2.0 = 1 + √180 = 2.054 > 2 … 𝑛𝑜𝑡 𝑜𝑘. 𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒𝑓𝑜𝑟 𝑘 = 2
𝑑

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 167

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

 𝑉𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 0.035 ∗ 𝑘 3⁄2 ∗ 𝑓𝑐𝑘 1⁄2 = 0.4427

 Ast is the area of the tensile reinforcement = 225mm2
 bw is the smallest width of the cross-section in the tensile area (mm) take one meter strip
=1000mm
𝐴𝑠 𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑣𝑖𝑑𝑒𝑑 261.8
 𝜌1 = ≤ 0.02 = 1000∗180 0.00145 < 0.02 … 𝑖𝑡𝑠 𝑜𝑘𝑒𝑦 𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒𝑓𝑜𝑟𝑒 𝜌 = 0.00145
𝑏𝑤𝑑

 Ac is the area of concrete cross-section (mm2)

𝑁𝑒𝑑
 𝜎𝑐𝑝 = = 0𝑁
𝐴𝑠

 𝑁𝑒𝑑: −𝑖𝑠 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑎𝑥𝑖𝑎𝑙 𝑓𝑜𝑟𝑐𝑒 𝑖𝑛 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑐𝑟𝑜𝑠𝑠 𝑠𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 𝑑𝑢𝑒 𝑡𝑜 𝑙𝑜𝑎𝑑𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑜𝑟 𝑝𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑠𝑖𝑛𝑔 [𝑖𝑛 𝑁](𝑁𝑒𝑑 >
0 𝑓𝑜𝑟 𝑐𝑜𝑝𝑚𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑠𝑖𝑜𝑛). 𝑇ℎ𝑒 𝑖𝑛𝑓𝑙𝑢𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑒 𝑜𝑓 𝑖𝑚𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑑 𝑑𝑒𝑓𝑜𝑟𝑚𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛𝑠 𝑜𝑛 𝑁ï` 𝑚𝑎𝑦 𝑏𝑒 𝑖𝑔𝑛𝑜𝑟𝑒𝑑. 𝐴𝑐
Is the area of concrete cross section [mm2].
0.18 0.18
 𝐶Rd, c = = = 0.12
𝛾𝑐 1.5

 K1=0.15
1
 𝑉Rd, c = [𝐶Rd, c𝐾(100  𝑓ck)3 + 𝑘1cp] 𝑏w𝑑

= [0.12*2(100*0.00145 ∗20)1/3 + 0.15*0] 1000 ∗ 180 =56137.14944N = 56.4KN

 𝑉Rd, c = (𝑉𝑚𝑖𝑛 + 𝐾1𝜎𝐶𝑃)𝑏𝑤𝑑
= (0.4427+ 0.15*0) 1000 ∗ 180 = 79686N = 79.686KN
 Maximum shear acting take 79.68KN
Max Vsd in ground floor slab is 37.89KN
 Thus, VRd,c > Vsd…. 79.68KN > 37.89KN….it is okay the section is adequate for shear.
 For 1st and 2nd floor slab
The design value for the shear resistance VRd, c is given by:
1
𝑉Rd, c = [𝐶Rd, c𝐾(100  𝑓ck)3 + 𝑘1cp] 𝑏w𝑑

With a minimum of
𝑉Rd, c = (𝑉𝑚𝑖𝑛 + 𝐾1𝜎𝐶𝑃)𝑏𝑤𝑑
Where:
 fck = 20mpa
200 200
 k= 1+ √ ≥ 2.0 = 1 + √180 = 2.054 > 2 … 𝑛𝑜𝑡 𝑜𝑘. 𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒𝑓𝑜𝑟 𝑘 = 2
𝑑

 𝑉𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 0.035 ∗ 𝑘 3⁄2 ∗ 𝑓𝑐𝑘 1⁄2 = 0.4427

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 168

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

 Ast is the area of the tensile reinforcement = 225mm2

 bw is the smallest width of the cross-section in the tensile area (mm) take one meter strip
=1000mm
𝐴𝑠 𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑣𝑖𝑑𝑒𝑑 261.8
 𝜌1 = ≤ 0.02 = 1000∗180 0.00145 < 0.02 … 𝑖𝑡𝑠 𝑜𝑘𝑒𝑦 𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒𝑓𝑜𝑟𝑒 𝜌 = 0.00145
𝑏𝑤𝑑

 Ac is the area of concrete cross-section (mm2)

𝑁𝑒𝑑
 𝜎𝑐𝑝 = = 0𝑁
𝐴𝑠

 𝑁𝑒𝑑: −𝑖𝑠 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑎𝑥𝑖𝑎𝑙 𝑓𝑜𝑟𝑐𝑒 𝑖𝑛 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑐𝑟𝑜𝑠𝑠 𝑠𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 𝑑𝑢𝑒 𝑡𝑜 𝑙𝑜𝑎𝑑𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑜𝑟 𝑝𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑠𝑖𝑛𝑔 [𝑖𝑛 𝑁](𝑁𝑒𝑑 >
0 𝑓𝑜𝑟 𝑐𝑜𝑝𝑚𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑠𝑖𝑜𝑛). 𝑇ℎ𝑒 𝑖𝑛𝑓𝑙𝑢𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑒 𝑜𝑓 𝑖𝑚𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑑 𝑑𝑒𝑓𝑜𝑟𝑚𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛𝑠 𝑜𝑛 𝑁ï` 𝑚𝑎𝑦 𝑏𝑒 𝑖𝑔𝑛𝑜𝑟𝑒𝑑. 𝐴𝑐
Is the area of concrete cross section [mm2].
0.18 0.18
 𝐶Rd, c = = = 0.12
𝛾𝑐 1.5

 K1=0.15
1
 𝑉Rd, c = [𝐶Rd, c𝐾(100  𝑓ck)3 + 𝑘1cp] 𝑏w𝑑

= [0.12*2(100*0.00145 ∗20)1/3 + 0.15*0] 1000 ∗ 180 =56137.14944N = 56.4KN

 𝑉Rd, c = (𝑉𝑚𝑖𝑛 + 𝐾1𝜎𝐶𝑃)𝑏𝑤𝑑
= (0.4427+ 0.15*0) 1000 ∗ 180 = 79686N = 79.686KN
 Maximum shear acting take 79.68KN
Max Vsd in ground floor slab is 37.89KN
 Thus, VRd,c > Vsd…. 79.68KN > 37.89KN….it is okay the section is adequate for shear.
 For 3rd floor slab
The design value for the shear resistance VRd, c is given by:
1
𝑉Rd, c = [𝐶Rd, c𝐾(100  𝑓ck)3 + 𝑘1cp] 𝑏w𝑑

With a minimum of
𝑉Rd, c = (𝑉𝑚𝑖𝑛 + 𝐾1𝜎𝐶𝑃)𝑏𝑤𝑑
Where:
 fck = 20mpa
200 200
 k= 1+ √ ≥ 2.0 = 1 + √180 = 2.054 > 2 … 𝑛𝑜𝑡 𝑜𝑘. 𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒𝑓𝑜𝑟 𝑘 = 2
𝑑

 𝑉𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 0.035 ∗ 𝑘 3⁄2 ∗ 𝑓𝑐𝑘 1⁄2 = 0.4427

 Ast is the area of the tensile reinforcement = 225mm2

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 169

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

 bw is the smallest width of the cross-section in the tensile area (mm) take one meter strip
=1000mm
𝐴𝑠 𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑣𝑖𝑑𝑒𝑑 261.8
 𝜌1 = ≤ 0.02 = 1000∗180 0.00145 < 0.02 … 𝑖𝑡𝑠 𝑜𝑘𝑒𝑦 𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒𝑓𝑜𝑟𝑒 𝜌 = 0.00145
𝑏𝑤𝑑

 Ac is the area of concrete cross-section (mm2)

𝑁𝑒𝑑
 𝜎𝑐𝑝 = = 0𝑁
𝐴𝑠

 𝑁𝑒𝑑: −𝑖𝑠 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑎𝑥𝑖𝑎𝑙 𝑓𝑜𝑟𝑐𝑒 𝑖𝑛 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑐𝑟𝑜𝑠𝑠 𝑠𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 𝑑𝑢𝑒 𝑡𝑜 𝑙𝑜𝑎𝑑𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑜𝑟 𝑝𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑠𝑖𝑛𝑔 [𝑖𝑛 𝑁](𝑁𝑒𝑑 >
0 𝑓𝑜𝑟 𝑐𝑜𝑝𝑚𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑠𝑖𝑜𝑛). 𝑇ℎ𝑒 𝑖𝑛𝑓𝑙𝑢𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑒 𝑜𝑓 𝑖𝑚𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑑 𝑑𝑒𝑓𝑜𝑟𝑚𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛𝑠 𝑜𝑛 𝑁ï` 𝑚𝑎𝑦 𝑏𝑒 𝑖𝑔𝑛𝑜𝑟𝑒𝑑. 𝐴𝑐
Is the area of concrete cross section [mm2].
0.18 0.18
 𝐶Rd, c = = = 0.12
𝛾𝑐 1.5

 K1=0.15
1
 𝑉Rd, c = [𝐶Rd, c𝐾(100  𝑓ck)3 + 𝑘1cp] 𝑏w𝑑

= [0.12*2(100*0.00145 ∗20)1/3 + 0.15*0] 1000 ∗ 180 =56137.14944N = 56.4KN

 𝑉Rd, c = (𝑉𝑚𝑖𝑛 + 𝐾1𝜎𝐶𝑃)𝑏𝑤𝑑
= (0.4427+ 0.15*0) 1000 ∗ 180 = 79686N = 79.686KN
 Maximum shear acting take 79.68KN
Max Vsd in ground floor slab is 38.00KN
 Thus, VRd,c > Vsd…. 79.68KN > 38.00KN….it is okay the section is adequate for shear.
 For 4th floor slab
The design value for the shear resistance VRd, c is given by:
1
𝑉Rd, c = [𝐶Rd, c𝐾(100  𝑓ck)3 + 𝑘1cp] 𝑏w𝑑

With a minimum of
𝑉Rd, c = (𝑉𝑚𝑖𝑛 + 𝐾1𝜎𝐶𝑃)𝑏𝑤𝑑
Where:
 fck = 20mpa
200 200
 k= 1+ √ ≥ 2.0 = 1 + √180 = 2.054 > 2 … 𝑛𝑜𝑡 𝑜𝑘. 𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒𝑓𝑜𝑟 𝑘 = 2
𝑑

 𝑉𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 0.035 ∗ 𝑘 3⁄2 ∗ 𝑓𝑐𝑘 1⁄2 = 0.4427

 Ast is the area of the tensile reinforcement = 225mm2

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 170

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

 bw is the smallest width of the cross-section in the tensile area (mm) take one meter strip
=1000mm
𝐴𝑠 𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑣𝑖𝑑𝑒𝑑 261.8
 𝜌1 = ≤ 0.02 = 1000∗180 0.00145 < 0.02 … 𝑖𝑡𝑠 𝑜𝑘𝑒𝑦 𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒𝑓𝑜𝑟𝑒 𝜌 = 0.00145
𝑏𝑤𝑑

 Ac is the area of concrete cross-section (mm2)

𝑁𝑒𝑑
 𝜎𝑐𝑝 = = 0𝑁
𝐴𝑠

 𝑁𝑒𝑑: −𝑖𝑠 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑎𝑥𝑖𝑎𝑙 𝑓𝑜𝑟𝑐𝑒 𝑖𝑛 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑐𝑟𝑜𝑠𝑠 𝑠𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 𝑑𝑢𝑒 𝑡𝑜 𝑙𝑜𝑎𝑑𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑜𝑟 𝑝𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑠𝑖𝑛𝑔 [𝑖𝑛 𝑁](𝑁𝑒𝑑 >
0 𝑓𝑜𝑟 𝑐𝑜𝑝𝑚𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑠𝑖𝑜𝑛). 𝑇ℎ𝑒 𝑖𝑛𝑓𝑙𝑢𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑒 𝑜𝑓 𝑖𝑚𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑑 𝑑𝑒𝑓𝑜𝑟𝑚𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛𝑠 𝑜𝑛 𝑁ï` 𝑚𝑎𝑦 𝑏𝑒 𝑖𝑔𝑛𝑜𝑟𝑒𝑑. 𝐴𝑐
Is the area of concrete cross section [mm2].
0.18 0.18
 𝐶Rd, c = = = 0.12
𝛾𝑐 1.5

 K1=0.15
1
 𝑉Rd, c = [𝐶Rd, c𝐾(100  𝑓ck)3 + 𝑘1cp] 𝑏w𝑑

= [0.12*2(100*0.00145 ∗20)1/3 + 0.15*0] 1000 ∗ 180 =56137.14944N = 56.4KN

 𝑉Rd, c = (𝑉𝑚𝑖𝑛 + 𝐾1𝜎𝐶𝑃)𝑏𝑤𝑑
= (0.4427+ 0.15*0) 1000 ∗ 180 = 79686N = 79.686KN
 Maximum shear acting take 79.68KN
Max Vsd in ground floor slab is 37.46KN
 Thus, VRd,c > Vsd…. 79.68KN > 37.46KN….it is okay the section is adequate for shear.
3.11. Laps
 Forces are transmitted from one bar to another by:
 Lapping of bars, with or without bends or hooks;
 Welding;
 Mechanical devices assuring load transfer in tension-compression or in compression
only.
 The detailing of laps between bars shall be such that:
 The transmission of the forces from one bar to the next is assured;
 spalling of the concrete in the neighborhood of the joints does not occur;
 Large cracks which affect the performance of the structure do not occur.
 between bars should normally be staggered and not located in areas of high moments
/forces

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 171

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

 (e.g. plastic hinges).

 at any section should normally be arranged symmetrically.
 Lapping should be fulfill the following criteria as ES-EN 2015.
 Laps between bars should normally be staggered and not located in areas of high
moments/forces.
 At any section should normally be arranged symmetrically.
 The clear distance between lapped bars should not be greater than 4Φ or 50 mm,
otherwise the lap length should be increased by a length equal to the clear space where it
exceeds 4Φ or 50 mm;
 The longitudinal distance between two adjacent laps should not be less than 0,3 times the
lap length, l0;
 In case of adjacent laps, the clear distance between adjacent bars should not be less than
2Φ or 20 mm.

Figure 3.17. Adjacent laps

Lap Length
The design lap length is:
lo= α1 ∗ α2 ∗ α3 ∗ α5 ∗ α6 lb.rqd ≥ lo,min
Where:
lb.rqd is basic anchorage length
lo,min ≥ max {0.3 α6 lb.rqd; 15∅; 200 mm}
Values of α1, α2, α3 and α5 may be taken from table ;
α6 = Values of α6 are given in Table below.

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 172

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Table 3.53. Values of the coefficient α6

Percentage of lapped bars relative to the total cross-section < 25% 30% 50% > 50%
area
α6 1 1.15 1.4 1.5
Note: Intermediate values may be determined by interpolation.

 fbd = 2.25*®1 ∗ ®2 ∗fctd = 2.25*1*1*0.8587 = 1.93MPa

 lb.rqd =(∅/4)(αsd/fbd) = (8/4(434.78/1.93) =450.549
 L0= α1 ∗ α2 ∗ α3 ∗ α5 ∗ α6 lb.rqd ≥ lb.min
= 1*0.7*0.7*0.7*1*450.549 =154.538mm≥ lo,min
 Lo,min ≥ max {0.3 α6 lb,rqd; 15∅; 200 mm}
 lo,min ≥ max {0.3*1∗ 450.549 = 135.165mm; 15∗ 8 =120mm; 200 mm}
Therefore, Take l0 = 200mm
 Anchorage of longitudinal reinforcement for slab(ES EN 1991-1-1:2004 sec 8.4)
Reinforcing bars, wires or welded mesh fabrics shall be so anchored that the bond forces
are safely transmitted to the concrete avoiding longitudinal cracking or spalling. Transverse
reinforcement shall be provided if necessary.

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 173

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 174

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 175

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 176

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 177

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 178

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

CHAPTER FOUR
ANALYSIS AND DESIGN OF STAIRCASE
4.1. Introduction
Stairs are structures, which provide access to different floor levels. They are one of the structural
Elements constructed with steps rising to landing between floors with a serious of steps rising
further from the landing to floor above. For the purpose of easy and comfortable passage over
the different floor levels of the building, there is a staircase provision for the building.
Staircases are mainly of two types; stairs spanning across the flight and stairs spanning along the
flight i.e. transverse staircase and longitudinal staircase.
 Transverse Staircase: are staircases supported at the ends on their shorter sides on walls
or cantilever from beams or walls. This type of stairs span across the flight.
 Longitudinal Staircase: are staircases supported at the start and end of the stair flights.
This type of stairs span along the flight.
Staircase analysis and design is like a one-way slab. It will be singly reinforced and does not
have
Shear reinforcements. The main reinforcement is placed from one support to the other while the
Secondary reinforcement is provided perpendicular to the main reinforcement.
4.2. Analysis of Stair-case
Stair case analysis and design is similar to one way slab analysis and design. It involves the
analysis steps followed for slabs. The inclined configuration is analyzed by projecting the loads
on a horizontal plane.
Design procedure
 Determination of depth for deflection: This is a function of design tensile
strength of steel, effective span length of the shortest span in which more load is
expected to transfer and support condition.
 Loading: This determines the total load in the stair and landing.
 Analysis: determines moment and shear forces based on the analyzed moment.
 Check depth for flexure: this step helps to cross check the design depth as it is safe for
flexure or not, if not revise the depth determined in step 1 and also the loads.

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 179

 B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

 Reinforcement provision: using the computed moments, number and area of

reinforcement bars determined.
 Reinforcement Detailing: The arrangement of reinforcement.

Figure 4.1. Architectural layout of the staircase

4.2.1. Stair geometric data

Figure 4.2. Stair geometry

Floor height = 3.5 m

Height of flight one = 1.75 m
Height of flight two = 1.75 m
Stair width = 1.50 m
Tread width = 30 cm
Number of riser = 11
Height of riser = 1.75/11 = 0.16

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 180

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

4.2.2. Determination of depth for deflection

Similarly, to the floor slabs, the minimum depth of a staircase for deflection requirement is
computed by using the expression:
𝟑⁄
𝑳 𝝆 𝝆 𝟐
= 𝑲 ⌊𝟏𝟏 + 𝟏. 𝟓√𝒇𝒄𝒌 𝝆 + 𝟑. 𝟐√𝒇𝒄𝒌 (𝝆 − 𝟏) ⌋ 𝒊𝒇 𝝆 ≤ 𝝆𝒐 ……………………. Equation 1
𝒅 𝒐 𝒐

𝑳 𝒐 𝝆 𝟏 𝝆
= 𝑲 ⌊𝟏𝟏 + 𝟏. 𝟓√𝒇𝒄𝒌 𝝆−𝝆 ′
+ 𝟏𝟐 √𝒇𝒄𝒌 √𝝆 ⌋ 𝒊𝒇 𝝆 > 𝝆𝒐 …………………………….Equation 2
𝒅 𝒐

Where:
L/d is the limit span/depth
K is the factor to take into account the different structural systems
ρ0 is the reference reinforcement ratio = √fck *10-3
ρ is the required tension reinforcement ratio at mid-span to resist the moment due to the
design loads (at support for cantilevers).
ρ’ is the required compression reinforcement ratio at mid-span to resist the moment due to
design loads (at support for cantilevers)
fck is characteristic strength of concrete in MPa units
Assumption: Slab is lightly reinforced (𝜌 = 0.5 %) i.e. 𝜌 = 5 * 10-2

𝜌𝑜 = √𝑓𝑐𝑘 ∗ 10−3
𝜌𝑜 = √20 ∗ 10−3= 4.5∗ 10−3
Therefore, 𝜌 = 5 * 10-2 > 𝜌𝑜 = √20 ∗ 10−3= 4.5∗ 10−3
Therefore, the requirement for depth calculation is done by using the expression 2 above.
𝐿 𝑜 𝜌 1 𝜌
= 𝐾 ⌊11 + 1.5√𝑓𝑐𝑘 𝜌−𝜌 ′ + 12 √𝑓𝑐𝑘 √𝜌 ⌋
𝑑 𝑜

The staircase is considered as end span slab – End span from Table 7.4N, K=1.3
𝐿 𝑜 𝜌 1 𝜌′
= 1.3 ⌊11 + 1.5√𝑓𝑐𝑘 𝜌−𝜌 ′ + 12 √𝑓𝑐𝑘 √𝜌 ⌋
𝑑 𝑜

0.0045 1 0
= 1.3 ⌊11 + 1.5√20 0.005−0 + 12 √20√0.0045 ⌋=22.15

500
𝑙 /𝑑 = 22.15 because we used S-400 multiply the value by 𝑓 = 1.25
𝑦𝑘

𝑙x /𝑑 = 22.15 *1.25 = 27.69, lx = 3.3m

The effective depth d’ = lx/27.69= 3.3/27.69 * 1000 = 119.18 mm

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 181

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Determination of Concrete cover 25mm similar procedure with the slab concrete cover.
Using 14 diameter of bar and cover 25mm D = 119.25+25+14/2 = 151.18mm take 160mm
d = 160-25-7=128 mm
4.2.3. Load computation on stair
 Material data
 Unit weight of marble = 27KN/m3
 Unit weight of cement screed = 23KN/m3
 Unit weight of concrete = 25KN/m3
 Unit weight of plastering = 23KN/m3
 Design Loads
 Thickness of cement screed = 3 cm
 Thickness of plastering = 2 cm
 Thickness of marble finishing = 3 cm
 Step dead load
 D.L of cement screed = 𝑡𝑐s∗𝛾𝑐s = 0.03∗23 𝐾𝑁/𝑚3 = 0.69 𝐾𝑁/𝑚
 D.L of finishing = 𝑡𝑓𝑖𝑛∗𝛾𝑓𝑖𝑛 = 0.03∗27 𝐾𝑁/𝑚3 = 0.81 𝐾𝑁/𝑚
 D.L of concrete = 0.5*ℎ*𝛾𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑐= 0.5*0.16𝑚*m*25𝐾𝑁𝑚3 = 2𝐾𝑁/𝑚
Therefore the total D.L of the step is:
D.L of the step = 0.69𝐾𝑁/𝑚+ 0.81𝐾𝑁/𝑚+ 2.1𝐾𝑁/𝑚 = 3.5 𝐾𝑁/𝑚
 Riser Dead Load
 D.L of cement screed = 11*0.16*0.03m*23 kN/m/2.7 = 0.45kN/m
 D.L of finishing = 11*0.16*0.03m*27kN/m/2.7=0.53kN/m
Therefore the total D.L of the riser is:
D.L of the riser (16cm) =0.45 𝐾𝑁/𝑚 + 0.53𝐾𝑁/𝑚 = 0.98𝐾𝑁/𝑚
 Waist Dead Load
Degree of inclination,
Ø = tan-1(16/30) =28.07 degree
The inclination length of the waist = 1.75/sin Ø = 3.7 m
D= 160mm
Therefore, the total D.L of the waist is:-

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 182

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

 D.L of concrete = 0.16m*3.7*25kN/m3/2.7m = 5.48kN/m

 D.L of plastering = 0.02*3.7*23kN//m3/2.7m = 0.63KN/m
Therefore the total D.L of the waist is:
D.L of the waist = 5.48𝐾𝑁/𝑚 + 0.63𝐾𝑁.𝑚 = 6.11𝐾𝑁/𝑚
 Landing Dead Load
D.L of cement screed = 𝑡𝑐s∗𝛾𝑐s = 0.03∗23 𝐾𝑁/𝑚3 = 0.69 𝐾𝑁/𝑚
D.L of finishing = 𝑡𝑓𝑖𝑛∗𝛾𝑓𝑖𝑛 = 0.03∗27 𝐾𝑁/𝑚3 = 0.81 𝐾𝑁/𝑚
D.L of concrete = ℎ*𝛾𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑐= 0.16*25𝐾𝑁𝑚3 = 4 𝐾𝑁/𝑚
D.L of plastering = 0.02𝑚∗23 𝐾𝑁/𝑚3 = 0.46 𝐾𝑁/𝑚
Dl of partition (HCB) = 2.88m*0.2m*25KNm/^3= 14.4KN/m
Therefore the total D.L of the landing is:
D.L of the landing = 0.69𝐾𝑁/𝑚 + 0.81𝐾𝑁/𝑚 + 4KN/m + 0.46+14.4KN/m= 19.9𝐾𝑁/𝑚
Total Dead load and design load
 For the inclined slab
Total Dead Load = D.L of step + D.L of riser + D.L of waist
= 3.5 𝐾𝑁/𝑚+ 0.98 𝐾𝑁/𝑚+ 6.11 𝐾𝑁/𝑚 = 10.59𝐾𝑁/𝑚
Live load = 3𝐾𝑁/𝑚2∗1.5𝑚 = 4.5𝐾𝑁/𝑚
Design load (Pd) = 1.35 𝐷𝐿 + 1.5 𝐿𝐿
= 1.35(10.59) KN/𝑚 + 1.5∗4.5𝐾𝑁/𝑚
= 20.52 𝐾𝑁/𝑚
 For the landing
Total Dead Load = 19.9𝐾𝑁/𝑚
Live load = 3𝐾𝑁/𝑚2∗1.5𝑚 = 4.5𝐾𝑁/𝑚
Design load(Pd) = 1.35 𝐷𝐿 + 1.5 𝐿𝐿
= 1.35∗19.9 𝐾𝑁/𝑚+ 1.5∗4.5 𝐾𝑁/𝑚
= 33.62 𝐾𝑁/𝑚

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 183

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

4.2.4. Moment analysis

The analysis of this staircase is done by using ETABS software.

Figure 4.3. Load on the staircase

`

Figure 4.4 deformed shape of the stair

Figure 4.5. Shear force diagram for the staircase

Figure 4.6. Bending moment diagram for the staircase

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 184

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Design Shear = 50.43KN

Design Moment = 37.82KN/m
4.3. Checking of depth for flexure for staircase
Maximum moment from all floor stair case is 37.82 and take d=128
𝑀𝑠𝑑 37.82∗106
i. 𝜇𝑠𝑑 = (𝑑2 ∗𝑏∗𝑓𝑐𝑑 ) = ( 1282 ∗1000∗11.33) = 0.115

𝑚𝑎𝑥 𝑀 37.82∗106
ii. 𝑑 ≥ (√(𝜇𝑠𝑑∗𝑓𝑐𝑑∗𝑏) ) = √(0.115∗20∗1000) = 118.23mm < 128mm

Therefore, depth of 160mm satisfy flexural requirement for all floors.

4.4. Staircase Reinforcement
Width = 1.5m, depth =128mm
b = 1000mm
D= 160mm
fcd = 11.33MPa
fctm = 2.2MPa (Mean value of axial tensile strength of concret)
fyd = 347.83MPa
𝑀𝑠𝑑 37.82∗106
𝜇𝑠𝑑 = ( )=( ) = 0.115 < 0.295 = µmax
𝑑2 ∗𝑏∗𝑓𝑐𝑑 1282 ∗1000∗11.33

Therefore, the stair is designed as single reinforcement.

0.25−𝜇𝑠𝑑
𝑍 = (𝑑 (0.5 + √ ))
1.134

0.25−0,115
= (128 (0.5 + √ )) = 108.17
1.134

𝑀𝑠𝑑 37.82∗106
𝐴𝑠 = (0.87∗𝑓𝑦𝑑∗𝑍) = (0.87∗347.83∗108.17) = 𝟏𝟏𝟓𝟓. 𝟑𝟖𝒎𝒎𝟐

Consider ∅14 for main reinforcement of the staircase

𝜋∗∅2 3.14∗142
𝑎𝑠 = ( )=( ) = 𝟏𝟓𝟒𝒎𝒎
4 4
𝑎𝑠∗𝑏 154∗1000
𝑠𝑝𝑎𝑐𝑖𝑛𝑔 = ( )=( ) = 133.28𝑚𝑚
𝐴𝑠 1155.38

Spacing for the distribution bars,

3.5𝑑 = 3.5 ∗ 128 = 448𝑚𝑚
𝑆𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑣𝑖𝑑𝑒 = { 450𝑚𝑚 }
𝑠𝑝𝑎𝑐𝑖𝑛𝑔 = 133.28

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 185

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Therefore, Provide, Ø 14 C/C 130mm for staircase

Let us check the minimum reinforcement recommendation as per ES EN 1992 – 2015
Principal reinforcement
𝐹𝑐𝑡𝑚
0.26 ( 𝑓𝑦𝑘 ) 𝑏𝑑 > 𝐴𝑠𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 0.04𝑏𝑑
𝐴𝑠𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 𝑀𝑎𝑥 { }
0.00013𝑏𝑑
2.2
0.26 (400) 1000 ∗ 128 = 183,04𝑚𝑚2
= 𝑀𝑎𝑥 { }
2
0.00013 ∗ 1000 ∗ 128 = 16.64𝑚𝑚
Asmin = 183.04mm2 < 1155.38mm2 …okay!
AsMax = 0.04bd = 0.04*1000*128 = 5120mm2 > 1155.38mm2…okay!
The spacing of the bars shouldn’t exceed Smax. Recommended value in ES EN 1992-2015,
For principal reinforcement, 3h = 480mm
For secondary reinforcement, 3.5h = 560mm

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 186

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 187

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

CHAPTER FIVE
FRAME ANALAYSIS
5.1. Introduction
Over many years, engineers have observed that some structural systems perform better in
earthquakes than others. Based on these observations, different provisions recognizes six
categories of structural system:

 Bearing Wall Systems

 Building frame systems

 Moment resisting frame systems

 Dual systems

 Core systems

 Inverted Pendulum System

In bearing wall systems, structural walls located throughout the structure provide the primary
vertical support for the building’s weight and that of its content as well as the building’s lateral
resistance.
Moment resisting frame systems are commonly used for both structural steel and reinforced
concrete construction. In this form of construction, the horizontal beams and vertical columns
provide both support for the structure’s weight and the strength and stiffness needed to resist
lateral forces. Frame structures are usually used to overcome the large moments developing due
to the applied loading.
In frame analysis concept, all frames shall have adequate resistance to failure in sway mode.
However, where frame is shown to be a non-sway frame, no further sway mode verification is
required. Therefore, frame is known to be a non-sway frame or sway frame by computing the
inter-story drift sensitivity coefficient, θ.
Structural Types and Behavior Factor
According to ES EN-8 section 3.2.2.5(3), the behaviour factor q is an approximation of the ratio
of the seismic forces that the structure would experience if its response was completely elastic
with 5% viscous damping, to the seismic forces that may be used in the design, with a
[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 188
B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

conventional elastic analysis model, still ensuring a satisfactory response of the structure. The
values of the behaviour factor q, which also account for the influence of the viscous damping
being different from 5%, are given for various materials and structural systems according to the
relevant ductility classes in the various parts of ES EN 8. The value of the behaviour factor q
may be different in different horizontal directions of the structure, although the ductility
classification shall be the same in all directions.
As per ES EN-8 section 5.2.2.2(1), The upper limit value of the behaviour factor q, introduced in
section 3.2.2.5(3) of ES EN-8 to account for energy dissipation capacity, shall be derived for
each design direction as:
𝐪 = 𝐪𝐨 × 𝐊 𝐰 ≥ 𝟏. 𝟓.
Where; qo - is the basic value of the behaviour factor, dependent on the type of the structural
system and on its regularity in elevation see Table 5.1 ES EN-8 and kw - is the factor reflecting
the prevailing failure mode in structural systems with walls which is taken as for frame systems
1.0 as per ES EN-8 section 5.2.2.2(11).
Table:
Table 5.1. Value of behaviour factor, qo for systems regular in elevation (ES EN-8 Table 5.1)
Structural Type DCM DCH
Frame system, dual system, 3.0αu/α1 4.5αu/α1
coupled wall system
Uncoupled wall system 3.0 4.0αu/α1
Torsionally flexible system 2.0 3.0

Figure5.1. Structural types of moment resisting frames (ES EN-8)

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 189
B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Inverted pendulum system 2.0 1.5

In this case, the reinforced concrete building is classified as frame system in which both the
vertical and lateral loads are mainly resisted by spatial frames whose shear resistance at the
building base exceeds 65% of the total shear resistance of the whole structural system. Since, for
structural type of frame system as per ES EN-8 section 5.2.2.2(5) the multiplication factor αu/α1
has not been evaluated through an explicit calculation, for buildings which are regular in plan the
values of αu/α1 is taken as 1.3, see figure-6.1 of ES EN-8 and
𝐪𝐨 = 3*1.3 = 3.9.
5.2. Method of analysis
According to ES EN-8 section 4.3.3, depending on the structural characteristics of the building
one of the following two types of linear-elastic analysis may be used:
i. The “lateral force method of analysis”
ii. For buildings meeting the conditions given in 4.3.3.2; (the “modal response spectrum
analysis", which is applicable to all types of buildings, see ES EN-8 section 4.3.3.3).
5.2.1. Criteria for structural regularity
For the purpose of seismic design, building structures are categorized into being regular or
nonregular. Regularity of the structure in elevation and in plan influences the required structural
model, method of analysis and value of the behavior factor q. Criteria describing regularity in
plan and in elevation are given as per ES EN-8 in section 4.2.3.2 and 4.2.3.3, respectively. The
structure can be categorized as being regular or irregular in elevation and in plan.
5.2.1.1. Criteria for Regularity in Plan
In general, the regularity in plan can be checked when the structural model is defined. The
criteria for regularity in plan are described in ES EN-8 Section 4.2.3.2. Irregularity in plan may
influence the magnitude of the seismic action over strength factor. The reference value of the
basic behavior factor can be used according to ES EN-8 Table 4.1. For the building to be
regular in plan the following requirements should be fulfilled.
Lmax
 The slenderness of the building λ shall be not higher than 4, such that λ = ⁄L
min

 The structural eccentricity shall be smaller than 30% of the torsional radius, which is
calculated using: eox ≤ 0.30rx andeoy ≤ 0.30ry .
 The torsional radius shall be larger than the radius of the gyration of the floor mass in
plan rx ≥ ls and ry ≥ ls .

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 190

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Slenderness Check for Regularity:

The slenderness of the building is tested for all floors and the results can be seen as follows in
Table 54 for each structural alternative. The slenderness of the building λ shall be not higher than
Lmax
4, such that λ = ⁄L .
min

Table 5.2. Slenderness Check for Regularity

Story Lmax Lmin λ Status
RF-2 8.29 5.2 1.59 Ok!
RF-1 21.21 12.15 1.74 Ok!
4rth 21.21 12.15 1.74 Ok!
3rd 21.21 12.15 1.74 Ok!
2nd 21.21 12.15 1.74 Ok!
1st 21.21 12.15 1.74 Ok!
Ground 21.21 12.15 1.74 Ok!
Basement 21.21 12.15 1.74 Ok!

 From the result shown in table the building satisfies regularity condition for slenderness
ratio.
Eccentricity and Torsional Radius Check for Regularity:
The structural eccentricity shall be smaller than 30% of the torsional radius, which is calculated
using: eox ≤ 0.30rx and eoy ≤ 0.30ry . The eccentricity eox and eoy is the difference between the
center of mass and center of rigidity while the torsional radius rx and ry is defined as the square
root of the ratio of the torsional stiffness (KM) to the lateral stiffness in one direction KFY and
K K
KFX, where rx,i = √K M,i and ry,i = √K M,i .
FY,i FX,i

Table 5.3. Center of mass and center of rigidity and eccentricity of each floor
XCM YCM XCR YCR eox eoy
Story
m m m m m m
basement 5.0242 10.6579 4.7114 13.2917 0.3128 -2.6338
ground
5.7528 10.7259 3.8491 12.8377
floor 1.9037 -2.1118
1st floor 6.3155 10.2469 1.7118 13.3818 4.6037 -3.1349
2nd floor 5.829 10.4962 1.6537 13.0955 4.1753 -2.5993
3rd floor 5.8477 10.5252 1.801 12.9815 4.0467 -2.4563
4th floor 6.1353 10.5915 1.9902 12.8472 4.1451 -2.2557

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 191

 B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

roof level 5.9287 10.4849 2.1695 12.6436 3.7592 -2.1587

tanker
3.465 12.3405 3.2977 12.3668
level 0.1673 -0.0263

Table 5.4. Torsional stiffness to the lateral stiffness and torsional radius of each floor
Story UX UY RZ KFX KFY KMZ rx ry
m m rad kN/m kN/m kNm/rad m m
basement 0.198 0.032 4.00E-06 5050505 3.1E+07 2.5E+11 89.4427 222.486
ground 0.433 0.078 8.00E-06 2309469 1.3E+07 1.3E+11 98.7421 232.648
1st floor 7.369 4.783 0.00045 135704 209074 2.2E+09 103.442 128.396
2nd floor 17.757 10.104 0.00099 56315.8 98970.7 1E+09 100.872 133.724
3rd floor 27.581 9.373 0.00161 36256.8 106689 6.2E+08 76.253 130.804
4th floor 40.747 20.038 0.0021 24541.7 49905.2 4.8E+08 97.7525 139.395
roof level 46.732 22.067 0.00231 21398.6 45316.5 4.3E+08 97.7385 142.233
tanker l 22.402 3.321 0.002476 44638.9 301114 4E+08 36.6234 95.1192

At each level and for each direction of analysis x and y, the structural eccentricity eo and the
torsional radius r shall be in accordance with the two conditions below, which are
expressed for the direction of analysis y:
eox≤0.3.rx
rx ≥ ls
where:
eox is the distance between the centre of stiffness and the centre of mass, measured along
the x direction, which is normal to the direction of analysis considered;
rx is the square root of the ratio of the torsional stiffness to the lateral stiffness in the y direction
(“torsional radius”); and
ls is the radius of gyration of the floor mass in plan (square root of the ratio of (a) the
polar moment of inertia of the floor mass in plan with respect to the centre of mass of the floor
to (b)
the floor mass).

Table 5.5. Eccentricity and Torsional Radius Check

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 192

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

0.3*rx 0.3*ry
Story eox (m) eoy (m) rx (m) ry (m) Status
(m) (m)
basement 0.313 -2.634 89.443 222.486 26.833 66.746 Ok!
ground 1.904 -2.1118 98.7421 232.648 29.623 69.794 Ok!
1st floor 4.604 -3.1349 103.442 128.396 31.033 38.519 Ok!
2nd floor 4.175 -2.5993 100.872 133.724 30.262 40.117 Ok!
3rd floor 4.047 -2.4563 76.253 130.804 22.876 39.241 Ok!
4th floor 4.145 -2.2557 97.7525 139.395 29.326 41.819 Ok!
roof level 3.759 -2.1587 97.7385 142.233 29.322 42.670 Ok!
tanker l 0.167 -0.0263 36.6234 95.1192 10.987 28.536 Ok!

 From table the result shows the building satisfies regularity condition for eccentricity and
torsional radius.
Therefore, the test result shows the requirement is fulfilled according to recommendation of ES
EN-8 section 4.2.3.2 for all stories and the overall buildings are regarded as regular in plan.
5.2.1.2. Criteria for Regularity in Elevation
For a building to be categorized as being regular in elevation, it shall satisfy all the conditions
Listed in the following paragraphs.
 All lateral force resisting system should run from their foundation to the top without
interruption. Except the basement wall all walls and columns runs to the top.
 Both lateral stiffness and mass of individual of stories shall remain constant or reduce
gradually.

Stiffness Regularity Check:

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 193

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Table 5.6. Stiffness regularity check in EQ+X direction

Story Ki check Ki check

Kmi = avg(Ki-1,i-2,i-3)
Stiffness X1 Ki+1 Kmi
0.7 0.8

tanker 26420.05 - -
level
roof level 120373.69 4.56 Regular

4th floor 177423.73 1.47 Regular

3rd floor 235981.21 1.33 Regular 108072.49

2nd floor 383958.85 1.63 Regular 177926.21 2.16 Regular

1st floor 576236.17 1.50 Regular 265787.93 2.17 Regular

ground 9483957.76 16.46 Regular 398725.41 23.79 Regular

floor
basement 10989908.04 1.16 Regular 3481384.26 3.16 Regular

Table 5.7. Stiffness regularity check in EQ-X direction

Story Ki check Ki check
Kmi = avg(Ki-1,i-2,i-3)

Stiffness X 2 Ki+1 Kmi

0.7 0.8

tanker 26420.05 - -
level
roof level 120373.69 4.56 Regular

4th floor 177423.73 1.47 Regular

3rd floor 235981.21 1.33 Regular 108072.49

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 194

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

2nd floor 383958.85 1.63 Regular 177926.21 2.16 Regular

1st floor 576236.17 1.50 Regular 265787.93 2.17 Regular

ground 9483957.76 16.46 Regular 398725.41 23.79 Regular

floor
basement 10989908.04 1.16 Regular 3481384.26 3.16 Regular

Table 5.8. Stiffness regularity check in EQ+Y direction

Story Ki check Ki check

Kmi = avg(Ki-1,i-2,i-3)
Stiffness Y 1 Ki+1 Kmi

0.7 0.8

tanker 21337.58 - -
level
roof level 120516.58 5.65

4th floor 154486.84 1.28 Regular

3rd floor 201220.69 1.30 Regular 98780.33

2nd floor 230742.48 1.15 Regular 158741.37 1.45 Regular

1st floor 395670.45 1.71 Regular 195483.34 2.02 Regular

ground 24703353.89 62.43 Regular 275877.88 89.54 Regular

floor
basement 33499922.24 1.36 Regular 8443255.61 3.97 Regular

Table 5.9. Stiffness regularity check in EQ-Y direction

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 195

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Story Ki check Ki check

Kmi = avg(Ki-1,i-2,i-3)
Stiffness Y 2 Ki+1 Kmi

0.7 0.8

tanker 21337.58 - -
level
roof level 120516.58 5.65

4th floor 154486.84 1.28 Regular

3rd floor 201220.69 1.30 Regular 98780.33

2nd floor 230742.48 1.15 Regular 158741.37 1.45 Regular

1st floor 395670.45 1.71 Regular 195483.34 2.02 Regular

ground 24703353.89 62.43 Regular 275877.88 89.54 Regular

floor
basement 33499922.24 1.36 Regular 8443255.61 3.97 Regular

 From table the result shows the building is satisfies stiffness regularity condition for all
story.
Mass Regularity Check:
Mass irregularity shall be considered as the effective mass of each story should be 50%biger than
effective mass of the below story.
Table 5.10. Mass Regularity Check
Story Mass X Mi Check Mi Check
Mi+1 Mi-1
basement 226616.11 - - 0.48 Regular
ground floor 473375.15 2.09 Irregular 0.98 Regular
1st floor 482883.98 1.02 Regular 1.85 Irregular
2nd floor 260897.26 0.54 Regular 1.03 Regular

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 196

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

3rd floor 254275.45 0.97 Regular 1.00 Regular

4th floor 255334.02 1.00 Regular 2.74 Irregular
roof level 93159.32 0.36 Regular 4.83 Irregular
tanker level 19303.70 0.21 Irregular 0.03 Regular

 From table the result shows the building is not satisfying mass regularity condition for
some storey.
Therefore, the test result shows the requirement is not fulfilled according to recommendation of
ES EN-8 section 4.2.3.3 for some storey and the overall buildings regarded as irregular in
Elevation.
Table 5.11. Consequences of Structural Regularity on Seismic Analysis and Design
Regularity Allowed Simplification Behaviour Factor
Plan Elevation Model Linear-elastic Analysis (For linear Analysis)
Yes Yes Planar Lateral forcea Reference value
Yes No Planar Modal Decreased value
b a
No Yes Spatial Lateral force Reference value
No No Spatial Modal Decreased value

Therefore, modal response spectrum analysis is performed independently for the ground
excitation in two horizontal directions. According to section 4.3.3.3.1(3) the sum of the effective
modal masses for the modes taken into account to at least 90% of the total mass of the structure.
The accidental torsional effects are taken into account by means of accidental eccentricity which
is ei = ±0.05 × Li in both directions ES EN-8 section 4.3.2(1). The Complete Quadratic
Combination rule for the combination of different modes is used as per ES EN-8 section
4.3.3.3.2(3).
Modal analysis uses the mass and stiffness of a structure to find the various periods at which it
will naturally resonate.
According to the code, the target ratio we need is at least 90% of modal participating mass ratio.
Table 5.12. Modal participating mass ratio
Period Sum Sum Sum Sum Sum
Case Mode
(Sec) UX UY RX RY RZ
5.37E- 2.94E-
Modal 1 1.452 0.2022 0.1239 0.3869
02 02

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 197

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Modal 2 0.703 0.4286 0.3628 0.243 0.3693 0.3881

Modal 3 0.542 0.5111 0.5501 0.4645 0.4744 0.6206
Modal 4 0.458 0.5654 0.6058 0.4887 0.4759 0.6381
Modal 5 0.286 0.5685 0.632 0.4918 0.4783 0.6557
Modal 6 0.265 0.5697 0.6439 0.4994 0.4785 0.6721
Modal 7 0.257 0.6121 0.645 0.4994 0.489 0.6735
Modal 8 0.22 0.622 0.6455 0.5001 0.4952 0.6744
Modal 9 0.189 0.6538 0.6737 0.5251 0.5038 0.678
Modal 10 0.184 0.7367 0.6986 0.5389 0.5577 0.6827
Modal 11 0.159 0.7367 0.7026 0.5422 0.5583 0.6861
Modal 12 0.14 0.7993 0.747 0.5776 0.6006 0.7434
Modal 13 0.093 0.8318 0.7669 0.5944 0.6454 0.7451
Modal 14 0.071 0.8864 0.7766 0.6039 0.7294 0.7535
Modal 15 0.06 0.9023 0.7912 0.6242 0.7644 0.7595
Modal 16 0.051 0.9664 0.7988 0.6359 0.9012 0.7726
Modal 17 0.046 0.967 0.8207 0.6683 0.9025 0.7726
Modal 18 0.041 0.9677 0.832 0.6856 0.9046 0.8504
Modal 19 0.036 0.9816 0.8991 0.7948 0.9347 0.8782
Modal 20 0.033 0.9827 0.9449 0.8719 0.9372 0.8982
Modal 21 0.029 0.9875 0.9876 0.9471 0.9486 0.9856
Modal 22 0.016 0.9897 0.9881 0.9484 0.9571 0.9896
Modal 23 0.013 0.9998 0.9882 0.9485 0.9993 0.9904
Modal 24 0.01 0.9999 0.9999 0.999 0.9996 0.9909

5.3. Safety Verifications

According to ES EN-8, section 4.4.1(1), “For the safety verifications the relevant limit states in
section 4.4.2 and 4.4.3, and specific measures in section 2.2.4 shall be considered”.
The no-collapse requirement (ultimate limit state) under the seismic design situation is
considered to have been met if the following conditions regarding resistance, ductility,
equilibrium, foundation stability and seismic joints are met.
5.3.1. Resistance Condition
In structures important for civil protection the structural system shall be verified to ensure that it
has sufficient resistance and stiffness to maintain the function of the vital services in the facilities
for a seismic event associated with an appropriate return period, ES EN-8 section 2.2.3(2).
The criteria for taking into account the second order effect is based on the inter sorey drift
sensitivity coefficient θ, which is defined with equation of ES EN-8 section 4.4.2.2(2):

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 198

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

dr
θ = Ptot ∗
(Vtot ∗ h)
where; θ is the interstorey drift sensitivity coefficient: Ptot is the total gravity load at and above
the storey considered in the seismic design situation: dr is the design interstorey drift, evaluated
as the difference of the average lateral displacements ds at the top and bottom of the storey under
consideration and calculated in accordance with section 4.3.4 of ES EN-8, Vtot is the total
seismic storey shear; and h is the interstorey height.
As per ES EN-8 section 4.4.2.2(2), second-order effects or P-∆ effects need not be taken into
account if 𝛉 ≤ 𝟎. 𝟏𝟎.
P-∆ effect refers to the abrupt changes in ground shear, overturning moment and the axial force
distribution at the base of a sufficiently tall structure of structural component when it is subjected
to a critical lateral distribution.
Table 5.13. Stability Index Check in X-direction
Story Load Case P (kN) Vx (kN) (drx/h)*q θx Status Check
tanker
Envelope Max 620.77 64.44 0.00394 0.01 No P-Δ effects
level
roof level Envelope Max 3397.18 322.27 0.00356 0.01 No P-Δ effects
4th floor Envelope Max 8272.60 723.47 0.00385 0.01 No P-Δ effects
3rd floor Envelope Max 12726.70 1025.23 0.00437 0.02 No P-Δ effects
2nd floor Envelope Max 17478.06 1275.05 0.00438 0.02 No P-Δ effects
1st floor Envelope Max 22229.54 1453.02 0.00341 0.02 No P-Δ effects
ground
Envelope Max 27184.84 1557.29 0.00173 0.01 No P-Δ effects
floor
basement Envelope Max 29340.62 1583.21 0.00073 0.00 No P-Δ effects

Table 5.14. Stability Index Check in Y-direction

Story Load Case P (kN) Vy (kN) (dry/h)*q θy Status Check
tanker
Envelope Max 620.77 31.18 0.00563 0.04 No P-Δ effects
level
roof level Envelope Max 3397.18 155.95 0.00395 0.03 No P-Δ effects
4th floor Envelope Max 8272.60 350.09 0.00402 0.03 No P-Δ effects
3rd floor Envelope Max 12726.70 496.12 0.00413 0.04 No P-Δ effects
2nd floor Envelope Max 17478.06 617.01 0.00412 0.04 No P-Δ effects
1st floor Envelope Max 22229.54 703.13 0.0038 0.04 No P-Δ effects
ground
Envelope Max 27184.84 753.59 0.00287 0.03 No P-Δ effects
floor
basement Envelope Max 29340.62 766.13 0.00093 0.01 No P-Δ effects

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 199

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

 There is no need to consider P-∆ effects for both directions.

The consideration of P-∆ effects based on the consequence value of the interstorey drift
sensitivity coefficient θ is summarized in the Table below.
Table 5.15. Consideration of P-∆ effects Analysis Based on Values of θ
θ ≤ 0.1 No need to consider P-∆ effects
0.1 ≤ θ ≤ 0.2 P-∆ effects may approximately be taken into account by
multiplying the relevant seismic action effects by a factor equal to
1/(1 – θ)
0.2 ≤ θ ≤ 0.3 P-∆ effects must be accounted for by analysis including second
order effects explicitly
θ ≥ 0.3 Not permitted

5.4. Lateral Loads

There are many types of lateral loads, which can act on buildings, from which earthquake and
wind lads are the major ones in the analysis of high-rise buildings. The resistance of tall
buildings to earthquake as well as to wind is the main determinant in the formulation of new
structural systems that evolve by the continuous efforts of structural engineers to increase
building height while keeping the requirement within acceptable limits and minimizing the
amount of materials. In our case the exact location of the building in DILLA, which is seismic
zone area then seismic actions, are considered or governed for the analysis of the lateral
loads.
In seismic regions, the aspect of seismic hazard shall be taken into account in the early stages of
the conceptual design of a building, thus enabling the achievement of a structural system, which,
within acceptable costs, satisfies the fundamental requirements specified in the guiding
principles governing this conceptual design are:
 Structural simplicity;
 Uniformity, symmetry and redundancy;
 Bi-directional resistance and stiffness;
 Torsional resistance and stiffness;
 Diaphragmatic behavior at store level;
 Adequate foundation.

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 200

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

5.4.1. Earthquake Analysis

There are different methods to analyze earthquake. Some of the methods include:
1) Static equilibrium method
2) Dynamic analysis-Response history analysis (RHA) or (THA)
3) Response spectrum analysis (RSA)
In every building, the earth quake and wind load effect should be considered as a part of load in
order to build a structure that can safely transfer the loads to the foundation and finally to the
ground and absorb some of the energy present rather than suffering damage. The objective of
seismic design in accordance with ES EN 1998-1:2015 is explicitly stated. Its purpose is to
ensure that in the event of earthquakes For Human lives are protected, Damage is limited and
Structures important for civil protection remain operational. Since our structure is “regular
structure” means, we assume that our building has uniform distribution of mass and stiffness;
therefore, we we used static equilibrium method or Lateral force method of analysis.
The exact location of the building is categorized as a seismic zone-III. For building the design
elastic response spectrum reduced by the behavior factor q is used. Determination of behavior
factor q, which depends on the type of structural system, regularity in elevation and plan, and
ductility class, is described later in this section.
The seismic action of the design of building is represented by the elastic response spectrum,
Type 1 (Assuming Ms > 5.5 for soil class C) as per ES EN-8 section 3.2.2.2 (2). Reference peak
ground acceleration is 0.1g for DILLA , Ethiopia and since the building is categorized as

Importance class II with importance factor

 I  1.0 , the design ground acceleration is ag = 1.0 x

0.1g = 0.1g. With the design ground acceleration ag = 1.0g, the provisions of low seismicity do
not apply and the building is designed to meet the requirements of either of the two ductility
class. Considering the more rigorous detailing requirements associated with ductility class high
DCH that are more difficult to implement, then medium ductility class DCM is chosen for
seismic design of the building. The elastic response spectrum is defined for 5% damping.
According to ES EN-8, there are five typical ground types such as A, B, C, D, E and 2 special
ground types such as S1 and S2 that may be used to account for the influence of local.

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 201

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

The average shear wave velocity Vs, 30 in the top 30m from the surface is computed according
30
with the equation given in ES EN-8 section 3.1.2 (3): vs,30 = h .
∑i=1,N i
vi

Where, hi and vi denote the thickness (in meters) and the shear wave velocity (at a shear strain
level of 10-5 or less) for the ith formation or layer, in a total of N. The site should be classified
according to the value of the average shear wave velocity, vs,30, if this is available. Otherwise the
value of NSPT should be used ES EN-8 3.1.2 (2).
If this number is not available either, the undrained cohesion “Cu” can be used. The description
of each ground type, and the definition of parameters is presents in table below.
Table 5.16. Seismic parameters for the different ground types (ES EN-8, Table 3.1)
Parameters
Ground Description of stratigraphic profile Vs,30 NSPT Cu
Types (m/s) (blows/30cm) (kpa)
A Rock or other rock-like geological >800 _ _
formation, including at most 5 m of weaker
material at the surface.
B Deposits of very dense sand, gravel, or very 360-800 >50 >250
stiff clay, at least several tens of meters’ in
thickness, characterized by a gradual
increase of mechanical properties of depth.
C Deep deposits of dense or medium-dense 180-360 15-50 70-
sand, gravel or stiff clay with thickness from 250
several tens to many hundreds of meters.
D Deposits of loose-to-medium cohesionless <180 <15 <70
soil (with or without some soft cohesive
layers), or of predominantly soft-to-firm
cohesive soil.
E A soil profile consisting of a surface
alluvium layer with vs values of type C or D
and thickness varying between about 5 m
and 20 m, underlain by stiffer material with

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 202

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

vs > 800 m/s.

S1 Deposits consisting, or containing a layer at <100 _ 10-20
least 10 m thick, of soft clays/silts with a (indicati
high plasticity index (PI > 40) and high ve)
water content
S2 Deposits of liquefiable soils, of sensitive
clays, or any other soil profile not included
in types A–E or S1
Ground type that best suited to the geology of Bole Sub-city is considered as soil C; so this type
of ground is taken into account when modeling the structures. The elastic response spectrum
shape is defined in figure below.

Figure 5.2. Shape of the Elastic Response Spectrum (ES EN-8, Figure 3.1)
Where, TB is the lower limit of the period of the constant spectral acceleration branch; TC is the
upper limit of the period of the constant spectral acceleration branch; TD is the value defining the
beginning of the constant displacement response range of the spectrum and S is the soil factor.
The parameters that define the shape of the spectrum depend on the ground type and can be
obtained in table 3.8 and table 3.9 below.
Table 5.17. Parameters of the Elastic Response Spectrum Type 1 (ES EN-8, Table 3.2)
Ground Type S TB(s) TC(s) TD(s)
A 1.0 0.05 0.25 1.2
B 1.35 0.05 0.25 1.2
C 1.5 0.10 0.25 1.2

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 203

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

D 1.8 0.10 0.30 1.2

E 1.6 0.05 0.25 1.2

Table 5.18. Parameters of the Elastic Response Spectrum Type 2 (ES EN-8, Table 3.3)
Ground Type S TB(s) TC(s) TD(s)
A 1.0 0.15 0.4 2.0
B 1.2 0.15 0.5 2.0
C 1.15 0.20 0.6 2.0
D 1.35 0.20 0.8 2.0
E 1.4 0.15 0.5 2.0
According to the parameters stated in table and, figure and figure represent the elastic response
spectrums defined by Ethiopian Standard-8 for each ground type.

Figure 5.3. Elastic Response Spectrum Type 1 for Damping 5% (ES EN-8, Figure 3.2)

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 204

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Figure 5.4. Elastic Response Spectrum Type 2 for Damping 5% (ES EN-8, Figure 3.3)
In the calculations, only the horizontal displacement due to earthquake was taken into account.
Combination of Actions
A combination of actions shall consist of a set of compatible actions which shall be considered as
acting simultaneously for a specific check. Each combination will usually comprise permanent
actions, one determinant variable action and one or more concomitant variable actions. Any of
the variable actions may be the determinant action. The combinations are depending on the limit
states. For Ultimate limit states (ULS) and serviceability limit states (SLS) the combinations may
vary by introducing different coefficients. The representative value of an action is the value used
to check its limit states. One action may have one or more representative values, depending on its
type. Some basic loads assigned in ETABS models are:
1) DL = dead loads
2) LL = live loads
3) EQXT = earthquake loads on the top side of X-direction.
4) EQXB = earthquake loads on the bottom side of X-direction.
5) EQYL = earthquake loads on the left side of Y-direction.
6) EQYR = earthquake loads on the right side of Y-direction.

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 205

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Figure 5.5. Location of Seismic Loads on the Building

Dead load on the building
Table 5.19. Self-weight of the building
Story Element Type Total Weight(KN)
tanker level Column 28.8
tanker level Beam 33.945
tanker level Floor 185.0839
roof level Column 183.375
roof level Beam 214.1925
roof level Wall 41.7656
roof level Wall 97.5
roof level Floor 1264.5007
4th floor Column 220.5
4th floor Beam 311.2813
4th floor Wall 43.2094
4th floor Wall 113.75
4th floor Floor 1269.3013
3rd floor Column 229.6875
3rd floor Beam 300.3328
3rd floor Wall 43.2094
3rd floor Wall 113.75

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 206

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

3rd floor Floor 1226.2426

2nd floor Column 246.75
2nd floor Beam 307.2578
2nd floor Wall 43.2094
2nd floor Wall 113.75
2nd floor Floor 1204.0716
1st floor Column 276.9375
1st floor Beam 303.1516
1st floor Wall 43.2094
1st floor Wall 113.75
1st floor Floor 1204.0716
ground floor Column 213.75
ground floor Beam 274.8844
ground floor Wall 40.5198
ground floor Wall 695.5
ground floor Floor 1070.2218
basement Column 232.875
basement Beam 268.8719
basement Wall 751.14
SUM Column 1632.675
SUM Beam 2013.9172
SUM Wall 255.123
SUM Wall 1999.14
SUM Floor 7423.4936
TOTAL ALL 13324.3488
Therefore, total weight of the building is 13324.3488KN.

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 207

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

5.20. Live load on structure

Live load on structure
Live Live load
Floor purpose Area (m2)
load(KN/m2) (KN)
shop 141.78 5 708.9
corridor 43.9 4 175.6
Ground floor
stair 14.85 3 44.55
toilet 5.7 2 11.34
Total 940.39
shop 151.89 5 759.45
corridor 43.9 4 175.6
1st and 2nd floor
stair 14.85 3 44.55
toilet 5.7 2 11.34
Total 1982
Café and ristorante 124.83 3 379.49
corridor 24.69 4 98.76
store 15.52 5 77.6
Third floor
stair 14.85 3 44.55
kitchen 25.3 2 50.6
Toilet 5.7 2 11.54
Total 657.54
bed room 140.13 2 280.24
balcony 13.35 4 53.4
Fourth floor stair 14.85 3 187.9
Toilet 33.88 2 67.77
corridor 46.97 4 44.55
Total 633.86
Roof floor roof 296.43 1 296.43
Total 296.43

Total live load on structure 4510.22

Base Shear Force

The seismic base shear Fb for each main direction is determined from:
Fb=Sd (T1) W
Where
Sd (T1) is the ordinate of design spectrum at period T1

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 208

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

T1 is the fundamental period of vibration of structure for translational motion in the direction
considered,
W is the seismic dead load and determined from
W= Gk +ψ*Qk
Where Gk= the characteristic dead load
Qk= the characteristic live load
ψ=Live load incidence factor
Table 5.21. Live load incidence factor, ψ
Types of structures ψ

Public dwellings, hotels, offices, hospitals, public 0.25

building, dormitories

Storage and ware houses 0.50

Silos and tanks for liquids 1.00

The building is regular both in elevation as well as in plan.

Since our site is located in dilla city its seismic zone is zone 3. Bedrock acceleration is read from
ES EN 1998-1:2015 tableD1 for zone 3 bedrock acceleration is 0.10.
Dilla is located at zone 3 i.e. 𝛼0 = 0.07
Fundamental period
Since mixed used building live load incidence factor is 0.25.
W= Gk +ψ*Qk
=13324.3488 + 0.25*4510.22
=14452KN
H=24.6 m height of the building
C1=0.075 for RC framed structures
3
∴ =𝐶1 H34 = 0.75*(24.6)4 = 0.83 sec < 2sec …okay!

Importance factor I= 1 ordinary building residential

𝛼 = 𝛼0 𝐼 = 0.07 ∗0.1 = 0.07*1 = 0.07
Design response factor (𝜷)
S=1.2 for medium dense sand (soil class B)

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 209

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building
1.2∗𝑆 1.2∗1.2
∴ = ( 𝛽)= 2 = 2 = 1.64<2.5 ok!
𝑇1 ⁄3 (0.83) ⁄3

Behavior factor
go = 0.2 for framed structures

gD = 1.5 for medium ductility class DC “M”

gR = 1.0 for regular structures

gR = 1.0 for frame systems

=𝛽 = 0.2 ∗ 1.5 ∗ 1.0 ∗ 1.0 = 0.3 ≤ 0.7 !

Design spectrum (Sd(T))
𝑆𝑑 (T) = 𝛼𝛽𝛾 =0.07*1.64*0.3 =0.034
Seismic base shear
𝐹𝑏 =𝑆𝑑 (T)*w =0.034*14452 = 491.36 KN
Concentrated force at top
𝐹𝑡 = 0.071*𝑇1 𝐹𝑏
= 0.071*0.83*491.36 = 28.95KN
Distribution of Horizontal Seismic forces
The distribution of seismic base shear to each floor is computed using the following formula for
the lateral force at the ith floor:
(𝐹𝑏−𝐹𝑡)∗𝑊𝑖ℎ𝑖
Fi = ∑ 𝑊𝑗ℎ𝑗

Where Fi is the concentrated force acting at floor i,

Wi and Wj =dead weight of floor at level i and j
hi and hj =height from base to floor at level I and j
Ft=the concentrated force at the top of the building,
5.22. Distribution of base shear to each floor
Floor Weight(Wi) Height WiHi Fb Ft 𝐹𝑖 Fs
(m)
Tanker 247.82 KN 24.6 m 6096.37 491.36 28.95 16.65 16.65

Roof 1801.4 KN 22.2 m 39991.08 491.36 28.95 109.2 125.85

4𝑡ℎ floor 1958.04KN 19.2 m 37594.41 491.36 28.95 102.63 228.48

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 210

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

3𝑟𝑑 floor 1913.22KN 15.7 m 30037.55 491.36 28.95 82 310.48

Th
2𝑛𝑑 floor 1915.03KN 12.2 m 23363.48 491.36 28.95 63.78 374.26
us
𝑠𝑡
1 floor 1941.12KN 8.7 m 16887.74 491.36 28.95 46 420.26 the

Ground 2294.88KN 5.2 m 11933.36 491.36 28.95 35.6 455.86 late

ral
Basement 1252.88KN 2.7 m 3382.77 491.36 28.95 9.25 465.11
loa
169286.77 ds
∑ 𝑾𝒊𝑯𝒊 due
to
the seismic load at each floor are:
 Lateral load on water tanker =𝐹𝑡 +𝐹𝑖 = 28.95 + 16.65= 45.6 KN
 Lateral load on roof = 𝐹𝑡 +𝐹𝑖 =28.95+109.2= 138.15 KN
 Lateral load on 4𝑡ℎ floor= 𝐹𝑖 = 102.63 KN
 Lateral load on 3𝑟𝑑 floor=𝐹𝑖 =82 KN
 Lateral load on 2𝑛𝑑 floor= 𝐹𝑖 =63.78 KN
 Lateral load on 1𝑠𝑡 floor= 𝐹𝑖 =46 KN
 Lateral load on Ground floor= 𝐹𝑖 =35.6 KN
 Lateral load on basement floor =𝐹𝑖 =9.25 KN
Earthquake analysis result directly from etabs
This calculation presents the automatically generated lateral seismic loads for load pattern EQYP
according to EUROCODE8 2004, as calculated by ETABS.
Direction and Eccentricity
Direction = Multiple
Eccentricity Ratio = 5% for all diaphragms
Structural Period
Period Calculation Method = Program Calculated
Coefficient, Ct [EC 4.3.3.2.2] Ct = 0.075m
Structure Height Above Base, H H = 24.6 m
Factors and Coefficients
Country =

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 211

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Design Ground Acceleration, ag ag = 0.1g

Ground Type [EC Table 3.1] = B
Soil Factor, S [EC Table 3.2] S = 1.2
Constant Acceleration Period Limit, TB [EC Table 3.2] TB = 0.15 sec
Constant Acceleration Period Limit, TC [EC Table 3.2] TC = 0.5 sec
Constant Displacement Period Limit, TD [EC Table 3.2] TD = 2 sec
Lower Bound Factor, β [EC 3.2.2.5(4)] β0 = 0.2
Behavior Factor, q [EC 3.2.2.5(3)] q = 3.9
Seismic Response
Spectral Response Acceleration, Sd(T1) [EC 3.2.2.5(4)
2 T 2.5 2
Sd (T1 ) = ag S [3 + T ( q − 3)] for T ≤ TB
B

2.5
= ag S forTB ≤ T ≤ TC
q
2.5 TC
= ag S [ T ] ≥ βag forTC ≤ T ≤ TD
q
2.5 TC TD
= ag S [ ] ≥ βag forTD ≤ T
q T2

Vcoeff = Sd (T1 )λ
Equivalent Lateral Forces
Seismic Base Shear Coefficient
Calculated Base Shear
Direction Period Used (sec) W (kN) Fb (kN)
Y 2.209 36655.0229 733.1005
Y + Ecc. X 2.209 36655.0229 733.1005
Y - Ecc. X 2.209 36655.0229 733.1005

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 212

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Applied Story Forces

Story Elevation X-Dir Y-Dir

m kN kN
tanker level 19.4 0 30.156
roof level 17 0 136.3976
4th floor 14 0 181.4025
3rd floor 10.5 0 137.9159
2nd floor 7 0 112.1809
1st floor 3.5 0 79.9137
ground floor 0 0 45.925
basement -2.5 0 9.2088

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 213

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Story Elevation X-Dir Y-Dir

m kN kN
foundation -5.2 0 0

5.4.2. Center Of Stiffness for Each Floor

Center of Stiffness is the point where the stiffness or strength of the floors is concentrated.
The center of stiffness was determined using D- value method by considering lateral stiffness of
the frame elements along X and Y direction
Calculation of beam and column stiffness
Kb= beam stiffness
Kxc = column stiffness in the x-axis.
Kyc = column stiffness in the y-axis.
For uniform storey height, the D-value of a column is obtained from:
̅
D = a* Kc, where a = constant determined by 𝐾
KC = Stiffness ratio of column
Case-1 General case-2 one end fixed case-3 one end pin supported

̅
𝐾 0.5+𝐾̅ ̅
0.5𝐾
a= ̅
a= ̅
a= ̅
2+𝐾 2+𝐾 2+𝐾

̅ = ∑ 𝐾𝑏
𝐾 ̅ = ∑ 𝐾𝑏
𝐾 ̅ = ∑ 𝐾𝑏
𝐾
2𝐾 𝑐 𝐾 𝑐 1+2𝐾 𝑐

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 214

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

on axis A
0 354 roof
kc 457 kc 457
K' 0.77 K' 0.39
α 0.25 α 0.13
D 114.25 D 59.4 ΣD 173.65
0 354 4th
kc 457 kc 457
K' 0.77 K' 0.39
α 0.25 α 0.13
D 114.25 D 59.4 ΣD 173.65
0 354 3rd
kc 457 kc 457
K' 0.77 K' 0.39
α 0.25 α 0.13
D 114.25 D 59.4 ΣD 173.65
0 354 2nd
kc 457 kc 457
K' 0.77 K' 0.39
α 0.25 α 0.13
D 114.25 D 59.4 ΣD 173.65
0 354 1st
kc 651 kc 651
K' 0.54 K' 0.27
α 0.25 α 0.13
D 162.75 D 84.63 ΣD 247.38
0 354 ground
kc 1041.67 kc 1041.7
K' 0.34 K' 0.17
α 0.25 α 0.13
D 260.4 D 135.4 ΣD 395.8
0 354 base
kc 1157.4 kc 1157.4
K' 0.15 K' 0.08
α 0.25 α 0.113
D 289.35 D 92.59 ΣD 381.94
foun

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 215

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

on axis B
179 tan
kc 533.33 kc 533.33
K' 0.83 K' 0.83
α 0.25 α 0.25
D 133.33 D 133.33 ΣD 266.66
218 238 179 roof
kc 533.33 kc 533.33 kc 759.38 kc 759.38
K' 0.37 K' 1.71 K' 0.93 K' 0.62
α 0.08 α 0.23 α 0.15 485 α 0.12
D 42.7 D 122.66 D 121.5 D 91.12 ΣD 212.62

218 238 270 4th

kc 533.33 kc 457.14 kc 892.86 kc 892.86
K' 0.37 K' 0.99 K' 0.84 K' 0.57
α 0.08 α 0.17 α 0.15 485 α 0.11
D 42.7 D 77.7 D 133.9 D 98.2 ΣD 352.5

218 238 270 3rd

kc 533.33 kc 457.14 kc 892.86 kc 892.86
K' 0.37 K' 0.99 K' 0.84 K' 0.57
α 0.08 α 0.17 α 0.15 485 α 0.11
D 42.7 D 77.7 D 133.9 D 98.2 ΣD 352.5

218 238 270 2nd

kc 533.33 kc 457.14 kc 892.86 kc 892.86
K' 0.37 K' 0.99 K' 0.84 K' 0.57
α 0.08 α 0.17 α 0.15 485 α 0.11
D 42.7 D 77.7 D 133.9 D 98.2 ΣD 352.5

218 238 270 1st

kc 533.33 kc 457.14 kc 2057.14 kc 2057.14 base
K' 0.37 K' 0.99 K' 0.36 K' 0.25
α 0.08 α 0.17 α 0.1 485 α 0.06
D 42.7 D 77.7 D 205.7 D 123.67 ΣD 449.77

218 238 270 ground

kc 892.86 kc 892.86 kc 2057.14 kc 2057.14
K' 0.25 K' 0.51 K' 0.36 K' 0.25
α 0.06 α 0.1 α 0.1 485 α 0.06
D 49.6 D 90.7 D 205.7 D 123.67 ΣD 469.67

218 238 270 base

kc 892.86 kc 892.86 kc 2057.14 kc 2057.14
K' 0.25 K' 0.51 K' 0.36 K' 0.25
α 0.06 α 0.1 α 0.1 a 0.06
D 49.6 D 90.7 D 205.7 D 123.67 ΣD 469.67
foun

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 216

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

on axis C
179 roof
533.33 kc 533.33
0.83 K' 0.83
0.25 α 0.25
133.33 D 133.33 ΣD 266.66
354 4th
457.14 kc 457.14
0.66 K' 0.66
0.25 α 0.25
114.28 D 114.28 ΣD 228.56
354 3rd
457.14 kc 457.14
0.66 K' 0.66
0.25 α 0.25
114.28 D 114.28 ΣD 228.56
354 2nd
457.14 kc 457.14
0.66 K' 0.66
0.25 α 0.25
114.28 D 114.28 ΣD 228.56
354 1st
759 kc 759
0.47 K' 0.47
0.25 α 0.25
189.75 D 189.75 ΣD 379.5
354 ground
892.86 kc 892.86
0.4 K' 0.4
0.25 α 0.25
223.22 D 223.22 ΣD 446.44
354 base
892.86 kc 892.86
0.4 K' 0.4
0.25 α 0.25
223.22 D 223.22 ΣD 446.44
foun

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 217

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

on axis D
136 tan
kc 666.67 kc
K' 0.29 K'
α 0.06 α
D 40 D ΣD 40
170 109.5 120 136 92 roof
kc 457 kc 457 kc 651 kc 457 kc 457 kc 457
K' 0.55 K' 0.9 K' 0.53 K' 0.87 K' 0.75 K' 0.3
α 0.11 α 0.16 α 0.1 α 0.15 α 0.14 α 0.07
D 50.3 D 73 D 65.1 D 68.55 D 64 D 31.99 ΣD 352.94
337 217 239 271 182 4th
kc 457 kc 651 kc 893 kc 457 kc 457 kc 457
K' 0.74 K' 0.85 K' 0.57 K' 1.12 K' 0.99 K' 0.39
α 0.14 α 0.15 α 0.15 α 0.18 α 0.17 α 0.08
D 63.98 D 97.65 D 133.95 D 82.3 D 77.7 D 38.8 ΣD 494.38
337 217 239 271 182 3rd
kc 457 kc 893 kc 1188 kc 651 kc 651 kc 457
K' 0.74 K' 0.62 K' 0.38 K' 0.78 K' 0.69 K' 0.39
α 0.14 α 0.12 α 0.08 α 0.14 α 0.13 α 0.08
D 63.98 D 107.2 D 95 D 91 D 84.6 D 38.8 ΣD 480.58
337 217 239 271 182 2nd
kc 457 kc 1188 kc 1543 kc 893 kc 893 kc 457
K' 0.74 K' 0.45 K' 0.3 K' 0.57 K' 0.51 K' 0.39
α 0.14 α 0.09 α 0.07 α 0.11 α 0.1 α 0.08
D 63.98 D 106.92 D 108 D 98.23 D 89.3 D 38.8 ΣD 505.23
337 217 239 271 182 1st
kc 651 kc 1543 kc 1800 kc 1188 kc 651 kc 651
K' 0.52 K' 0.34 K' 0.25 K' 0.43 K' 0.69 K' 0.28
α 0.1 α 0.07 α 0.06 α 0.09 α 0.13 α 0.07
D 65.1 D 108 D 108 D 106.9 D 84.6 D 42.3 ΣD 514.9
337 217 239 271 182 ground
kc 1302 kc 2250 kc 3000 kc 2250 kc 2250 kc 1302
K' 0.26 K' 0.25 K' 0.15 K' 0.23 K' 0.2 K' 0.14
α 0.06 α 0.06 α 0.03 α 0.05 α 0.05 α 0.03
D 78 D 135 D 90 D 112.5 D 112.5 D 42.59 ΣD 570.59
337 217 239 271 182 base
kc 1157 kc 2000 kc 2666.67 kc 2000 kc 2000 kc 1157
K' 0.15 K' 0.14 K' 0.09 K' 0.13 K' 0.11 K' 0.08
α 0.03 α 0.03 α 0.02 α 0.03 α 0.03 α 0.02
D 37.7 D 60 D 53.3 D 60 D 60 D 23 ΣD 294

foun

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 218

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

on axis E
67 120 136 92 ro roof
kc 533 kc 533 kc 533 kc 533 kc 533
K' 0.48 K' 0.64 K' 0.46 K' 0.39 K' 0.26
α 0.1 α 0.12 α 0.09 α 0.08 α 0.06
D 53.3 D 64.87 D 48 D 42.99 D 21.5 ΣD 230.66
132 239 0 183 4th 4th
kc 457 kc 650.89 kc 457 kc 457 kc 457
K' 0.7 K' 0.7 K' 0.82 K' 0.7 K' 0.4
α 0.13 α 0.13 α 0.15 α 0.13 α 0.08
D 59.41 D 84.6 D 68.55 D 59.4 D 29.7 ΣD 301.66
132 239 271 183 3rd 3rd
kc 457 kc 893 kc 457 kc 457 kc 457
K' 0.7 K' 0.51 K' 1.12 K' 0.99 K' 0.4
α 0.13 α 0.1 α 0.18 α 0.17 α 0.08
D 59.42 D 89.3 D 87.26 D 75.92 D 37.96 ΣD 349.86
132 239 271 183 2nd 2nd
kc 457 kc 1188 kc 650.9 kc 651 kc 457
K' 0.7 K' 0.38 K' 0.78 K' 0.7 K' 0.4
α 0.13 α 0.08 α 0.14 α 0.13 α 0.08
D 59.42 D 95.04 D 91.3 D 84.6 D 37.92 ΣD 368.28
132 239 271 183 1st 1st
kc 651 kc 1543 kc 892.86 kc 892.86 kc 289
K' 0.52 K' 0.3 K' 0.57 K' 0.51 K' 0.6
α 0.1 α 0.06 α 0.11 α 0.1 α 0.12
D 65.1 D 100.6 D 98.2 D 89.28 D 31.5 ΣD 384.68
132 239 271 183 ground ground
kc 1302 kc 2250 kc 1733 kc 468 kc 468
K' 0.26 K' 0.2 K' 0.29 K' 0.97 K' 0.4
α 0.06 α 0.05 α 0.06 α 0.16 α 0.08
D 78.12 D 112.5 D 103.98 D 76.43 D 38.28 ΣD 409.31
132 239 271 183 base base
kc 1157 kc 2000 kc 2000 kc 2000 kc 416
K' 0.00013 K' 0.11 K' 0.13 K' 0.11 K' 0.22
α 0.00003 α 0.03 α 0.03 a 0.02 α 0.04
D 0.038 D 60 D 61 D 40 D 22.88 ΣD 183.918
foun foun

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 219

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

on axis 2

66.5 83.5 roof roof

kc 533 kc 533 kc 533
K' 0.18 K' 0.42 K' 0.23
α 0.04 α 0.09 α 0.05
D 21.32 D 47.97 D 26.65 ΣD 95.94
132 165.7 4th 4th
kc 457 kc 457.14 kc 457
K' 0.29 K' 0.65 K' 0.36
α 0.06 α 0.12 α 0.08
D 27.4 D 54.9 D 36.6 ΣD 118.9
165.7 3rd 3rd
kc 457 kc 457.14 kc 457
K' 0.29 K' 0.65 K' 0.36
α 0.06 α 0.12 α 0.08
D 27.4 D 54.9 D 36.6 ΣD 118.9
132 165.7 2nd 2nd
kc 457 kc 457.14 kc 457
K' 0.29 K' 0.65 K' 0.36
α 0.06 α 0.12 α 0.08
D 27.4 D 54.9 D 36.6 ΣD 118.9
132 165.7 1st 1st
kc 651 kc 651 kc 650
K' 0.2 K' 0.46 K' 0.36
α 0.05 α 0.09 α 0.08
D 32.6 D 58.59 D 52.07 ΣD 143.26
132 165.7 ground ground
kc 1302.08 kc 1302.08 kc 1302.08
K' 0.1 K' 0.23 K' 0.13
α 0.02 α 0.05 α 0.03
D 26.04 D 65.1 D 39.06 ΣD 130.2
132 165.7 base base
kc 1157.4 kc 1157.4 kc 1157.4
K' 0.06 K' 0.07 K' 0.07
α 0.01 α 0.02 α 0.02
D 11.57 D 23.15 D 23.15 ΣD 57.87
foun

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 220

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

on axis 4

70 0 roof
kc 666.7 kc 666.7 kc 666.7
K' 0.1 K' 0.17 K' 0.17
α 0.02 α 0.04 α 0.04
D 13.3 D 26.67 D 26.67 ΣD 66.64
70 83 roof 4th
kc 759 kc 533 kc 533
K' 0.14 K' 0.43 K' 0.23
α 0.03 α 0.09 α 0.05
D 22.8 D 47.97 D 26.7 ΣD 97.47
139 165.7 4th 3rd
kc 893 kc 457 kc 457
K' 0.16 K' 0.67 K' 0.36
α 0.04 α 0.13 α 0.08
D 35.7 D 59.4 D 36.56 ΣD 131.66
139 165.7 3rd 2nd
kc 1188.4 kc 651 kc 457
K' 0.12 K' 0.47 K' 0.36
α 0.03 α 0.09 α 0.08
D 35.7 D 58.59 D 36.56 ΣD 130.85
139 165.7 2nd 1st
kc 1800 kc 892.9 kc 651
K' 0.08 K' 0.34 K' 0.25
α 0.02 α 0.07 α 0.06
D 36 D 62.5 D 39.06 ΣD 137.56
139 165.7 1st ground
kc 2057 kc 1188.4 kc 892.86
K' 0.08 K' 0.26 K' 0.19
α 0.02 α 0.06 α 0.04
D 41.14 D 71.3 D 35.7 ΣD 148.14
139 165.7 ground base
kc 3000 kc 2250 kc 1733
K' 0.05 K' 0.27 K' 0.09
α 0.01 α 0.06 α 0.02
D 30 D 135 D 34.66 ΣD 199.66
139 165.7 base foun
kc 2666.67 kc 2000 kc 2000
K' 0.03 K' 0.08 K' 0.04
α 0.007 α 0.02 α 0.009
D 19.7 D 40 D 18 ΣD 77.7
foundation

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 221

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

on axis 5
70.1 83.5 roof
kc 533.3 kc 759.38 kc 533.3
K' 0.19 K' 0.3 K' 0.23
α 0.04 α α 0.05
D 21.3 D 0.07 D 26.67 ΣD 48.04
139 53.16 165.72 4th
kc 457 kc 893 kc 651
K' 0.3 K' 0.34 K' 0.25
α 0.06 α 0.07 α 0.05
D 27.4 D 62.5 D 32.55 ΣD 122.45
139 165.72 3rd
kc 457 kc 1188 kc 893
K' 0.3 K' 0.26 K' 0.19
α 0.06 α 0.06 α 0.04
D 27.4 D 71.28 D 35.72 ΣD 134.4
139 165.72 2nd
kc 457 kc 1543 kc 1188
K' 0.3 K' 0.19 K' 0.14
α 0.06 α 0.04 α 0.03
D 27.4 D 61.72 D 35.64 ΣD 124.76
139 165.72 1st
kc 651 kc 1800 kc 1543
K' 0.2 K' 0.17 K' 0.11
α 0.05 α 0.04 α 0.03
D 32.55 D 72 D 46.29 ΣD 150.84
139 165.72 ground
kc 1302 kc 3000 kc 2250
K' 0.11 K' 0.1 K' 0.07
α 0.03 α 0.02 α 0.02
D 39 D 60 D 45 ΣD 144
139 165.72 base
kc 1157 kc 2666.67 kc 2000
K' 0.06 K' 0.06 K' 0.04
α 0.01 α 0.01 α 0.009
D 11.57 D 26.67 D 18 ΣD 56.24
foun

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 222

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Table 5.23. Story stiffness result from ETABS

Drift Stiffness Stiffness
Shear X Shear Y Drift Y
Story Load Case X X Y
kN mm kN/m kN mm kN/m
tanker level EQXP 1 57.1256 4.876 11714.48 1.87E-06 0.33 0
roof level EQXP 1 318.9524 4.758 67036.92 1.96E-06 1.46 0
4th floor EQXP 1 662.5897 6.87 96444.45 2.18E-05 3.104 0
3rd floor EQXP 1 923.8487 7.096 130193.7 4.67E-05 3.981 0
2nd floor EQXP 1 1136.357 5.018 226435.4 0.0001 3.237 0
1st floor EQXP 1 1287.741 3.057 421254.8 0.0001 2.022 0
ground floor EQXP 1 1374.738 0.154 8929908 0.0001 0.014 0
basement EQXP 1 1392.183 0.128 10880475 0.0001 0.009 0
tanker level EQXP 2 57.1256 4.898 11663.54 1.01E-06 0.325 0
roof level EQXP 2 318.9524 4.693 67969.34 2.11E-06 1.262 0
4th floor EQXP 2 662.5897 6.301 105158.8 1.72E-05 2.699 0
3rd floor EQXP 2 923.8487 6.601 139963.2 3.73E-05 3.418 0
2nd floor EQXP 2 1136.357 4.251 267294.6 4.75E-05 2.603 0
1st floor EQXP 2 1287.741 2.694 477954.8 4.75E-05 1.592 0
ground floor EQXP 2 1374.738 0.157 8744440 4.75E-05 0.011 0
basement EQXP 2 1392.183 0.129 10801093 4.75E-05 0.007 0
tanker level EQXP 3 57.1256 4.855 11765.88 2.73E-06 0.334 0
roof level EQXP 3 318.9524 4.823 66129.73 1.81E-06 1.659 0
4th floor EQXP 3 662.5897 7.569 87534.89 2.64E-05 3.54 0
3rd floor EQXP 3 923.8487 8.107 113963.2 0.0001 4.544 0
2nd floor EQXP 3 1136.357 5.608 202641.8 0.0001 3.872 0
1st floor EQXP 3 1287.741 3.62 355692.2 0.0001 2.423 0
ground floor EQXP 3 1374.738 0.151 9123414 0.0001 0.018 0
basement EQXP 3 1392.183 0.127 10961033 0.0001 0.01 0
tanker level EQXN 1 57.1256 4.876 11714.48 1.87E-06 0.33 0
roof level EQXN 1 318.9524 4.758 67036.92 1.96E-06 1.46 0

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 223

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

4th floor EQXN 1 662.5897 6.87 96444.45 2.18E-05 3.104 0

3rd floor EQXN 1 923.8487 7.096 130193.7 4.67E-05 3.981 0
2nd floor EQXN 1 1136.357 5.018 226435.4 0.0001 3.237 0
1st floor EQXN 1 1287.741 3.057 421254.8 0.0001 2.022 0
ground floor EQXN 1 1374.738 0.154 8929908 0.0001 0.014 0
basement EQXN 1 1392.183 0.128 10880475 0.0001 0.009 0
tanker level EQXN 2 57.1256 4.898 11663.54 1.01E-06 0.325 0
roof level EQXN 2 318.9524 4.693 67969.34 2.11E-06 1.262 0
4th floor EQXN 2 662.5897 6.301 105158.8 1.72E-05 2.699 0
3rd floor EQXN 2 923.8487 6.601 139963.2 3.73E-05 3.418 0
2nd floor EQXN 2 1136.357 4.251 267294.6 4.75E-05 2.603 0
1st floor EQXN 2 1287.741 2.694 477954.8 4.75E-05 1.592 0
ground floor EQXN 2 1374.738 0.157 8744440 4.75E-05 0.011 0
basement EQXN 2 1392.183 0.129 10801093 4.75E-05 0.007 0
tanker level EQXN 3 57.1256 4.855 11765.88 2.73E-06 0.334 0
roof level EQXN 3 318.9524 4.823 66129.73 1.81E-06 1.659 0
4th floor EQXN 3 662.5897 7.569 87534.89 2.64E-05 3.54 0
3rd floor EQXN 3 923.8487 8.107 113963.2 0.0001 4.544 0
2nd floor EQXN 3 1136.357 5.608 202641.8 0.0001 3.872 0
1st floor EQXN 3 1287.741 3.62 355692.2 0.0001 2.423 0
ground floor EQXN 3 1374.738 0.151 9123414 0.0001 0.018 0
basement EQXN 3 1392.183 0.127 10961033 0.0001 0.01 0
tanker level EQYP 1 0 0.266 0 30.1252 2.579 11678.83
roof level EQYP 1 0 1.491 0 168.1997 2.572 65399.74
4th floor EQYP 1 7.05E-07 2.991 0 349.4169 3.803 91886.69
3rd floor EQYP 1 8.32E-07 3.88 0 487.192 4.388 111026.7
2nd floor EQYP 1 9.56E-07 4.335 0 599.2584 4.327 138481.5
1st floor EQYP 1 8.14E-07 2.628 0 679.0905 2.548 266564.2
ground floor EQYP 1 8.17E-07 0.026 0 724.9686 0.032 22437121

basement EQYP 1 8.17E-07 0.01 0 734.1681 0.022 34019778

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 224

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

tanker level EQYP 2 0 0.273 0 30.1252 2.578 11683.25

roof level EQYP 2 0 1.583 0 168.1997 2.619 64224.5
4th floor EQYP 2 7.41E-07 3.172 0 349.4169 3.893 89749.89
3rd floor EQYP 2 8.75E-07 4.144 0 487.192 4.594 106051.6
2nd floor EQYP 2 1.01E-06 4.61 0 599.2584 4.535 132131.2
1st floor EQYP 2 8.57E-07 2.805 0 679.0905 2.678 253612.7
ground floor EQYP 2 8.60E-07 0.029 0 724.9686 0.033 21964262
basement EQYP 2 8.60E-07 0.011 0 734.1681 0.022 33950382
tanker level EQYP 3 0 0.259 0 30.1252 2.58 11674.41
roof level EQYP 3 0 1.399 0 168.1997 2.525 66618.8
4th floor EQYP 3 6.69E-07 2.81 0 349.4169 3.712 94127.72
3rd floor EQYP 3 7.88E-07 3.616 0 487.192 4.161 117079.8
2nd floor EQYP 3 9.04E-07 4.06 0 599.2584 4.06 147596.5
1st floor EQYP 3 7.72E-07 2.447 0 679.0905 2.375 285906.1
ground floor EQYP 3 7.74E-07 0.024 0 724.9686 0.032 22930788
basement EQYP 3 7.74E-07 0.01 0 734.1681 0.022 34089458
tanker level EQYN 1 0 0.266 0 30.1252 2.579 11678.83
roof level EQYN 1 0 1.491 0 168.1997 2.572 65399.74
4th floor EQYN 1 7.05E-07 2.991 0 349.4169 3.803 91886.69
3rd floor EQYN 1 8.32E-07 3.88 0 487.192 4.388 111026.7
2nd floor EQYN 1 9.56E-07 4.335 0 599.2584 4.327 138481.5
1st floor EQYN 1 8.14E-07 2.628 0 679.0905 2.548 266564.2
ground floor EQYN 1 8.17E-07 0.026 0 724.9686 0.032 22437121
basement EQYN 1 8.17E-07 0.01 0 734.1681 0.022 34019778
tanker level EQYN 2 0 0.273 0 30.1252 2.578 11683.25
roof level EQYN 2 0 1.583 0 168.1997 2.619 64224.5
4th floor EQYN 2 7.41E-07 3.172 0 349.4169 3.893 89749.89
3rd floor EQYN 2 8.75E-07 4.144 0 487.192 4.594 106051.6
2nd floor EQYN 2 1.01E-06 4.61 0 599.2584 4.535 132131.2
1st floor EQYN 2 8.57E-07 2.805 0 679.0905 2.678 253612.7

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 225

 B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

ground floor EQYN 2 8.60E-07 0.029 0 724.9686 0.033 21964262

basement EQYN 2 8.60E-07 0.011 0 734.1681 0.022 33950382

tanker level EQYN 3 0 0.259 0 30.1252 2.58 11674.41
roof level EQYN 3 0 1.399 0 168.1997 2.525 66618.8
4th floor EQYN 3 6.69E-07 2.81 0 349.4169 3.712 94127.72
3rd floor EQYN 3 7.88E-07 3.616 0 487.192 4.161 117079.8
2nd floor EQYN 3 9.04E-07 4.06 0 599.2584 4.06 147596.5
1st floor EQYN 3 7.72E-07 2.447 0 679.0905 2.375 285906.1
ground floor EQYN 3 7.74E-07 0.024 0 724.9686 0.032 22930788
basement EQYN 3 7.74E-07 0.01 0 734.1681 0.022 34089458

Table 5.24. Center of mass and center of rigidity result from ETABS
Cumulative Cumulative
Story Mass X Mass Y XCM YCM XCCM YCCM XCR YCR
X Y
kg kg m m kg kg m m m m
basement 226736.6 226736.6 5.0211 10.6587 226736.6 226736.6 5.0211 10.6587 4.7137 13.286
ground
587118.5 587118.5 5.8355 10.6987 587118.5 587118.5 5.8355 10.6987 3.8504 12.8089
floor
1st floor 610635.2 610635.2 6.364 10.1663 610635.2 610635.2 6.364 10.1663 1.5751 13.3837
2nd floor 271288.2 271288.2 5.7765 10.4953 271288.2 271288.2 5.7765 10.4953 1.5239 13.11
3rd floor 262455 262455 5.8573 10.4828 262455 262455 5.8573 10.4828 1.6972 13.0338
4th floor 263530.7 263530.7 6.1656 10.5794 263530.7 263530.7 6.1656 10.5794 1.9322 12.9809
roof
101559.8 101559.8 6.0242 10.4455 101559.8 101559.8 6.0242 10.4455 2.1088 12.9048
level
tanker
20810.64 20810.64 3.455 12.3889 20810.64 20810.64 3.455 12.3889 3.2114 12.3982
level

5.4.3. Wind Load analysis on Wall

External wind pressure
Wind Pressure acting on external surface of a structure According to ES EN 1 part 1-4 Art 5.2
the wind pressure acting on the external surface of a structure shall be:
we = qp(z)*cpe
Where:
qp(ze) = peak velocity pressure
ze = reference height for the external pressure
cpe = pressure coefficient for external pressure

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 226

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Peak velocity pressure qpz at height z

1 2 (𝑧)
𝑞𝑝 (𝑧)= [1 + 7 ∗ 𝐼𝑣 (𝑧)] ∗ 2 ∗ 𝜌 ∗ 𝑣𝑚 =𝑐𝑒 (𝑧)𝑞𝑏 …………..ES EN 1 part 1-4 expression (4.8)

Where:
lv = turbulence intensity
ρ = air density
The air density is affected by altitude and depends on the temperature and pressure to be
expected in the region during wind storms. In order to get the value of the air density we know
about the site altitude above sea level, so Dilla is an altitude of 1570 meters above sea level,
density of air () for altitude≤2000
0.992 Kg/m3
vm = mean wind velocity
ce(z) = exposure factor
qb = basic velocity pressure

Mean wind velocity, vm
𝑉𝑚 = 𝐶𝑟 (𝑍) ∗ 𝐶𝑜 (𝑍)𝑉𝑏 ………………………. ES EN 1 part 1-4 expression (4.3)
Where:
cr(z) = roughness factor
co(z) = orography factor, to be taken as 1 for topography unaffected zone, no speed up due to
funneling effects is to be expected.
Vb = Basic wind velocity
Vb = Cdirectional*Cseasonal * Vb,o
Vb,o = fundamental value of the basic wind velocity for Addis Ababa can be taken as
Vb,o = 22m/s
Vb = 1*1*22 m/sec = 22 m/sec
𝒁
𝑪𝒓 (𝒁) = 𝑲𝒓 ∗ 𝒍𝒏(𝒁𝒐) for Zmin ≤ Z ≤ Zmax

𝑪𝒓 (𝒁) = 𝑪𝒓 ∗ (𝒁𝒎𝒊𝒏 ) for Z ≤ Zmin

Where:
Zo= roughness length
kr = terrain factor depending on the roughness length (Zo) calculating using

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 227

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building
𝑍𝑜
kr = 0.19*(𝑍𝑜,𝐼𝐼)0.07

Zo,II = 0.05m
Where:
Zo = 0.3 Area with regular cover of vegetation or buildings or with
Isolated obstacles with separations of maximum 20 obstacle heights
(such as villages, suburban terrain, permanent forest), category III. ES EN 1 part 1-4 section
4.3.2 and table 4.1
Zmin = minimum height, we have read it in table 4.1(reference above) = 5m
Zmax = maximum height to be taken as 200m.
when Z=h=19.4m
0.3
Kr = 0.19*(0.05)0.07 = 0.22

Therefore
19.4
Cr(19.4) = 0.22 * ln ( 0.3 ) = 0.92
21.16
Cr(21.16) = 0.22 * ln ( ) = 0.93
0.3

Taking a topography coefficient of unity, the exposure coefficients become:

Ct=1 for ϕ<0.05 flat areas
7∗𝐾𝑟
𝐶𝑒 (𝑍) = 𝐶𝑟2 (𝑍) ∗ 𝐶𝑡2 (𝑍) ∗ [1 + 𝐶 ]
𝑟 (𝑍)𝐶𝑡 (𝑍)

7∗0.22
𝐶𝑒 (19.4) = 0.922 ∗ 12 [1 + 0.92∗1] = 2.26
7∗0.22
𝐶𝑒 (21.16) = 0.932 ∗ 12 [1 + 0.93∗1] = 2.29

External pressure (walls)

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 228

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Based on the above figure e=b=21.16 or e=2h=38.8, whichever is smaller.

∴ e=b=12m. And you can see that d=10 is less than e=21.16 i.e d<e
The partition of the sidewalls would be as shown Here

Zone Area
A e/5*h= 21.16/5*19.4 = 82m2
B (d-e/5)*h=(12.15-21.16/5)*19.4 = 153.6m2
D 21.16*19.4 = 410.5m2

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 229

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

E 21.16*19.4 = 410.5m2

ratio d/h of 12.15/19.4 = 0.6<1. Hence from Table A.1.

cpe(Zone A) = -1.2
cpe(Zone B*) = -0.8
cpe(Zone D) = +0.8
cpe(Zone E) = -0.53
Zone External pressure at ze=19.4m External pressure at ze=21.16m
we = ce(19.4)cpeqref we = ce(21.16)cpeqref
A 2.26*-1.2* 240.1* 10-3=-0.652 2.29*-1.2*240.1*10-3=-0.659
B 2.26* -0.8 *240.1 *10-3=-0.434 2.29* -0.8 *240.1 *10-3=-0.439
D 2.26 *0.8 * 240.1*10-3=0.434 2.29 *0.8 * 240.1*10-3=0.439
E 2.26 *-0.53*240.1* 10-3=-0.288 2.29 *-0.53*240.1* 10-3=-0.291
Internal pressure
As there are internal partitions, the worst value for cpi is cpi = +0.8, and cpi=-0.5. In this part of the
building the mean height of the windows will be assumed to be equal the mean height of the two
reference heights. Hence: Zi = (19.4+21.16)/2=20.28m
The exposure coefficient at this height ce(20.28) and is calculated as before and is 2.29. Thus:
wi = ce(zi)cpiqref
= 2.29*(-0.5)*(240.1*10-3 )
= -0.275KN/m2 (suction pressure) or
wi = ce(zi)cpiqref
= 2.29*(+0.8)*(240.1*10-3)
= 0.439KN/m2 (+ve pressure)
Thus the net pressures at each level z=19.4 and z=21.16 for each wall would be calculated as
follows
Zone Net pressure at ze=19.4m Net pressure at ze=21.16m
A -0.652 - (-0.233)= -0.419 -0.659-(-0.233)= -0.426
-0.652 - 0.373= -1.025 -0.659- 0.373= -1.032
B -0.434 - (-0.233)= -0.201 -0.439 - (-0.233)= -0.206

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 230

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

-0.434 - 0.373= -0.807 -0.439 - 0.373= -0.812

D 0.434 –(-0.233)=0.667 0.439 –(-0.233)=0.672
0.434-0.373=0.061 0.439-0.373=0.066
E -0.288-(-0.233)= -0.055 -0.291-(-0.233)= -0.058
-0.288 – 0.373= -0.661 -0.291 – 0.373= -0.664

Thus the maximum pressures that are bold above are the net wind pressures for each zone. Now
we can find the wind force applied on each zone by multiplying net pressure by reference area.
5.5. Modeling and Analysis of Structural Buildings
Today, computer-aided design is common in all areas and especially in the world of civil
engineering. Being able to carry out complex simulations and calculations in a short time has
allowed expedite the planning phase of projects. On the other hand, it implies a great saving of
money over traditional methods of design and testing structures.
These software’s are useful tools to get an idea of the behavior that will have a structure in
reality when subjected to certain actions. In this case, the software ETABS 2016 version 16.2.1
is the mainly used software for analysis and design of the structural buildings. This program
allows modeling the entire building and analyzing their structural behavior. By using this
software’s, it is possible to entirely describe the building structure and simulate its behavior
under the different loads. The structural model fulfils all the requirements of ES EN-8.

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 231

 B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Figure 5.6. 3D model of B+G+ 5-hotel building

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 232

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

5.5.1. Modeling Description

The model of the building shall adequately represent the distribution of stiffness and mass in it
so that all significant deformation shapes and inertia forces are properly accounted for under the
seismic action considered ES EN-8 section 4.3.1(1).
 All beams and columns are modeled as line elements. But floors are modeled as areal
elements. All element modeling follows centerline analysis.
 Effective widths of beams are not calculated; therefore, all beams are modeled as
rectangular sections. Infills are not considered in the model.
 The cracked elements are considered as per ES EN-8 section 4.3.1(6). The elastic flexural
and shear stiffness properties are taken to be equal to one-half of the corresponding
stiffness of the un-cracked elements, such that the moment of inertia and shear area of the
un-cracked section were multiplied by factor 0.5.
 The torsional stiffness of the elements was reduced as per ES EN-8 section 4.3.1(7).
Torsional stiffness of the cracked section was set equal to 10% of the torsional stiffness
of the un-cracked section. The accidental torsional effects are taken into account by
means of accidental eccentricities in both direction according to ES EN-8 section
4.3.2(1).
 The center of mass and center of stiffness of each floors are determined from the ETABS
software.
a) Modeling of reinforced concrete columns
The columns are modeled and designed using ETABS element type "column". Rectangular
columns are considered in the design. According to the bidirectional configuration considered,
these columns will withstand bending moments in the two main directions and high compression
on their Z-axis acting simultaneously to consider the worst loading case scenario. Moreover,
columns have to be able to handle the shear forces applied on the two main directions due to
lateral loads acting in X and Y-axis.
b) Modeling of reinforced concrete beams
Beams are modeled and design using ETABS element type “Beam”. Rectangular beams are
taken into account during modeling to look for the better and best fitting solution. Beams will be
subjected to the principal bending moment acting in their longitudinal plane and shear forces
acting predominantly in their extremes. These stresses will determine the necessary rebar for

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 233

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

each beam on different floors. On the other hand, it’s necessary to ensure the correct interaction
beam-column to satisfy the proper performance of the frame system. To ensure it the model has
to fulfill the strong column-weak beam principle. This can be check in ETABS through the beam
column capacity ratio obtained after the analysis.
c) Modeling of reinforced concrete slabs
Slabs are modeled using ETABS element type “shell”. As told before, solid slab is used on the
model. To consider the slab as a monolithic unit capable of resisting lateral forces, it is assigned
to each slab a diaphragm that simulates that behavior. Slabs are adequately mesh to obtain
satisfactory results. The art of creating area element models includes determining what
constitutes an adequate mesh. (In our case, slabs are calculated by hand calculation then after
transferred to surrounded beams).
5.5.2. Procedures of modeling by using ETABS software
Note: - before doing anything we have adjusted unit after opening the software. The unit we
have decided KN m. This indicates KN stands for all loading causes and m stands for all linear
measurements.
Step 1: Plot Grid (Axis) Coordinates
Plot grid Coordinates that represent the given structural design along X & Y direction
In our cause, number of grid line along X-direction = 5 & number of grid line along Y-direction
= 7 and other additional (primary) grid line with in specified spacing that are given by
architectural drawing are modified. Number of story are 9 which include all elevated column and
foundation height.
Table 5.25. Story Data this building model
Name Height (mm) Elevation(mm) Master Story Similar To Splice Story
tanker level 2400 19400 No None No
roof level 3000 17000 No None No
4th floor 3500 14000 No None No
3rd floor 3500 10500 No None No
2nd floor 3500 7000 No None No
1st floor 3500 3500 No None No
ground floor 2500 0 Yes None No
basement 2700 -2500 No ground floor No

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 234

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Name Height (mm) Elevation(mm) Master Story Similar To Splice Story

foundation 0 -5200 No None No

Table 5.26. Grid Data of this building model

Grid System Grid Direction Grid ID Visible Bubble Location Ordinate(m)
G1 X A Yes End 0
G1 X B Yes End 0.35
G1 X C Yes End 4.37
G1 X D Yes End 6.77
G1 X E Yes End 12.16
G1 Y 7 Yes Start 0
G1 Y 6 Yes Start 2.65
G1 Y 5 Yes Start 6.76
G1 Y 4 Yes Start 10.5
G1 Y 3 Yes Start 13.8
G1 Y 2 Yes Start 18.69
G1 Y 1 Yes Start 21.21

Step-2: Selection appropriate design code

We have selected EURO CODE-2, 1992, because partial safety factor for γ_c=1.5 and γ_s=1.15
are the same as EBCS, 1995.
Step 3: Define Material type
Types of material we have define
-C-30 for flat roof slabs, for footing pad and foundation column.
- C-25 for other remain structural parts
-S-420 for all bending reinforcement and
-S-400 for all shear reinforcement and for the rebar which have diameter less than 12mm.
For C-25 Concrete
-Material type: Concrete
-Mass per unit volume: 25/10 = 2.5 (assume g=10m/s)
- Weight per unit volume: 25mpa

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 235

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

-Material type:Isotropic
- Modulus of Elasticity: 29000000Mpa
-Poisson’s ratio: 0.2
- Shear Modulus (G):10010957
-Coefficient of Thermal Expansion: 10 E-06
-Unit Weight: 24KN/m
For S- 420 steel grade
- Material type: Rebar
-Unit Weight: 7.849 KN/m3
-Modulus of Elasticity: 1.999E+08
-Poisson’s ratio: 0.3
-Shear Modulus (G):76903069
-Coefficient of Thermal Expansion: 1.17E-05
-Minimum Yield Stress, Fy: 347.83 Mpa
- Minimum Tensile Stress, Fu: 420.00 Mpa
- Directional Symmetry type: uniaxial
Table 5.27. Material Properties – Summary
E
Name Type ν Unit Weight(kN/m³) Design Strengths
MPa
C-20/25 Concrete 30000 0.2 24 Fc=20 MPa
C-25/30 Concrete 31000 0.2 25 Fc=25 MPa
C-30/37 Concrete 30000 0.2 25 Fc=30 MPa
S-400 Rebar 200000 0.3 78.5 Fy=347.83 MPa, Fu=400 MPa
S-420 Rebar 200000 0 78.5 Fy=365.22 MPa, Fu=420 MPa
Step 4: Define Frame Section (Trial section)
We define the following Frame Sections:
Note: - Those trial frame sections are selected on the following criteria
 According to safety
 According to Serviceability
 According to economy and
 According to time of the project to be partially accomplished.

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 236

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Table 5.28. Frame Sections - Summary

Name Material Shape
Beam 20*30 C-25/30 Concrete Rectangular
Beam 25*30 C-25/30 Concrete Rectangular
Beam 25*35 C-25/30 Concrete Rectangular
beam 30*40 C-25/30 Concrete Rectangular
Beam 30*50 C-25/30 Concrete Rectangular
Beam 30*60 C-25/30 Concrete Rectangular
Beam20*35 C-25/30 Concrete Rectangular
Beam20*40 C-25/30 Concrete Rectangular
COL 40*30 C-30/37 Concrete Rectangular
COL 45*30 C-30/37 Concrete Rectangular
COL 50*30 C-30/37 Concrete Rectangular
COL 55*30 C-30/37 Concrete Rectangular
COL 60*30 C-30/37 Concrete Rectangular
COL 60*35 C-30/37 Concrete Rectangular
COL 60*40 C-30/37 Concrete Rectangular

Table 5.29. Shell Sections - Summary

Name Design Type Element Type Material Total Thickness(mm)

retaining wall 20 Wall Shell-Thin C-25/30 200
S-16(shell thin) Slab Shell-Thin C-20/25 160
S-21(Shell thin) Slab Membrane C-20/25 210
shear wall Wall Shell-Thin C-25/30 200

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 237

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Step 5: define Loads

This section provides loading information as applied to the model.
 Load Patterns
Table 5.30. Load Patterns
Name Type Self-Weight Multiplier Auto Load
Dead Dead 1
Live catag A Live 0
Live catag B Live 0
Live catag C Live 0
Live catag D Live 0
Live catag E Live 0
Live catag F Live 0
Live catag G Live 0
Live catag H Live 0
Live catag I Live 0
FFL Superimposed Dead 0
PL Superimposed Dead 0
TL Superimposed Dead 0
Water Tank Superimposed Dead 0
EQXT Seismic 0 EUROCODE8 2004
EQXB Seismic 0 EUROCODE8 2004
EQYP Seismic 0 EUROCODE8 2004
EQYB Seismic 0 EUROCODE8 2004

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 238

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

 Load Combinations
Table 5.31. Load Combinations

Step 6: Draw the different Structural Members

Using the grid System Draw the structural Members with their Defined Frame Section
Properties. It includes assignment of Restraints (fixed Joint)
Step 7: Assign Loads
Assign loads to different sections from defined loads
Step 8: Analysis
After checking for errors we run the analysis and generate results.

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 239

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Figure 5.7. Axial force result on axis D

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 240

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Figure 5.8. Shear force result on axis D

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 241

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Figure 5.9. Moment 2-2 result on axis D

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 242

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Figure 5.10. Moment 3-3 result on axis D

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 243

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

CHAPTER SIX
ANALAYSIS AND DESIGN OF BEAM
6.1. Introduction
A beam is a structural element that is capable of withstanding load by resisting bending moment
and shear. The fundamental principles for the design of beams are as follows. At any cross
section there exist internal forces that can be resolved into normal and tangential to the
section. Those components that are normal to the section are bending stresses (tension on one
side of the neutral axis and compression on the other). Their function is to resist the bending
moment at the section. The tangential components are known as the shear stresses, and they
resist the transverse or shear force. A beam resists loads primarily by means of internal
moments, and shears, V. Limits are placed on the amounts of flexural reinforcement which
can be used to ensure that if failure was ever to occur, it would develop gradually, giving
warning to the occupants. The beam is then proportioned for shear, because a shear failure
is frequently sudden and brittle (Nilson, 2010).

Figure 6.10. simple beam that supports its own dead weight, w per unit length
Basic principles and assumptions in flexure theory of RC
Although the method used in the analysis of RC beams are different from those used in the
design of homogenous beam such as structural steel, the fundamental principles are essentially
the same. Accordingly, the basic equations for the flexural design of beams and slabs are
derived based on the following basic principles and assumptions at ultimate limit state. The
derived equations are then used to develop design tables and charts for various grades of
concrete and steel.

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 244

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

 Internal stress resultants such as bending moments, shear forces and others. At any
section of a member are in equilibrium with the external action effects.
 Plane sections before bending remains plane after bending.
 The strain in the reinforcement is equal to the strain in the concrete at the same level
 The tensile strength of concrete is neglected
 The stresses in concrete and reinforcement can be computed from the strains using
the - curves
 The compressive stress-strain curve for concrete may be assumed to be rectangular,
trapezoidal, parabolic or any other shape, (which is easier for computation)
provided that it adequately predicts the test results.
NB: Beam is not subjected to torsion because it is loaded as a line load.
According to ES EN 1 Part 1 there are two limit state designs. They are: Serviceability
Limit State and Ultimate Limit State. Serviceability limit state provides minimum depth that
satisfies the deflection and cracking requirement. While ultimate limit state provides the
reinforcement requirement for: flexure, shear and bondage.
During flexural design, beams can fail in three different mechanisms. These are:
 Tension Failure – is where the steel reinforcement yields first before the concrete
 Compression Failure – is where the concrete yields before the steel reinforcement
 Balanced Failure – is where both the steel reinforcement and concrete yield at the same
time
NB: Of the three failure mechanisms, tension failure is preferred over the other because
it
shows warning in the structure by the means of deflection. Tension failure is reached
when the steel yields. To guarantee tension failure, during the design of beam, the use of
different parameters yields different values with varying effect. parameters used that cause
major effect in beam design are depth of beam, diameter of reinforcement bar used and
steel grade of reinforcement bar. Many emphasis is made on the steel bars because it is
the weakest element there. Changes made that yields minor change in the beam design are
width of the beam and the concrete grade. Beams are primarily designed for flexure. Furthermore
it is essential to check and design the beam sections for torsion and shear. But during the
analysis output, the torsion was found to be very small (insignificant), so there was no need to

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 245

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

check for torsional effect. Therefore, beams were designed for flexure and shear. The beams
designed are found on Axis A (1-2). The moments used here are acquired from the slab
loads transferred. MS-Excel prepared spreadsheet was used for the design of the beam.
Also the beam across the span is checked whether if the beam is T or rectangular since the
compression zone is at the top. The support is considered as rectangular due to the compression
zone being at the bottom.
Beam analysis and design
Analysis – Given a cross section, concrete strength, reinforcement size and location, and yield
strength, compute the resistance or strength. In analysis, there should be one unique answer. Two
requirements are satisfied throughout the flexural analysis.
 Stress compatibility: The stress at any point in a member must correspond to the strain
at that point.
 Equilibrium: Internal forces must balance the external load effects
Analysis and design of singly reinforced beam sections
 Limit to the use of singly reinforced sections
At the ultimate limit state it is important that member sections in flexure should be ductile and
that failure should occur with the gradual yielding of the tension steel and not by a
sudden catastrophic compression failure of the concrete. Also, yielding of the reinforcement
enables the formation of plastic hinges so that redistribution of maximum moments can occur,
resulting in a safer and more economical structure.
To ensure rotation of the plastic hinges with sufficient yielding of the tension steel and also to
allow for other factors such as the strain hardening of the steel, Clause 5.5 in ES EN 2015 give
limits to the neutral axis depth at the ultimate limit state as a function of the amount of
redistribution carried out in the analysis.
 To design single reinforced section design procedure
Step 1: Take a strain distribution that results a ductile failure
Step 2: Use equilibrium of forces to estimate the value of kx
Step 3: If kx < kx limlim then compression reinforcement is not required and As = M/fyd*(1-βc)
If kx > kxlim designed as a double reinforced section.
Step 4: Check the minimum and maximum area of reinforcement

Analysis and design of doubly reinforced beam sections

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 246

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Occasionally, beam sections are designed to have both tension reinforcement and compression
reinforcement. These are referred to as doubly reinforced sections. Two cases where
compression reinforcement is used frequently are the negative bending region of continuous
beams and mid-span regions of long-span or heavily loaded beams where deflections need to be
controlled.
 The general procedure for the design of doubly reinforced beams according to ES EN 2015 is
using design chart is as follows.
Step 1: Take a strain distribution that results a ductile failure.
Step 2: Assume the section as having two part.
Step 3: Use equilibrium of forces to estimate the area of tension and compression
reinforcement.
Step 4: Check the minimum and maximum area of reinforcement.
 Reasons for providing compression reinforcement
There are four primary reasons for using compression reinforcement in beams:
Reduced sustained-load deflections: - First and most important, the addition of compression
reinforcement reduces the long-term deflections of a beam subjected to sustained loads. Creep of
the concrete in the compression zone transfers load from the concrete to the compression steel,
reducing the stress in the concrete: Because of the lower compression stress in the concrete, it
creeps less, leading to a reduction in sustained-load deflections.
Increased ductility:- The addition of compression reinforcement causes a reduction in the depth
of the compression stress block and the strain in the tension reinforcement at failure increases
resulting in more ductile behavior.
Change of mode of failure from compression to tension. When enough compression steel is
added to a beam, the compression zone is strengthened sufficiently to allow the tension steel to
yield before the concrete crushes. The beam then displays a ductile mode of failure.
Design of Beams
6.2. Cover Design for Beams
The concrete cover is the distance between the surface of the reinforcement closest to the nearest
concrete surface (including links, stirrups, and surface reinforcement where relevant) and the
nearest concrete surface.
Assumptions:

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 247

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

 Diameter of longitudinal bar = 20mm

 Diameter of stirrup = 10mm
 Nominal maximum aggregate size is less than 20 mm < 32 mm
 No special quality control on concrete production promised by the contractor
The nominal cover shall be specified on the drawings. It is defined as a minimum cover,
cmin(EA-EN 1992 see 4.4.1.2), plus an allowance in design for deviation, Δcdev(ES-EN 1992 see
4.4.1.3):
Cnom= Cmin+ΔCdev
The greater value for Cmin satisfying the requirements for both bond and environmental
Conditions shall be used.
cmin = max {Cmin,b; Cmin,dur + ΔCdur, ΔCdur,st – ΔCdur,add; 10 mm}
Note: The value of ΔCdev for use in a Country may be found in its National Annex. The
recommended value is 10 mm.
Cmin,b =20mm
Cmin,dur = 10mm
Cmin = max {20mm; 10mm, 10 mm}
Cmin = 20mm
Cnom = Cmin +ΔCdev from the above data we have listed cmin = 20mm, Δcdev = 10mm
Cnom = 20+10=30mm
Standard Fire resistance =15mm
Therefore, the governing Concrete design cover for beam is =30mm
6.3. Load on Beams
 Self-weight of beams
 Partition wall load on beams
 Transferring load from panels
Note: transferring load from panels is computed in the previous section on slab analysis and
design section you can refer from that section.
6.3.1. Dead load on the beam for each floor
 For roof one
Sample calculation for axis (1, A&C)

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 248

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

 Cross-section of the beam = 300*200mm

 Height of parfait =0.9m
 Thickness of HCB = 0.2m
 Thickness of plaster = 0.04m

γHCB = 14KN/m3

γplaster = 23KN/m3
self-weight of the beam = 0.2*0.3*25 = 1.5KN/m
dead load from parfait wall including plastering
= ((𝑇𝐻𝐶𝐵 ∗ 𝐻𝑝𝑎𝑟𝑎𝑓𝑎𝑖𝑡 ∗ 𝛾𝐻𝐶𝐵) + (𝑇𝑝𝑙𝑎𝑠𝑡𝑒𝑟 ∗ 𝐻𝑝𝑎𝑟𝑎𝑓𝑎𝑖𝑡 ∗ 𝛾𝑝𝑙𝑎𝑠𝑡𝑒𝑟))
= ((0.2*0.9*14)+(0.04*0.9*23)) = 3.35KN/m
Computation of the rest of the partition load to roof beam is computed as Tabular form as follow:
Table 6.55. computation of dead load from parfait wall on roof beam
T
H 𝛾 T 𝛾 Load from
position HCB 3 3
Parfait(m) HCB(KN/M ) Plaster Plaster(KN/M ) parfait(KN/M)

On axis(1, A&C) 0.9 0.2 14 0.04 23 3.35

On axis(2, A-E) 0.9 0.2 14 0.04 23 3.35
On axis(6, B-E) 0.9 0.2 14 0.04 23 3.35
On axis(7, B-E) 0.9 0.2 14 0.04 23 3.35
On axis(A, 1-3) 0.9 0.2 14 0.04 23 3.35
On axis(B, 3-6) 0.9 0.2 14 0.04 23 3.35
On axis(C, 1-2) 0.9 0.2 14 0.04 23 3.35
On axis(E, 2-7) 0.9 0.2 14 0.04 23 3.35

 for 4th floor beam

 Cross-section of the beam = 350*250mm
 Height of wall = 3.2m
 Thickness of HCB = 0.2m
 Thickness of plaster = 0.04m

γHCB = 14KN/m3

γplaster = 23KN/m3

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 249

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

self-weight of the beam = 0.25*0.35*25 = 2.19KN/m

dead load from parfait wall including plastering
= ((𝑇𝐻𝐶𝐵 ∗ 𝐻𝑝𝑎𝑟𝑎𝑓𝑎𝑖𝑡 ∗ 𝛾𝐻𝐶𝐵) + (𝑇𝑝𝑙𝑎𝑠𝑡𝑒𝑟 ∗ 𝐻𝑝𝑎𝑟𝑎𝑓𝑎𝑖𝑡 ∗ 𝛾𝑝𝑙𝑎𝑠𝑡𝑒𝑟))
= ((0.2*3.2*14)+(0.04*3.2*23)) = 11.904KN/m
Table 6.56. computation of dead load from partition wall on 4th floor beam
T
H 𝛾 T 𝛾 Load from
position HCB 3 3
Parfait(m) HCB(KN/M ) Plaster Plaster(KN/M ) parfait(KN/M)

On axis(1, A&C) 3.2 0.2 14 0.04 23 11.904

On axis(2, A-E) 3.2 0.2 14 0.04 23 11.904
On axis(3, A-E) 3.2 0.15 14 0.04 23 9.66
On axis(4, A-E) 3.2 0.15 14 0.04 23 9.66
On axis(5, B-E) 3.2 0.15 14 0.04 23 9.66
On axis(6, B-E) 3.2 0.2 14 0.04 23 11.904
On axis(7, B-E) 3.2 0.2 14 0.04 23 11.904
On axis(A, 1-3) 3.2 0.2 14 0.04 23 11.904
On axis(B, 3-6) 3.2 0.2 14 0.04 23 11.904
On axis(C, 1-2) 3.2 0.2 14 0.04 23 11.904
On axis(D, 2-7) 3.2 0.15 14 0.04 23 9.66
On axis(E, 2-7) 3.2 0.2 14 0.04 23 11.904

Table 6.57. computation of dead load from partition wall on 3rd floor beam
T
H 𝛾 T 𝛾 Load from
position HCB 3 3
Parfait(m) HCB(KN/M ) Plaster Plaster(KN/M ) parfait(KN/M)

On axis(1, A&C) 3.2 0.2 14 0.04 23 11.904

On axis(2, A-E) 3.2 0.2 14 0.04 23 11.904
On axis(3, A-E) 3.2 0.15 14 0.04 23 9.66
On axis(4, A-E) 3.2 0.15 14 0.04 23 9.66
On axis(5, B-E) 3.2 0.15 14 0.04 23 9.66
On axis(6, B-E) 3.2 0.2 14 0.04 23 11.904
On axis(7, B-E) 3.2 0.2 14 0.04 23 11.904

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 250

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

On axis(A, 1-3) 3.2 0.2 14 0.04 23 11.904

On axis(B, 3-6) 3.2 0.2 14 0.04 23 11.904
On axis(C, 1-2) 3.2 0.2 14 0.04 23 11.904
On axis(D, 2-7) 3.2 0.15 14 0.04 23 9.66
On axis(E, 2-7) 3.2 0.2 14 0.04 23 11.904

Table 6.58. computation of dead load from partition wall on 1st and 2nd floor beam
T
H 𝛾 T 𝛾 Load from
position HCB 3 3
Parfait(m) HCB(KN/M ) Plaster Plaster(KN/M ) parfait(KN/M)

On axis(1, A&C) 3.2 0.2 14 0.04 23 11.904

On axis(2, A-E) 3.2 0.2 14 0.04 23 11.904
On axis(3, A-E) 3.2 0.15 14 0.04 23 9.66
On axis(4, A-E) 3.2 0.15 14 0.04 23 9.66
On axis(5, B-E) 3.2 0.15 14 0.04 23 9.66
On axis(6, B-E) 3.2 0.2 14 0.04 23 11.904
On axis(7, B-E) 3.2 0.2 14 0.04 23 11.904
On axis(A, 1-3) 3.2 0.2 14 0.04 23 11.904
On axis(B, 3-6) 3.2 0.2 14 0.04 23 11.904
On axis(C, 1-2) 3.2 0.2 14 0.04 23 11.904
On axis(D, 2-7) 3.2 0.15 14 0.04 23 9.66
On axis(E, 2-7) 3.2 0.2 14 0.04 23 11.904

6.4. Design of beams for flexure

Sample design for top tie beam on axis D b/n axis 2&3
Step 1: determine design constants
For C-25/30 fck=25mpa
0.85∗𝑓𝑐𝑘 0.85∗25
𝑓𝑐𝑑 = = = 14.16
𝛾𝑐 1.5

For S-420 fyk=420mpa

𝑓𝑦𝑘 420
𝑓𝑦𝑑 = 𝛾𝑠
= 1.15 = 365.22

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 251

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building
𝑓𝑦𝑑 365.22
𝑚 = 0.8𝑓𝑐𝑑 = 0.8∗14.16 = 32.24

C1=2.5/m = 2.5/32.24 = 0.00775

C2 = 0.32*m2fcd = 0.32*32.242*14.16 = 4709.8mpa
0.8𝑓𝑐𝑑 𝑓𝑐𝑑 0.0035 14.16
𝜌𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 0.75𝜌𝑏 = 0.75 (𝜖𝑐𝑢+𝜖𝑦𝑑) (𝑓𝑦𝑑) = 0.75 (0.8 ∗ ) (365.22) = 0.015
365.22
0.0035+
2∗105

Step 2: Check depth for deflection

According to ES EN -2 2015(page 133) slab determination can be calculated by using the
following formula and consideration.
𝒍
= 𝑵 ∗ 𝑲 ∗ 𝑭𝟏 ∗ 𝑭𝟐 ∗ 𝑭𝟑
𝒅

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 252

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Table 6.59. Basic ratios of span/effective depth for reinforced concrete members without axial
compression

Taking L/d=26 for end span L/d = 30 for interior span from ES EN 1992:2015 9 table 7.4N
Where L= effective length of the beam
d = effective depth but those value is for steel grade 500,
We must have to modify it. In our case, Modification factor =500/500=1
 Provide Geometry Data
Width of beam, b = 250 mm
Gross depth of beam, d = 350 mm
Effective depth of beam, d = 300 mm
Effective length, Li = 4.89 m
Bar size = 24 or 20

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 253

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

 Provide Material Data

 Therefore, End span, 26*1=26
 Interior span, 30*1=30
 Cantilever, 8*1=8
 L= 4890mm
𝑙 4890
 For end span 𝑑 = 26 = = 188.07𝑚𝑚
26
𝑙 4890
 For interior span 𝑑 = 30 = = 163𝑚𝑚
30

 Positive moment on span 2&3 = 46.29KNm

Using Ф 16mm bar and clear cover of 30mm

Total depth of the beam = 188.07+16/2+30 = 226.07mm
DProvided = 350mm > Drequired = 226.07mm …okay!
Step 3: check depth for flexure
𝑀𝑚𝑎𝑥
𝑑 ≥ √0.8𝑏𝑓𝑐𝑑𝜌𝑚(1−0.4𝜌𝑚)

47.366∗106
𝑑 ≥ √0.8∗250∗14.16∗0.015∗32.24(1−0.4∗0.015∗32.24 = 258.77𝑚𝑚

D=d+d’ = 258.77+30+8+20/2 = 301.77mm< 350mm …okay!

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 254

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

 Using ETABS 2016 moment output we design our reinforcement area.

Figure 6.11. Bending moment diagram (M3-3 on axis D)

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 255

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Checking of T or rectangular beam at span and support:

Beam at the support are always rectangular beams, but beams at span should checked whether if
it is T-beam, rectangular beam, or inverted L beam. Before starting the analysis, first we have
check whether if the beam is T-beam analysis or rectangular analysis.

R- Beam T- Beam

Check whether the beam is singly or doubly reinforced:

 A beam should be treated as singly reinforced if K < 0.167.
 A beam should be treated as doubly reinforced if K > 0.167.
 d= effective depth-diameter of bar/2- concrete cover = 360-16/2-30 =312mm
𝑀𝑠𝑑 46.29∗106
𝑘 = (𝑑2 ∗𝑏∗𝑓𝑐𝑘) = 312∗312∗250∗25 = 0.076<0.167… single reinforced.

Reinforcement calculation:
i. Positive moment on span 3-2
Msd = 46.29KNm
𝑀𝑠𝑑 46.29∗106
𝜇𝑠𝑑 = 𝑓𝑐𝑑∗𝑏∗𝑑2 = 14.16∗250∗3002 = 0.134
𝑑 300
𝑍 = 2(1+√1−2𝜇 = 2(1+√1−2∗0.134 = 289.46
𝑠𝑑 )

𝑀 46.29∗106
𝐴𝑠𝑑 = 𝑓𝑦𝑑∗𝑍 = 365.22∗289.46 = 437.86𝑚𝑚2

Check for minimum and maximum reinforcement area:

𝑓𝑐𝑡𝑚
0.26 𝑏𝑡𝑑
𝐴𝑠𝑚𝑖𝑛 = max { 𝑓𝑦𝑘 }
0.0013𝑏𝑡𝑑
2.565
0.26 250 ∗ 300 = 123.61
= max { 420 }
0.0013 ∗ 250 ∗ 300 = 97.5
Asmin = 123.61mm2
2
𝐴𝑠𝑟𝑒𝑞 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 { 𝐴𝑠𝑐𝑎𝑙 = 437.86𝑚𝑚 2 }
𝐴𝑠𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 123.61mm

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 256

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Therefor Asreq = 437.86mm2

Asmax = 0.04Ac = 0.04*250*350 = 3500mm2 > 437.86mm2 ……..okay!!!
Therefore, 𝑨𝒔𝒎𝒊𝒏 ≤ 𝑨𝒔𝒄𝒂𝒍 ≤ 𝑨𝑺𝒎𝒂𝒙
Asprovided = Ascal = 437.86mm2
Number of bar:
𝐴𝑠𝑐𝑎𝑙
𝑛= 𝑎𝑠
𝜋∗∅2 3.14∗162
𝑎𝑠 = = = 201𝑚𝑚2
4 4
𝟒𝟑𝟕.𝟖𝟔
𝒏= = 𝟐. 𝟏𝟕𝟖 ≅ 𝟑𝒃𝒂𝒓𝒔
𝟐𝟎𝟏

Therefore, provide 3∅16

ii. Negative moment on axis 2
Msd = -45.46KNm
𝑀𝑠𝑑 45.46∗106
𝜇𝑠𝑑 = 𝑓𝑐𝑑∗𝑏∗𝑑2 = 14.16∗250∗3002 = 0.142
𝑑 300
𝑍 = 2(1+√1−2𝜇 = 2(1+√1−2∗0.142 = 276.925
𝑠𝑑 )

𝑀 45.46∗106
𝐴𝑠𝑑 = 𝑓𝑦𝑑∗𝑍 = 365.22∗276.925 = 449.48𝑚𝑚2

Check for minimum and maximum reinforcement area:

𝑓𝑐𝑡𝑚
0.26 𝑏𝑡𝑑
𝐴𝑠𝑚𝑖𝑛 = max { 𝑓𝑦𝑘 }
0.0013𝑏𝑡𝑑
2.565
0.26 250 ∗ 300 = 123.61
= max { 420 }
0.0013 ∗ 250 ∗ 300 = 97.5
Asmin = 123.61mm2
2
𝐴𝑠𝑟𝑒𝑞 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 { 𝐴𝑠𝑐𝑎𝑙 = 449.88𝑚𝑚 2 }
𝐴𝑠𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 123.61mm
Therefor Asreq = 449.88mm2
Asmax = 0.04Ac = 0.04*250*350 = 3500mm2 > 449.88mm2 ……..okay!!!
Therefore, 𝑨𝒔𝒎𝒊𝒏 ≤ 𝑨𝒔𝒄𝒂𝒍 ≤ 𝑨𝑺𝒎𝒂𝒙
Asprovided = Ascal = 449.88mm2
Number of bar:
𝐴𝑠𝑐𝑎𝑙
𝑛= 𝑎𝑠

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 257

 B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

𝜋∗∅2 3.14∗162
𝑎𝑠 = = = 201𝑚𝑚2
4 4
𝟒𝟒𝟗.𝟖𝟖
𝒏= = 𝟐. 𝟐𝟑 ≅ 𝟑𝒃𝒂𝒓𝒔
𝟐𝟎𝟏

Therefore, provide 3∅16

iii. Negative moment on axis 3
Msd = -47.36KNm
𝑀𝑠𝑑 47.36∗106
𝜇𝑠𝑑 = 𝑓𝑐𝑑∗𝑏∗𝑑2 = 14.16∗250∗3002 = 0.148
𝑑 300
𝑍 = 2(1+√1−2𝜇 )
= 2(1+√1−2∗0.148 = 2765.85
𝑠𝑑

𝑀 47.36∗106
𝐴𝑠𝑑 = 𝑓𝑦𝑑∗𝑍 = 365.22∗275.85 = 470.1𝑚𝑚2

Check for minimum and maximum reinforcement area:

𝑓𝑐𝑡𝑚
0.26 𝑏𝑡𝑑
𝐴𝑠𝑚𝑖𝑛 = max { 𝑓𝑦𝑘 }
0.0013𝑏𝑡𝑑
2.565
0.26 250 ∗ 300 = 123.61
= max { 420 }
0.0013 ∗ 250 ∗ 300 = 97.5
Asmin = 123.61mm2
2
𝐴𝑠𝑟𝑒𝑞 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 { 𝐴𝑠𝑐𝑎𝑙 = 470.1𝑚𝑚 2 }
𝐴𝑠𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 123.61mm
Therefor Asreq = 470.1mm2
Asmax = 0.04Ac = 0.04*250*350 = 3500mm2 > 470.1mm2 ……..okay!!!
Therefore, 𝑨𝒔𝒎𝒊𝒏 ≤ 𝑨𝒔𝒄𝒂𝒍 ≤ 𝑨𝑺𝒎𝒂𝒙
Asprovided = Ascal = 470.1mm2
Number of bar:
𝐴𝑠𝑐𝑎𝑙
𝑛= 𝑎𝑠
𝜋∗∅2 3.14∗162
𝑎𝑠 = = = 201𝑚𝑚2
4 4
𝟒𝟕𝟎.𝟏
𝒏= = 𝟐. 𝟑𝟑 ≅ 𝟑𝒃𝒂𝒓𝒔
𝟐𝟎𝟏

Therefore, provide 3∅16

Computation of the rest of the beam floor in Tabular form as follow.
Table 6.60. Flexural design for top tie beam on axis D
Type Loc M b d k z Beam Rein.. As, As, As, No provide

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 258

 B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

ation (KNm) type type cal min max of

bar
support 2 45.46 250 300 0.081 293.439 Rec Single 424.19 123.61 3500 2.10 3∅16

span 2,3 46.29 250 300 0.082 293.316 Rec Single 432.116 123.61 3500 2.14 3∅16
support 3 47.36 250 300 0.084 293.158 Rec Single 442.343 123.61 3500 2.19 3∅16
span 3,4 12.48 250 300 0.022 298.228 Rec Single 114.582 123.61 3500 0.57 2∅16
support 4 44.1 250 300 0.078 293.639 Rec Single 411.219 123.61 3500 2.04 3∅16
span 4,5 20.04 250 300 0.036 297.144 Rec Single 184.663 123.61 3500 0.91 2∅16
support 5 36.1 250 300 0.064 294.814 Rec Single 335.28 123.61 3500 1.66 2∅16
span 5,6 31.78 250 300 0.056 295.444 Rec Single 294.528 123.61 3500 1.46 2∅16
support 6 26.12 250 300 0.046 296.266 Rec Single 241.401 123.61 3500 1.20 2∅16
span 6,7 3.08 250 300 0.005 299.565 Rec Single 28.152 123.61 3500 0.14 2∅16
support 7 32.55 250 300 0.058 295.332 Rec Single 301.779 123.61 3500 1.49 2∅16

Table 6.61. Flexural design for top tie beam on axis 6

Loc M Beam Rein.. As As, No
Type b d k z As, cal provide
ation (KNm) type type ,min max of bar
support B 57.26 250 300 0.102 291.686 Rec Single 537.508 123.61 3500 2.66 3∅16

span B,D 62.1 250 300 0.110 290.961 Rec Single 584.394 123.61 3500 2.89 3∅16
support D 115.5 250 300 0.205 282.696 Rec Single 1118.69 123.61 3500 5.54 6∅16
span D,E 59.11 250 300 0.105 291.409 Rec Single 555.401 123.61 3500 2.75 3∅16
support E 23.1 250 300 0.041 296.703 Rec Single 213.176 123.61 3500 1.06 2∅16

Table 6.62. Flexural design for 4th floor beam on axis D

Loc M Beam Rein.. As, As, As, No
Type b d k z provide
ation (KNm) type type cal min max of bar

support 2 68.73 250 300 0.122 289.961 Rec Single 649.016 123.61 3500 3.21 4∅16

span 2,3 65.47 250 300 0.116 290.453 Rec Single 617.184 123.61 3500 3.06 4∅16
support 3 62.67 250 300 0.111 290.875 Rec Single 589.932 123.61 3500 2.92 3∅16
span 3,4 17.083 250 300 0.030 297.569 Rec Single 157.19 123.61 3500 0.78 2∅16
support 4 24.73 250 300 0.044 296.467 Rec Single 228.4 123.61 3500 1.13 2∅16
span 4,5 31.27 250 300 0.056 295.518 Rec Single 289.729 123.61 3500 1.43 2∅16
support 5 50.36 250 300 0.090 292.713 Rec Single 471.077 123.61 3500 2.33 3∅16
span 5,6 48.38 250 300 0.086 293.007 Rec Single 452.102 123.61 3500 2.24 3∅16
support 6 35.49 250 300 0.063 294.903 Rec Single 329.515 123.61 3500 1.63 2∅16

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 259

 B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

span 6,7 6.37 250 300 0.011 299.098 Rec Single 58.3142 123.61 3500 0.29 2∅16
support 7 42.29 250 300 0.075 293.906 Rec Single 393.983 123.61 3500 1.95 2∅16

Table 6.63. Flexural design for 4th floor beam on axis 5

Loc M Beam Rein.. As, As, No
Type b d k z As, cal provide
ation (KNm) type type min max of bar

support B 87.56 250 300 0.156 287.082 Rec Single 835.118 123.61 3500 4.13 5∅16

span B,D 64.98 250 300 0.116 290.527 Rec Single 612.409 123.61 3500 3.03 4∅16
support D 72 250 300 0.128 289.465 Rec Single 681.059 123.61 3500 3.37 4∅16
span D,E 84 250 300 0.149 287.631 Rec Single 799.635 123.61 3500 3.96 4∅16
support E 98 250 300 0.174 285.46 Rec Single 940.003 123.61 3500 4.65 5∅16

Table 6.64. Flexural design for 3rd floor beam on axis D

Loc M Beam Rein.. As, No
Type b d k z As, cal As,min provide
ation (KNm) type type max of bar

support 2 58.36 250 300 0.104 291.521 Rec Single 548.143 123.61 3500 2.71 3∅16

span 2,3 67.56 250 300 0.120 290.138 Rec Single 637.579 123.61 3500 3.16 4∅16
support 3 63.07 250 300 0.112 290.815 Rec Single 593.82 123.61 3500 2.94 3∅16
span 3,4 16.19 250 300 0.029 297.697 Rec Single 148.909 123.61 3500 0.74 2∅16
support 4 18.51 250 300 0.033 297.364 Rec Single 170.438 123.61 3500 0.84 2∅16
span 4,5 29.14 250 300 0.052 295.828 Rec Single 269.711 123.61 3500 1.34 2∅16
support 5 39.78 250 300 0.071 294.275 Rec Single 370.135 123.61 3500 1.83 2∅16
span 5,6 42.93 250 300 0.076 293.812 Rec Single 400.074 123.61 3500 1.98 2∅16
support 6 27.48 250 300 0.049 296.069 Rec Single 254.14 123.61 3500 1.26 2∅16
span 6,7 10.76 250 300 0.019 298.473 Rec Single 98.7087 123.61 3500 0.49 2∅16
support 7 36.62 250 300 0.065 294.738 Rec Single 340.197 123.61 3500 1.68 2∅16

Table 6.65. Flexural design for 3rd floor beam on axis 6

Loc M Beam Rein.. As, No
Type b d k z As, cal As,min provide
ation (KNm) type type max of bar

support B 57.3 250 300 0.101 291.725 Rec Single 534.996 123.61 3500 2.65 3∅16

span B,D 87.1 250 300 0.155 287.169 Rec Single 829.527 123.61 3500 4.11 5∅16
support D 102.7 250 300 0.181 284.833 Rec Single 980.524 123.61 3500 4.85 5∅16
span D,E 105.9 250 300 0.187 284.361 Rec Single 1011.04 123.61 3500 4.98 5∅16

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 260

 B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

support E 70.9 250 300 0.126 289.632 Rec Single 670.267 123.61 3500 3.32 4∅16

Table 6.66. Flexural design for 1st and 2nd floor beam on axis D
Loc M Beam Rein.. As, No
Type b d k z As, cal As,min provide
ation (KNm) type type max of bar

support 2 57.48 250 300 0.102 291.653 Rec Single 539.634 123.61 3500 2.67 3∅16

span 2,3 69.49 250 300 0.124 289.846 Rec Single 656.453 123.61 3500 3.25 4∅16
support 3 67.48 250 300 0.120 290.15 Rec Single 636.797 123.61 3500 3.15 4∅16
span 3,4 17.49 250 300 0.031 297.51 Rec Single 160.967 123.61 3500 0.80 2∅16
support 4 19.92 250 300 0.035 297.161 Rec Single 183.547 123.61 3500 0.91 2∅16
span 4,5 32.56 250 300 0.058 295.331 Rec Single 301.873 123.61 3500 1.49 2∅16
support 5 44.4 250 300 0.079 293.595 Rec Single 414.079 123.61 3500 2.05 3∅16
span 5,6 47.57 250 300 0.085 293.127 Rec Single 444.351 123.61 3500 2.20 3∅16
support 6 32.55 250 300 0.058 295.332 Rec Single 301.779 123.61 3500 1.49 2∅16
span 6,7 11.5 250 300 0.020 298.368 Rec Single 105.535 123.61 3500 0.52 2∅16
support 7 31.43 250 300 0.056 295.495 Rec Single 291.234 123.61 3500 1.44 2∅16

Table 6.67. Flexural design for 1st and 2nd floor beam on axis 5
Loc M Beam Rein.. As, No
Type b d k z As, cal As,min provide
ation (KNm) type type max of bar

support B 96 250 300 0.171 285.772 Rec Single 919.813 123.61 3500 4.55 5∅16

span B,D 106 250 300 0.188 284.204 Rec Single 1021.23 123.61 3500 4.89 5∅16
support D 70.35 250 300 0.125 289.716 Rec Single 664.876 123.61 3500 3.29 4∅16
span D,E 82.76 250 300 0.147 287.822 Rec Single 787.309 123.61 3500 3.90 4∅16
support E 80.89 250 300 0.144 288.109 Rec Single 768.753 123.61 3500 3.81 4∅16

Table 6.68. Flexural design for ground floor beam on axis D

Loc M Beam Rein.. As, No
Type b d k z As, cal As,min provide
ation (KNm) type type max of bar

support 2 80.75 250 300 0.144 288.13 Rec Single 767.365 123.61 3500 3.80 4∅16

span 2,3 66.38 250 300 0.118 290.316 Rec Single 626.058 123.61 3500 3.10 4∅16
support 3 78.96 250 300 0.140 288.405 Rec Single 749.642 123.61 3500 3.71 4∅16
span 3,4 17.49 250 300 0.031 297.51 Rec Single 160.967 123.61 3500 0.80 2∅16
support 4 33.88 250 300 0.060 295.138 Rec Single 314.316 123.61 3500 1.56 2∅16

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 261

 B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

span 4,5 31.9 250 300 0.057 295.427 Rec Single 295.658 123.61 3500 1.46 2∅16
support 5 54.66 250 300 0.097 292.074 Rec Single 512.419 123.61 3500 2.54 3∅16
span 5,6 45.17 250 300 0.080 293.481 Rec Single 421.423 123.61 3500 2.09 3∅16
support 6 45.89 250 300 0.082 293.375 Rec Single 428.295 123.61 3500 2.12 3∅16
span 6,7 9.25 250 300 0.016 298.688 Rec Single 84.7953 123.61 3500 0.42 2∅16
support 7 2.2 250 300 0.004 299.689 Rec Single 20.1002 123.61 3500 0.10 2∅16

Table 6.69. Flexural design for ground floor beam on axis 5

Loc M Beam Rein.. As, No
Type b d k z As, cal As,min provide
ation (KNm) type type max of bar

support B 96.67 250 300 0.172 285.668 Rec Single 926.572 123.61 3500 4.59 5∅16

span B,D 102.85 250 300 0.183 284.7 Rec Single 989.159 123.61 3500 4.90 5∅16
support D 97.75 250 300 0.174 285.499 Rec Single 937.477 123.61 3500 4.64 5∅16
span D,E 83.2 250 300 0.148 287.754 Rec Single 791.681 123.61 3500 3.92 4∅16
support E 97.71 250 300 0.174 285.505 Rec Single 937.073 123.61 3500 4.64 5∅16

6.5. Design of beam for shear

The concrete itself can resist shear by a combination of un-cracked concrete in the compression
zone. The dowelling action of the bending reinforcement and aggregate interlocking across
tension crack but, because concrete is weak in tension, the shear reinforcement is designed to
resist all the tensile stress caused by the shear force. Even where the shear force is small near the
Centre span of beam a minimum amount of reinforcement in the form of links must be provided
in order to form a cage supporting the longitudinal reinforcement and to resist any tensile
stresses due to factors such as thermal movement and shrinkage of concrete. Behavior of beams
without web reinforcement.

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 262

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Figure 6.12. Internal forces in a cracked beam without web reinforcement

Shear is transferred across line A-B-C by Vcy , the shear in the compression zone, by Vay , the
vertical component of the shear transferred across the crack by interlock of the aggregate articles
on the two faces of the crack, and by Vd , the dowel action of the longitudinal reinforcement.
Immediately after inclined cracking, as much as 40 to 60 percent of the total shear is carried by
Vd and Vay together.
Behavior of beams with web reinforcement
Inclined cracking causes the shear strength of beams to drop below the flexural capacity. The
purpose of web reinforcement is to ensure that the full flexural capacity can be
developed. Prior to inclined cracking, the strain in the web reinforcement is equal to the
corresponding strain of the concrete. Because concrete cracks at a very small strain, the stress in
the web reinforcements prior to inclined cracking will not exceed 3 to 6 ksi.
Thus, web reinforcements do not prevent inclined cracks from forming; they come into play after
the cracks have formed.
For the verification of the shear resistance, the following symbols are defined:
 VRd,c is the design shear resistance of the member without shear reinforcement.
 VRd,s is the design value of the shear force which can be sustained by the yielding shear
reinforcement.
 VRd,max is the design value of the maximum shear force which can be sustained by the
member, limited by crushing of the compression struts.
In regions of the member where VEd < VRd,c, no calculated shear reinforcement is necessary.
VEd is the design shear force in the section considered resulting from external loading and
restressing (bonded or unbonded).When, on the basis of the design shear calculation, no shear

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 263

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

reinforcement is required, minimum shear reinforcement should nevertheless be provided

according to 9.2.2.
In regions where VEd > VRd,c, sufficient shear reinforcement should be provided in order that

Figure 6.13. Shear force diagram of beam in axis D

VEd < VRd .

Sample example design shear on axis A b/n 2&3 at for roof story.

1. Concrete capacity

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 264

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

The design value for the shear resistance VRd, c is given by:
1
𝑉Rd, c = [𝐶Rd, c𝐾(100  𝑓ck)3 + 𝑘1cp] 𝑏w𝑑

With a minimum of
𝑉Rd, c = (𝑉𝑚𝑖𝑛 + 𝐾1𝜎𝐶𝑃)𝑏𝑤𝑑
Where:
 fck = 25mpa
200 200
 k= 1+ √ ≥ 2.0 = 1 + √300 = 1.8 < 2 … 𝑜𝑘𝑎𝑦!
𝑑

 𝑉𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 0.035 ∗ 𝑘 3⁄2 ∗ 𝑓𝑐𝑘 1⁄2 = 0.4226

 Ast is the area of the tensile reinforcement = 437.29mm2
 bw is the smallest width of the cross-section in the tensile area (mm) take one meter strip
=250mm
𝐴𝑠 𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑣𝑖𝑑𝑒𝑑 437.29
𝜌1 = ≤ 0.02 = 0.00583 < 0.02 … 𝑖𝑡𝑠 𝑜𝑘𝑒𝑦 𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒𝑓𝑜𝑟𝑒 𝜌 = 0.00583
𝑏𝑤𝑑 250 ∗ 300
 Ac is the area of concrete cross-section (mm2)
𝑁𝑒𝑑
 𝜎𝑐𝑝 = = 0𝑁
𝐴𝑠

 𝑁𝑒𝑑: −𝑖𝑠 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑎𝑥𝑖𝑎𝑙 𝑓𝑜𝑟𝑐𝑒 𝑖𝑛 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑐𝑟𝑜𝑠𝑠 𝑠𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 𝑑𝑢𝑒 𝑡𝑜 𝑙𝑜𝑎𝑑𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑜𝑟 𝑝𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑠𝑖𝑛𝑔 [𝑖𝑛 𝑁](𝑁𝑒𝑑 >
0 𝑓𝑜𝑟 𝑐𝑜𝑝𝑚𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑠𝑖𝑜𝑛). 𝑇ℎ𝑒 𝑖𝑛𝑓𝑙𝑢𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑒 𝑜𝑓 𝑖𝑚𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑑 𝑑𝑒𝑓𝑜𝑟𝑚𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛𝑠 𝑜𝑛 𝑁ï` 𝑚𝑎𝑦 𝑏𝑒 𝑖𝑔𝑛𝑜𝑟𝑒𝑑. 𝐴𝑐
Is the area of concrete cross section [mm2].
0.18 0.18
 𝐶Rd, c = = = 0.12
𝛾𝑐 1.5

 K1=0.15
1
 𝑉Rd, c = [𝐶Rd, c𝐾(100  𝑓ck)3 + 𝑘1cp] 𝑏w𝑑

= [0.12*1.8(100*0.00583 ∗25)1/3 + 0.15*0] 250 ∗ 300 =39571.68N = 39.57KN

 𝑉Rd, c = (𝑉𝑚𝑖𝑛 + 𝐾1𝜎𝐶𝑃)𝑏𝑤𝑑
= (0.4226+ 0.15*0) 250 ∗ 300 = 3169.5N = 31.69KN
 Maximum shear acting take 39.57KN
Max Vsd is = 72.07KN
 Thus, VRd,c < Vsd…. 39.57KN > 72.07KN…. ..not OK!
 Hence, shear reinforcement is required.

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 265

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

2. Maximum shear strength of the section

𝑓𝑐𝑑
𝑉𝑅𝐷,𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 𝛼𝑐𝑤 ∗ 𝑏𝑤 ∗ 𝑧 ∗ 𝑣1 ∗ 𝑐𝑜𝑡𝜃+𝑡𝑎𝑛𝜃

Where:
𝛼𝑐𝑤 = 1 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑐𝑜𝑡𝜃 = 2.5
𝑏𝑤 =250mm
Z=0.9*d = 0.9*300 = 270
𝑓𝑐𝑘 25
𝑓𝑐𝑑 = 0.85 ∗ = 0.85 ∗ 1.5 = 14.16
𝛾𝑐
𝑓𝑐𝑘 25
𝑣1 = 0.6 (1 − 250) = 0.6 (1 − 250) = 0.54
𝟏𝟒.𝟏𝟔
𝑽𝑹𝑫,𝒎𝒂𝒙 = 𝟏 ∗ 𝟐𝟓𝟎 ∗ 𝟐𝟕𝟎 ∗ 𝟎. 𝟓𝟒 ∗ 𝟐.𝟓+𝟎.𝟒 = 𝟑𝟎𝟗. 𝟖 > 𝒗𝒆𝒅 = 𝟕𝟐. 𝟎𝟕 … 𝒐𝒌𝒂𝒚!

3. Calculate the required shear reinforcement

The ratio of shear reinforcement is given by;

Where:

0.08√𝑓𝑐𝑘 0.08√25
𝜌𝑤.𝑚𝑖𝑛 = ( )=( ) = 0.000952
𝑓𝑦𝑘 420

Where α is the inclination of the shear reinforcement to the longitudinal axis of the beam.
Sl,max =0.75*300( 1+ cot 90) = 167mm
The maximum longitudinal spacing of bent-up bars should not exceed. Sl,max.
Sl,max = 0.6d( 1 + cot α) = 0.6*300(1+cot90) =146mm
[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 266
B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

The transverse spacing of the legs in a series of shear links should not exceed Sl,max
Sl,max = 0.75d = 0.75*300 = 225mm < 600mm
The transverse spacing of the legs in a series of shear links should not exceed Sl,max
𝜋∗∅2 3.14∗8∗8
𝐴𝑠𝑤 = = = 50.24𝑚𝑚2
4 4
𝐴𝑠𝑤 50.24
𝑆𝐼, 𝑚𝑖𝑛 = (𝜌𝑤∗𝑏𝑤∗𝑠𝑖𝑛𝛼) = (0.000952∗250∗𝑠𝑖𝑛90) = 227.89𝑚𝑚
𝐴𝑠𝑤 𝑉𝑒𝑑
= 0.78∗𝑑∗𝑓𝑦𝑘∗𝑐𝑜𝑡𝜃
𝑠
𝐴𝑠𝑤∗0.78∗𝑓𝑦𝑘∗𝑐𝑜𝑡𝜃 50.24∗0.78∗250∗420∗2.5
𝑆𝑐𝑎𝑙 = = = 186.46𝑚𝑚
𝑉𝑒𝑑 72.07

Therefore, provide 8 ϕ c /c 180

6.6. Anchorages and laps
The design bond stress is limited to a value depending on the surface characteristics of the
reinforcement, the tensile strength of the concrete and confinement of surrounding concrete. This
depends on cover, transverse reinforcement and transverse pressure.
The length necessary for developing the required tensile force in an anchorage or lap is
calculated on the basis of a constant bond stress.
6.6.1. Anchorage of longitudinal reinforcement
Reinforcing bars, wires or welded mesh fabrics shall be so anchored that the bond forces
are safely transmitted to the concrete avoiding longitudinal cracking or spalling.
Transverse reinforcement shall be provided if necessary.
Methods of anchorage are shown in Figure below:

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 267

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Figure 6.14. Methods of anchorage other than by a straight bar (ES-EN 2 2015, 8.4)

The ultimate bond strength shall be sufficient to prevent bond failure. The design value of the
ultimate bond stress, fbd, for ribbed bars may be taken as:

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 268

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

fctd: is the design value of concrete tensile strength, fctd = fctk/1.5 = 0.8587
𝜇1 = 1
𝜇2 𝑖𝑠 𝑟𝑒𝑙𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑑 𝑡𝑜 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑏𝑎𝑟 𝑑𝑖𝑎𝑚𝑒𝑡𝑒𝑟 𝑇ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒𝑓𝑜𝑟𝑒 𝜇2 = 1.0 𝑠𝑖𝑛𝑐𝑒 ∅ = 16𝑚𝑚 ≤ 32𝑚𝑚
fbd = 2.25*1*1 *0.8587 = 1.93Mpa
Basic anchorage length
The calculation of the required anchorage length shall take into consideration the type of steel
and bond properties of the bars. The basic required anchorage length, lb,rqd, for anchoring the
force As,σsd in a straight bar assuming constant bond stress equal to fbdfollows from:
𝑙𝑏, 𝑟𝑞𝑑 = (∅/ 4) (𝜎𝑠𝑑/ 𝑓𝑏𝑑)
Where:
σsd is the design stress of the bar at the position from where the anchorage is measured from.

Design anchorage length

The design anchorage length, lbd, is:
lbd = α1 ∗ α2 ∗ α3 ∗ α5∗ α6 lb,rqd ≥ lb,min
Where:
𝛼1, 𝛼2, 𝛼3, 𝛼4, 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝛼5 𝑎𝑟𝑒 𝑐𝑜𝑒𝑓𝑓𝑖𝑐𝑖𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑠
𝛼1 = 𝑖𝑠 𝑓𝑜𝑟 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑒𝑓𝑓𝑒𝑐𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑓𝑜𝑟𝑚 𝑜𝑓 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑏𝑎𝑟𝑠 𝑎𝑠𝑠𝑢𝑚𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑎𝑑𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑎𝑡𝑒 𝑐𝑜𝑣𝑒𝑟
𝛼2 = 𝑖𝑠 𝑓𝑜𝑟 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑒𝑓𝑓𝑒𝑐𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑐𝑟𝑒𝑡𝑒 𝑚𝑖𝑛𝑖𝑚𝑢𝑚 𝑐𝑜𝑣𝑒𝑟
𝛼3 = 𝑖𝑠 𝑓𝑜𝑟 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑒𝑓𝑓𝑒𝑐𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑓𝑖𝑛𝑒𝑚𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑏𝑦 𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑛𝑠𝑣𝑒𝑟𝑠𝑒 𝑟𝑒𝑖𝑛𝑓𝑜𝑟𝑐𝑒𝑚𝑒𝑛𝑡
𝛼4 = 𝑖𝑠 𝑓𝑜𝑟 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑖𝑛𝑓𝑙𝑢𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑒 𝑜𝑓 𝑜𝑛𝑒 𝑜𝑟 𝑚𝑜𝑟𝑒 𝑤𝑒𝑙𝑑𝑒𝑑 𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑛𝑠𝑣𝑒𝑟𝑠𝑒 𝑏𝑎𝑟𝑠 (∅𝑡 > 0.6∅)
𝑎𝑙𝑜𝑛𝑔 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑑𝑒𝑠𝑖𝑔𝑛 𝑎𝑛𝑐ℎ𝑜𝑟𝑎𝑔𝑒 𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡ℎ 𝑙𝑏𝑑
𝛼5 = 𝑖𝑠 𝑓𝑜𝑟 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑒𝑓𝑓𝑒𝑐𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑝𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑒 𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑛𝑠𝑣𝑒𝑟𝑠𝑒 𝑡𝑜 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑝𝑙𝑎𝑛𝑒 𝑜𝑓 𝑠𝑝𝑙𝑖𝑡𝑡𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑎𝑙𝑜𝑛𝑔 𝑡ℎ𝑒
𝑑𝑒𝑠𝑖𝑔𝑛 𝑎𝑛𝑐ℎ𝑜𝑟𝑎𝑔𝑒 𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡ℎ
𝑇ℎ𝑒 𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑑𝑢𝑐𝑡 (𝛼2 𝛼3 𝛼5) ≥ 0.7

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 269

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Table 6.70. value of α1,α2,α3,α4,and α5 coefficients

lbd = α1 ∗ α2 ∗ α3 ∗ α5 ∗ α6 lb.rqd ≥ lb,min 1x0.7x0.7x0.7x0.7x901.098= 216.35mm

For anchorages in tension:
 lb,min ≥ max{0.3lb,rqd ; 10∅; 100 mm}
 lb,min ≥ max{0.3x901.098=270.33mm ; 10∅ =200mm; 100 mm}
lb,min ≥ max{270mm; 200mm; 100 mm}
lb,min ≥ 270mm

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 270

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

For anchorages in compression:

 lb,min ≥ max{0.3lb,rqd ; 10∅; 100 mm}
 lb,min ≥ max{0.3x901.098=270.33mm ; 10∅ =200mm; 100 mm}
lb,min ≥ max{270mm; 200mm; 100 mm}
lb,min ≥ 270mm
The design anchorage length, lbd, is:
For tension, lbd =280mm
For compression, lbd =280mm
6.6.2. Laps
 Forces are transmitted from one bar to another by:
 Lapping of bars, with or without bends or hooks;
 Welding;
 Mechanical devices assuring load transfer in tension-compression or in compression
only.
 The detailing of laps between bars shall be such that:
 The transmission of the forces from one bar to the next is assured;
 Spalling of the concrete in the neighborhood of the joints does not occur;
 Large cracks which affect the performance of the structure do not occur.
 between bars should normally be staggered and not located in areas of high moments
/forces(e.g. plastic hinges).
 at any section should normally be arranged symmetrically.
 The arrangement of lapped bars should comply with Figure below
 The clear distance between lapped bars should not be greater than 4∅ or 50 mm,
otherwise the lap length should be increased by a length equal to the clear space where it
exceeds 4∅ or 50 mm;
 The longitudinal distance between two adjacent laps should not be less than 0.3 times the
lap length,l0;
 In case of adjacent laps, the clear distance between adjacent bars should not be less than
2∅ or 20 mm.

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 271

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Figure 6.15. Adjacent laps

6.6.2. Lap Length
The design lap length is:
lo= α1 ∗ α2 ∗ α3 ∗ α5 ∗ α6 lb.rqd ≥ lo,min
Where:
lb.rqd is basic anchorage length
lo,min ≥ max {0.3 α6 lb.rqd; 15∅; 200 mm}
Values of α1, α2, α3 and α5 may be taken from table;
α6 = Values of α6 are given in Table below.
Table 6.71. Values of the coefficient

 L0 = α1 ∗ α2 ∗ α3 ∗ α5 ∗ α6 lb.rqd ≥ lb.min
= 1*0.7*0.7*0.7*1.4&901.098 =432.707mm≥ lo,min
 Lo,min ≥ max {0.3 α6 lb,rqd; 15∅; 200 mm}
 lo,min ≥ max {0.3*1.4∗ 901.098 = 378.461mm; 15∗ 16 =240mm; 200 mm}
 Therefore, Take l0 = 380mm

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 272

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 273

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 274

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 275

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 276

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 277

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

CHAPTER SEVEN
ANALYSIS AND DESIGN OF COLUMN
7.1. Introduction
A column is a vertical structural member transmitting axial compression loads with or without
moments. The cross sectional dimensions of a column are generally considerably less than its
height. Column support mainly vertical loads from the floors and roof and transmit these loads to
the foundation.
A structural element with a ratio of height-to-least lateral dimension exceeding three
used primarily to support compressive loads is defined as column. Columns support
vertical loads from the floor and roof slabs and transfer these loads to the footings. Columns
usually support compressive loads with or without bending. Depending on the magnitude of
the bending moment and the axial force, column behavior will vary from pure beam
action to pure column action.
The strength of a column depends on many factors including the following:
 The strength of the material
 Shape and size of the cross section
 Length
 The degree of positional and directional restraints at its end
Classification of columns
 Classification on the basis of degree of slenderness; short column, slender (long) column.
Short columns usually fail when their materials are overstressed. Long columns usually
fail due to buckling which produces secondary moments resulting.
 Classification on the basis of lateral stability is provided to the structure as a whole;
braced or un braced column. Axial column; column subjected to axial loads accompanied
by bending about one axis whereas biaxial, for column support axial force and bending
about two perpendicular axes. A braced structure is one which contain bracing elements.
These are vertical elements usually walls, which are so stiff relative to other vertical
elements that may be assumed to be attract all horizontal forces. Braced structure may be
defined as one where the bracing elements attract and transmits to the foundations, at
least 90% of all horizontal forces applied to the structure.

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 278

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

 Classification based on lateral reinforcement; tied columns, spiral columns. Columns are
usually reinforced with longitudinal and transverse reinforcement. When this
transverse reinforcement is in the form of ties, the column is called “tied”. If
the transverse reinforcement is in the form of helical hoops, the column is called
“spirally
 Classification on the basis of geometry; rectangular, square, circular, spiral etc.
depending on the structural or architectural requirements.

Types of columns: a) tie columns b) Spiral columns and c) Composite columns

For the purpose of design calculations, frames may be classified as sway or non-sway
depending on their sensitivity to second order effect due to lateral displacements.
 A frame may be classified as non-sway if its response to in-plane horizontal
forces is sufficiently stiff for it to be acceptably accurate to neglect any additional internal
forces or moments arising from horizontal displacements of its nodes.
 Any other frame shall be classified as a sway frame and the effects of horizontal
displacements of it nodes shall be taken in to account in its design.
 A frame may be classified as non-sway for a given load case if the critical load ratio
Nsd/Ncr for that load case satisfies the criterion:
Nsd Ncr  0.1

Where,

Nsd - design value of the total vertical load

Ncr - its critical value for failure in a sway mode
In a braced building the columns will not be required to resist the lateral loading and
hence the deflected shape of such columns under load is,

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 279

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

 Beam and column type plane frames in building structures with beams connecting
each column at each story level may be classified as non -sway for a given load case,
when first- order theory is used, the horizontal displacements in each story due to the
design loads (both horizontal and vertical), plus the initial sway imperfection satisfy the
criterion of the following equation.
N
 0.1
HL
Where,

- the horizontal displacement at the top of story, relative to the bottom of the story

L - the story height

H - the total horizontal reaction at the bottom of the story

N - the total vertical reaction at the bottom of the story

Slenderness
 = Lo/i i = I /A
Where,
 - Effective buckling length
i - Radius of gyration of the gross concrete section in the plane of buckling

Limits of slenderness

The Code states that second order (slenderness) effects may be ignored if they are less than 0%
of the corresponding first order effects, or as an alternative for isolated members if the
slenderness ratio, λ is less than λlim given by:

 lim = 20ABC/n
Where,

A = 1/ (1+0.2eff)  if eff not known take A = 0.7

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 280

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

B = 1/ (1+2)0.5  if  not known take B = 1.1

C = 1.7 – rm  if rm not known take C = 0.7

 = NEd/ (Ac fcd)

eff is the effective creep ration =   (, t )M 0 Eqp / M 0 Ed

M 0Eqp is the 1st order moment due to quasi-permanent load combination (SLS)

M 0 Ed is the 1st order moment due to design load combination (ULS)

 is mechanical reinforcement ratio  As f yd / ( Ac fcd )

rm is the moment ratio  M 01 / M 02

M 01 , M 02 are the 1st order end moment, M 02  M 01

 M1 and M2 are the first order (calculated) moments at the ends, M2 being always
positive and greater in magnitude than M1, and M1 being positive if member is bent in
single curvature and negative if bent is double curvature.

7.2. Design of Columns

 The combinations used for the analysis and design for columns are the same as the ones used
during frame analysis.
 To account for accidental eccentricity resulting from misalignment of reinforcement,
voids in the concrete section, unbalanced moments in the beam, or misalignment of
columns from one floor to another, reduce the strength of tied columns

7.2.1. Design procedure

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 281

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 282

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Figure 7.1. Axial force on axis D

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 283

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Figure 7.2. Moment 2-2 on axis D

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 284

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Sample design of column for C-8, C16 & C20

7.2.2. Uniaxial column design for C-8(interior column)
 Location of sample design column is ground floor to first floor on axis “3-D”. The label
name of the column is C-8 as indicated in figure.

Figure 7.3. First floor column layout

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 285

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Geometrical data

 Cross-sections of column = 550 X 300 mm

 Length or height of column = 3.5 m
 Concrete used is C-30/37 and rebar S-420
 Along X-direction

 Cross-sections of top beam (left side), bbt, L/dbt, L= 350 X 250 mm

 Cross-sections of bottom beam (right side), bbb, R/dbb, R = 250 X 350 mm
 Cross-sections of top beam (right side), bbt, L/dbt, L= 350 X 250 mm
 Cross-sections of bottom beam (right side), bbb, R/dbb, R = 250 X 350 mm
 Length of top beam (left side) in X-direction, Lbt, L = 6.372 m
 Length of top beam (right side) in X-direction, Lbt, R = 5.39m
 Length of bottom beam (left side) in X-direction, Lbb, L = 6.372 m
 Length of bottom beam (right side) in X-direction, Lbb, R = 5.39 m

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 286

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

 Along Y-direction

 Cross-sections of top beam (left side), bbt, L/dbt, L= 350 X 250 mm

 Cross-sections of top beam (right side), bbb, R/dbb, R = 350 X 250 mm
 Cross-sections of bottom beam (left side), bbt, R/dbt, R= 350 X 250 mm
 Cross-sections of Bottom beam (right side), bbb, R/dbb, R = 350 X 250 mm
 Length of top beam (left side) in Y-direction, Lbt, L = 3.3 m
 Length of top beam (right side) in Y-direction, Lbt, R = 4.89 m
 Length of bottom beam (left side) in Y-direction, Lbb, L = 3.3 m
 Length of bottom beam (right side) in Y-direction, Lbb, R = 4.89 m

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 287

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Analysis Data:

Figure 7.4. Combo envelop max axial force

 Maximum axial load (NEd) = 1948.62 KN

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 288

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

 Along X- direction

Figure 7.5. Envelop max shear 2-2

Figure 7.6. Envelop max moment 2-2

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 289

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

 Top end moment = 34.65 KN.m

 Bottom end moment = 11.98 KN.m
 Along Y- direction

Figure 7.7. Envelop max shear 2-2

Figure 7.8. Envelop max moment 2-2

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 290

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

 Top end moment = 34.64 KN.m

 Bottom end moment = 11.98 KN.m
Check slenderness limit

Along the X- direction

 Slenderness limit
lim = 20 ABC /sqrt ()  take A= 0.7 B= 1.1 C= 1.7 - rm

rm = mol /mo2  in the X direction  mol = 34.65 KN m, m02 = -11.98 KN m

rm = 34.65/-11.98 = -2.89

C = 1.7- rm => 1.7- (-2.89) = 4.59

 = (NEd *103)/ (Ac*fcd) = (1948.62KN*103)/ (550*300*17)

 = 0.69

lim. = 20 ABC / ()

lim. = 20*(0.7*1.1*4.5) / (0.69)0.5

lim. = 85.2

 Effective length
For braced members

1𝑥 𝐾 2𝑥𝐾
𝑙𝑜𝑥 = 0.5𝑙√[1 + 0.5+𝐾 ] [1 + 0.5+𝐾 ]
1𝑥 2𝑥

𝐶𝑜𝑙𝑢𝑚𝑛 𝑆𝑡𝑖𝑓𝑓𝑛𝑒𝑠
𝐾=
∑ 𝐵𝑒𝑎𝑚 𝑆𝑡𝑖𝑓𝑓𝑛𝑒𝑠𝑠

(EI⁄l) column
Ki =
∑(2 ∗ EI⁄l) beam

I x, column = (300*5503)/12 = 415937500 mm4

Ix, beam (top) = (250*3503)/12 = 893229116.7 mm4

(EI⁄l) column
K1x =
∑(2∗EI⁄l ) beam
top

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 291

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

(4159375000 ∗ E⁄3500)
K1x, = = 1.94
(2 ∗ (893229116.7E⁄6370 + 893229116.7𝐸/5390))

I x, column = (300*5503)/12 = 4159375000 mm4

Ix, beam (bottom) = (250*3503)/12 = 893229116.7 mm4
(EI⁄l) column
K 2x =
∑ (2 ∗ EI⁄l ) beam
bottom

(4159375000 ∗ E⁄3500)
K 2x, = = 1.94
((893229116.7E⁄5000 + 89322116.7𝐸/5390) ∗ 2)

1.94 1.94
lox = 0.5 ∗ 3500√[1 + ] ∗ [1 + ]
0.5 + 1.94 0.5 + 1.94

lox = 3150 mm

lox⁄ I 415375000
λx = i Where, i = √A = √ = 158.77
165000

λx = 3150⁄158.77 = 19.84 < lim. = 85.2, the column is short!

Along the Y- direction

 Slenderness limit
lim = 20 ABC /sqrt ()  take A= 0.7 B= 1.1 C= 1.7 - rm

rmy = mol /mo2  in the Y direction  mol = 34.65 KN m, m02 = -11.48 KN m

rm = 34.65/-11.48 = -2.89

C = 1.7- 5.6 => 1.7- (-2.89) = 4.59

 = (NEd *103)/ (Ac*fcd) = (1948.62*103)/ (550*300*17)

 = 0.69

lim. = 20 ABC / ()

lim. = 20*(0.7*1.1*4.59) / (0.69)0.5

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 292

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

lim. = 85.2

 Effective length
For braced members

𝐾1𝑦 𝐾2𝑦
𝑙𝑜𝑦 = 0.5𝑙√[1 + ] [1 + ]
0.5 + 𝐾1𝑦 0.5 + 𝐾2𝑦

𝐶𝑜𝑙𝑢𝑚𝑛 𝑆𝑡𝑖𝑓𝑓𝑛𝑒𝑠
𝐾=
∑ 𝐵𝑒𝑎𝑚 𝑆𝑡𝑖𝑓𝑓𝑛𝑒𝑠𝑠

(EI⁄l) column
Ki =
∑(2 ∗ EI⁄l) beam

I y, column = (300*5503)/12 = 4159375000 mm4

Iy, beam (top) = (250*3503)/12 = 893229166.7 mm4

(EI⁄l) column
K1y =
∑ (2 ∗ EI⁄l ) beam
top

(4159375000 ∗ E⁄3500)
K1y = = 1.3
(2(893229166.7 ∗ E⁄3300 + 893229166.7 ∗ 𝐸/4890))

I y, column = (300*5503)/12 = 4159375000 mm4

Iy, beam (bottom) = (250*3503)/12 = 893229166.7 mm4

(EI⁄l) column
K 2y =
∑ (2 ∗ EI⁄l ) beam
bottom

(4159375000 ∗ E⁄3500)
K 2y = = 1.3
(2(893229166.7 ∗ E⁄3300 + 893229166.7 ∗ 𝐸/4890 ))

1.3 1.3
loy = 0.5 ∗ 3500√[1 + ] ∗ [1 + ]
0.5 + 1.3 0.5 + 1.3

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 293

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

loy = 3010 mm

loy I 4159375000
λy = ⁄ Where, i = √A = √ = 158.77
i 300∗550

λy = 3010⁄158.77 = 18.96 < lim. = 85.2, the column is short!

Accidental eccentricity

Along the X - direction

eax = lox /400 = 3150/400 = 7.88 mm

Along the Y- direction

eay = loy /400 = 3010/400 = 7.5 mm

Equivalent 1st order eccentricity

Along the X - direction

0.6𝑒02 + 0.4𝑒01
𝑒𝑒 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 {
0.4𝑒02

eo2 = m02/NEd = -11.98*106/1948.62*103 = -6.15 mm

e01 = m01/ NEd = 34.65*106 /1948.62*103 = 17.78 mm

0.6𝑒02 + 0.4𝑒01 0.6 ∗ (−6.15 + 0.4 ∗ 17.78 3.42

𝑒𝑒𝑥 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 { = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 { = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 {
0.4𝑒02 0.4 ∗ (−6.15) −2.46

eex = 3.42 mm
Along the Y- direction

0.6𝑒02 + 0.4𝑒01
𝑒𝑒 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 {
0.4𝑒02

eo2 = m02/NEd = -11.98*106/1948.62*103 = -6.15 mm

e01 = m01/ NEd = 34.65*106 /1948.62*103 = 17.78 mm

0.6𝑒02 + 0.4𝑒01 0.6 ∗ (−6.15) + 0.4 ∗ 517.78 3.42

𝑒𝑒𝑦 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 { = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 { = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 {
0.4𝑒02 0.4 ∗ (−6.15) −2.46

eey = 3.42 mm
Second order moment
[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 294
B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Along the x - direction

Because the column is short e2 = 0

e tot = eax+eex+e2 = 7.88+3.42+0 = 11.3 mm

Check with, e = eo2+ea = -6.15+7.88= 1.73 mm

So, take etot = 11.3 mm

Msdy = Nsd * etot = (1948.62*11.3)/1000 = 22.02 kN.m

µsdy = Msdy/ (fcd*b*d2)

µsdy = (22.02*106)/ (17*300*5502)

µsdy = 0.014

Along the y - direction

Here also e2 = 0, because the column is short

e tot = eay+eey+e2

etot = 7.5+3.42+0= 10.92 mm

Check with, e = e02 +e a = -6.15+7.5= 1.35 mm

So take e tot = 10.92 mm

Msd x = Nsd*e tot = (1948.62*10.92)/1000 = 19.49 kN.m

µsd, x = (19.49*106)/ (17*300*5502)

µsd, x = 0.012

Vsd = Nsd / (ac * fcd) = (1948.62*103)/ (17*300*550) = 0.69

Using = h’/h = b’/b = 0.1 read mechanical steel ratio from uniaxial interactions chart for

Vsd = 0.69 µsd x = 0.012 µsd y = 0.014

Interpolating between Vsd = 0.7 and 1 𝜛 = 0.1

As, tot = (𝜛 *fcd*b*d)/ fyd

As, tot = (0.1*17*300*550)/356.22

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 295

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

As, tot= 787.43 mm2

As, in side of column = As, tot/4 = 787.43/4 = 196.86 mm2 per one side of column.

Check with maximum and minimum reinforcement limit

0.1𝑁𝐸𝐷 (0.1∗1948.62)∗1000
= = 547.03 mm2
𝐴𝑠,𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 { 𝑓𝑦𝑑 356.22
0.002𝐴𝐶 = 0.002 ∗ 300 ∗ 550 = 330 𝑚𝑚2

As, min = 547.03 mm2

As, max = 0.08*AC = 0.08*300*550

As, max = 13200 mm2

The final provided area of steel As, used = max (196.86; 547.03) = 547.03 mm2
2 2
Use diameter of bar for column 16 mm, 𝑎𝑠 = 𝜋 ∗ 𝑑 ⁄4 = 𝜋 ∗ 16 ⁄4 = 201.06 𝑚𝑚2

𝐴𝑠,𝑢𝑠𝑒𝑑
No of bar = ⁄𝑎 = 547.03⁄201.06 = 2.7, 𝑢𝑠𝑒 3 𝑛𝑢𝑚𝑏𝑒𝑟 𝑜𝑓 𝑏𝑎𝑟 𝑖𝑛 𝑜𝑛𝑒 𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑒 𝑐𝑜𝑙𝑢𝑚𝑛.
𝑠

Provide total number of bars, 12∅16 in all face of columns. Longitudinal bars

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 296

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

7.2.3. Biaxial column design for C-16(corner column)

 Location of sample design column is ground floor to first floor on axis “2-E”. The label
name of the column is C-16 as indicated in figure 1.
Geometrical data
 Cross-sections of column = 450 X 300 mm
 Length or height of column = 3.5 m
 Concrete used is C-30/37 and rebar S-400
 Along X-direction

 Cross-sections of top beam (left side), bbt, L/dbt, L= 350 X 250 mm

 Cross-sections of bottom beam (right side), bbb, R/dbb, R = no beam
 Cross-sections of top beam (right side), bbt, L/dbt, L= no beam
 Cross-sections of bottom beam (left side), bbb, R/dbb, R = 350 X 250 mm
 Length of top beam (left side) in X-direction, Lbt, L = 5.39 m

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 297

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

 Length of top beam (right side) in X-direction, Lbt, R = 0 m

 Length of bottom beam (left side) in X-direction, Lbb, L = 5.39 m
 Length of bottom beam (right side) in X-direction, Lbb, R = 0 m
 Along Y-direction

 Cross-sections of top beam (left side), bbt, L/dbt, L= 350mm x 250mm

 Cross-sections of top beam (right side), bbb, R/dbb, R = no beam
 Cross-sections of bottom beam (left side), bbt, R/dbt, R= 350mm x 250mm
 Cross-sections of Bottom beam (right side), bbb, R/dbb, R = no beam
 Length of top beam (left side) in Y-direction, Lbt, L = 4.89 m
 Length of top beam (right side) in Y-direction, Lbt, R = 0 m
 Length of bottom beam (left side) in Y-direction, Lbb, L = 4.89 m
 Length of bottom beam (right side) in Y-direction, Lbb, R = 0 m

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 298

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Analysis Data

Figure 7.9. Envelop max axial force for C-16

 Maximum axial load (NEd) = 1105.5 KN

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 299

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

 Along X- direction

Figure 7.10. Envelop max moment 2-2 for C-16

 Top end moment = 24.51 KN.m
 Bottom end moment = 59.42 KN.m
 Along Y- direction

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 300

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

 Top end moment = 42.56 KN.m

 Bottom end moment = 64.32 KN.m

Check slenderness limit

Along the X- direction

 Slenderness limit
lim = 20 ABC /sqrt ()  take A= 0.7 B= 1.1 C= 1.7 - rm

rm = mol /mo2  in the X direction  mol = -24.5 KN m, m02 = 59.42 KN m

rm = -24.5/59.42 = -0.41

C = 1.7- rm => 1.7- (-0.41) = 12.11

 = (NEd *103)/ (Ac*fcd) = (1105.56*103)/ (135000*7)

 = 0.48

lim. = 20 ABC / ()

lim. = 20*(0.7*1.1*2.11) / (0.48)0.5

lim. = 46.9

 Effective length
For braced members

𝐾1𝑥 𝐾2𝑥
𝑙𝑜𝑥 = 0.5𝑙√[1 + ] [1 + ]
0.5 + 𝐾1𝑥 0.5 + 𝐾2𝑥

𝐶𝑜𝑙𝑢𝑚𝑛 𝑆𝑡𝑖𝑓𝑓𝑛𝑒𝑠
𝐾=
∑ 𝐵𝑒𝑎𝑚 𝑆𝑡𝑖𝑓𝑓𝑛𝑒𝑠𝑠

(EI⁄l) column
Ki =
∑(2 ∗ EI⁄l) beam

I x, column = (300*4503)/12 = 2278125000 mm4

Ix, beam (top) = (250*3503)/12 = 893229166.7 mm4

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 301

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

(EI⁄l) column
K1x =
∑ (2 ∗ EI⁄l ) beam
top

(2278125000 ∗ E⁄3500)
K1x, = = 1.96
((893229166.7E⁄5390)2)

I x, column = (300*4503)/12 = 2278125000 mm4

Ix, beam (bottom) = (250*3503)/12 = 893229166.7 mm4

(EI⁄l) column
K 2x =
∑ (2 ∗ EI⁄l ) beam
bottom

(2278125000 ∗ E⁄3500)
K 2x, = = 4.466
((893229166.7 E⁄5000) ∗ 2)

1.96 1.96
lox = 0.5 ∗ 3500√[1 + ] ∗ [1 + ]
0.5 + 1.96 0.5 + 1.96

lox = 3150 mm

lox⁄ I 2278125000
λx = i Where, i = √A = √ = 129.9
300∗450

λx = 3150⁄129.9 = 24.25 < lim. = 46.9, the column is short!

Along the Y- direction

 Slenderness limit
lim = 20 ABC /sqrt ()  take A= 0.7 B= 1.1 C= 1.7 - rm

rmy = mol /mo2  in the Y direction  mol = -42.56 KN m, m02 = 64.32 KN m

rm = -42.56/64.32 = -0.66

C = 1.7- 5.6 => 1.7- (-0.66) = 2.36

 = (NEd *103)/ (Ac*fcd) = (1105.56*103)/ (300*450*17)

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 302

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

 = 0.48

lim. = 20 ABC / ()

lim. = 20*(0.7*1.1*2.36) / (0.48)0.5

lim. = 52.46

 Effective length
For braced members

𝐾1𝑦 𝐾2𝑦
𝑙𝑜𝑦 = 0.5𝑙√[1 + ] [1 + ]
0.5 + 𝐾1𝑦 0.5 + 𝐾2𝑦

𝐶𝑜𝑙𝑢𝑚𝑛 𝑆𝑡𝑖𝑓𝑓𝑛𝑒𝑠
𝐾=
∑ 𝐵𝑒𝑎𝑚 𝑆𝑡𝑖𝑓𝑓𝑛𝑒𝑠𝑠

(EI⁄l) column
Ki =
∑(2 ∗ EI⁄l) beam

I y, column = (450*3003)/12 = 1012500000mm4

Iy, beam (top) = (250*3503)/12 = 893229166.7 mm4

(EI⁄l) column
K1y =
∑ (2 ∗ EI⁄l ) beam
top

(1012500000 ∗ E⁄3500)
K1y = = 0.79
(2(893229166.7 ∗ E⁄4890))

I y, column = (450*3003)/12 = 1012500000mm4

Iy, beam (bottom) = (250*3503)/12 = 893229166.7 mm4

(EI⁄l) column
K 2y =
∑ (2 ∗ EI⁄l ) beam
bottom

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 303

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

(1012500000 ∗ E⁄3500)
K 2y = = 0.79
(2(893229166.7 ∗ E⁄4890))

0.79 0.79
loy = 0.5 ∗ 3500√[1 + ] ∗ [1 + ]
0.5 + 0.79 0.5 + 0.7

loy = 2400 mm

loy I 1012500000
λy = ⁄ Where, i = √A = √ = 86.6
i 300∗450

λy = 2400⁄86.6 = 27.7 < lim. = 52.46, the column is short!

Accidental eccentricity

Along the X - direction

eax = lox /400 = 3150/400 = 7.88mm

Along the Y- direction

eay = loy /400 = 2400/400 = 6 mm

Equivalent 1st order eccentricity

Along the X - direction

0.6𝑒02 + 0.4𝑒01
𝑒𝑒 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 {
0.4𝑒02

eo2 = m02/NEd = 59.42*106/1105.56*103 = 53.57 mm

e01 = m01/ NEd = -24,5*106 /1105.56*103 = -22.16 mm

0.6𝑒02 + 0.4𝑒01 0.6 ∗ 53.75 + 0.4 ∗ (−22.16) 23.39

𝑒𝑒𝑥 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 { = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 { = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 {
0.4𝑒02 0.4 ∗ 77.12 21.5

eex = 23.39 mm
Along the Y- direction

0.6𝑒02 + 0.4𝑒01
𝑒𝑒 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 {
0.4𝑒02

eo2 = m02/NEd = 64.32*106/1105.56*103 = 58.18 mm

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 304

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

e01 = m01/ NEd = -42.56*106 /1105.56*103 = -38.5 mm

0.6𝑒02 + 0.4𝑒01 0.6 ∗ 58.18 + 0.4 ∗ (−38.5) 19.5

𝑒𝑒𝑦 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 { = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 { = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 {
0.4𝑒02 0.4 ∗ 58.18 23.27

eey = 23.27 mm
Second order moment

Along the x - direction

Because the column is short e2 = 0

e tot = eax+eex+e2 = 7.88+23.39+0 = 31.7 mm

Check with, e = eo2+ea = 53.75+7.88 = 61.63 mm

So, take etot = 61.63 mm

Msdy = Nsd * etot = (1105.56*61.63)/1000 = 68.16 kN.m

µsdy = Msdy/ (fcd*b*d2)

µsdy = (68.16*106)/ (17*300*4502)

µsdy = 0.066

Along the y - direction

Here also e2 = 0, because the column is short

e tot = eay+eey+e2

etot = 6+23.27+0= 29.27 mm

Check with, e = e02 +e a = 58.18+6= 64.18 mm

So take e tot = 64.18 mm

Msd x = Nsd*e tot = (1105.56*64.18)/1000 = 70.95 kN.m

µsd, x = (70.95*106)/ (17*300*4502)

µsd, x = 0.069

Vsd = Nsd / (ac * fcd) = (1105.56*103)/ (17*300*450) = 0.48

Using = h’/h = b’/b = 0.1 read mechanical steel ratio from biaxial interactions chart for

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 305

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Vsd = 0.48 µsd x = 0.069 µsd y = 0.066

Interpolating between Vsd = 0.5 and 1 𝜛 = 0.1

As, tot = (𝜛 *fcd*b*d)/ fyd

As, tot = (0.1*17*300*450)/365.22

As, tot= 628.39 mm2

As, in side of column = As, tot/4 = 628.39/4 = 157.09 mm2 per side of column.

Check with maximum and minimum reinforcement limit

0.1𝑁𝐸𝐷 (0.1∗1105.56)∗1000
= = 302.7 mm2
𝐴𝑠,𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 { 𝑓𝑦𝑑 365.22
0.002𝐴𝐶 = 0.002 ∗ 300 ∗ 450 = 270𝑚𝑚2

As, min = 302.7 mm2

As, max = 0.08*AC = 0.08*300*450

As, max = 10800mm2

The final provided area of steel As, used = max (157.09; 302.7) = 302.7 mm2
2 2
Use diameter of bar for column 16 mm, 𝑎𝑠 = 𝜋 ∗ 𝑑 ⁄4 = 𝜋 ∗ 16 ⁄4 = 201.06 𝑚𝑚2

𝐴𝑠,𝑢𝑠𝑒𝑑
No of bar = ⁄𝑎 = 302.7⁄201.06 = 1.51, 𝑢𝑠𝑒 2 𝑛𝑢𝑚𝑏𝑒𝑟 𝑜𝑓 𝑏𝑎𝑟 𝑖𝑛 𝑜𝑛𝑒 𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑒 𝑐𝑜𝑙𝑢𝑚𝑛.
𝑠

Provide total number of bars, 8∅16 in all face of columns. Longitudinal bars

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 306

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

7.2.4. Uniaxial column design for C-20(edge column)

 Location of sample design column is ground floor to first floor on axis “4-B”. The label
name of the column is C-20 as indicated in figure 1.
Geometrical data
 Cross-sections of column = 600 X 400 mm
 Length or height of column = 3.5 m
 Concrete used is C-30/37 and rebar S-400
 Along X-direction

 Cross-sections of top beam (left side), bbt, L/dbt, L= no beam

 Cross-sections of bottom beam (right side), bbb, R/dbb, R = 350x250 mm
 Cross-sections of top beam (right side), bbt, L/dbt, L= no beam
 Cross-sections of bottom beam (right side), bbb, R/dbb, R = 350x250 mm
 Length of top beam (left side) in X-direction, Lbt, L = 0 m
 Length of top beam (right side) in X-direction, Lbt, R = 6.42 m
 Length of bottom beam (left side) in X-direction, Lbb, L = 0 m

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 307

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

 Length of bottom beam (right side) in X-direction, Lbb, R = 6.42 m

 Along Y-direction

 Cross-sections of top beam (left side), bbt, L/dbt, L= 350x250mm

 Cross-sections of top beam (right side), bbb, R/dbb, R = 350x250mm
 Cross-sections of bottom beam (left side), bbt, R/dbt, R= 350x250mm
 Cross-sections of Bottom beam (right side), bbb, R/dbb, R = 350x250mm
 Length of top beam (left side) in Y-direction, Lbt, L = 3.74 m
 Length of top beam (right side) in Y-direction, Lbt, R = 3.3 m
 Length of bottom beam (left side) in Y-direction, Lbb, L = 3.74 m
 Length of bottom beam (right side) in Y-direction, Lbb, R = 3.3 m

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 308

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Analysis Data

Figure 7.11. Envelop max axial force for C-20

 Maximum axial load (NEd) = 1660.97 KN

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 309

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

 Along X- direction

Figure 7.12. Envelop max moment 2-2 for C-20

 Top end moment = 13.17 KN.m

 Bottom end moment = 120.11 KN.m

Check slenderness limit

Along the X- direction

 Slenderness limit
lim = 20 ABC /sqrt ()  take A= 0.7 B= 1.1 C= 1.7 - rm

rm = mol /mo2  in the X direction  mol = -13.17 KN m, m02 = 120.11 KN m

rm = -13.17/120.11 = 0-0.1

C = 1.7- rm => 1.7- (-0.1)= 1.8

 = (NEd *103)/ (Ac*fcd) = (1660.97*103)/ (600*400*17)

 = 0.407

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 310

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

lim. = 20 ABC / ()

lim. = 20*(0.7*1.1*1.8) / (0.407)0.5

lim. = 43.45

 Effective length
For braced members

𝐾1𝑥 𝐾2𝑥
𝑙𝑜𝑥 = 0.5𝑙√[1 + ] [1 + ]
0.5 + 𝐾1𝑥 0.5 + 𝐾2𝑥

𝐶𝑜𝑙𝑢𝑚𝑛 𝑆𝑡𝑖𝑓𝑓𝑛𝑒𝑠
𝐾=
∑ 𝐵𝑒𝑎𝑚 𝑆𝑡𝑖𝑓𝑓𝑛𝑒𝑠𝑠

(EI⁄l) column
Ki =
∑(2 ∗ EI⁄l) beam

I x, column = (400*6003)/12 = 7200000000 mm4

Ix, beam (top) = (250*3503)/12 = 893229166.7 mm4

(EI⁄l) column
K1x =
∑ (2 ∗ EI⁄l ) beam
top

(7200000000 ∗ E⁄3500)
K1x, = = 7.39
(2 ∗ (893229166.7 ∗ E⁄6420))

I x, column = (400*6003)/12 = 7200000000 mm4

Ix, beam (bottom) = (250*3503)/12 = 893229166.7 mm4

(EI⁄l) column
K 2x =
∑ (2 ∗ EI⁄l ) beam
bottom

(7200000000 ∗ E⁄3500)
K 2x, = 7.39
(2 ∗ (893229166.7 ∗ E⁄6420))

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 311

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

7.39 7.39
lox = 0.5 ∗ 3500√[1 + ] ∗ [1 + ]
0.5 + 7.39 0.5 + 7.39

lox = 3395 mm

lox⁄ I 7200000000
λx = i Where, i = √A = √ = 173.21
600∗400

λx = 3395⁄173.21 = 19.6 < lim. = 43.45, the column is short!

Along the Y- direction

 Slenderness limit
lim = 20 ABC /sqrt ()  take A= 0.7 B= 1.1 C= 1.7 - rm

rmy = mol /mo2  in the Y direction  mol = -13.17 KN m, m02 = 120.11 KN m

rm = -13.17/120.11 = -0.1

C = 1.7- (-0.1) = 1.8

 = (NEd *103)/ (Ac*fcd) = (1660.97*103)/ (600*400*17)

 = 0.407

lim. = 20 ABC / ()

lim. = 20*(0.7*1.1*1.8) / (0.74)0.5

lim. = 43.45

 Effective length
For braced members

𝐾1𝑦 𝐾2𝑦
𝑙𝑜𝑦 = 0.5𝑙√[1 + ] [1 + ]
0.5 + 𝐾1𝑦 0.5 + 𝐾2𝑦

𝐶𝑜𝑙𝑢𝑚𝑛 𝑆𝑡𝑖𝑓𝑓𝑛𝑒𝑠
𝐾=
∑ 𝐵𝑒𝑎𝑚 𝑆𝑡𝑖𝑓𝑓𝑛𝑒𝑠𝑠

(EI⁄l) column
Ki =
∑(2 ∗ EI⁄l) beam

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 312

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

I y, column = (600*4003)/12 = 3200000000 mm4

Iy, beam (top) = (250*3503)/12 = 893229166.7 mm4

(EI⁄l) column
K1y =
∑ (2 ∗ EI⁄l ) beam
top

(3200000000 ∗ E⁄3500)
K1y = = 0.9
(2(893229166.7 ∗ E⁄3740 + 893229166.7 ∗ 𝐸/3300))

I y, column =(600*4003)/12 = 3200000000 mm4

Iy, beam (bottom) = (250*3503)/12 = 893229166.7 mm4

(EI⁄l) column
K 2y =
∑ (2 ∗ EI⁄l ) beam
bottom

(3200000000 ∗ E⁄3500)
K 2y = = 0.9
(2(893229166.7 ∗ E⁄3740 + 893229166.7 ∗ 𝐸/3300))

0.9 0.9
loy = 0.5 ∗ 3500√[1 + ] ∗ [1 + ]
0.5 + 0.9 0.5 + 0.9

loy = 2870 mm

loy I 3200000000
λy = ⁄ Where, i = √A = √ = 115.47
i 400∗600

λy = 2870⁄115.47 = 24.85 < lim. = 43.45, the column is short!

Accidental eccentricity

Along the X - direction

eax = lox /400 = 3395/400 = 8.48 mm

Along the Y- direction

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 313
B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

eay = loy /400 = 2870/400 = 7.175mm

Equivalent 1st order eccentricity

Along the X - direction

0.6𝑒02 + 0.4𝑒01
𝑒𝑒 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 {
0.4𝑒02

eo2 = m02/NEd =120.11*106/1660.97*103 = 72.3 mm

e01 = m01/ NEd = -13.17*106 /1660.97*103 = -7.93 mm

0.6𝑒02 + 0.4𝑒01 0.6 ∗ 72.3 + 0.4 ∗ (−7.93) 40.2

𝑒𝑒𝑦 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 { = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 { = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 {
0.4𝑒02 0.4 ∗ 72.3 28.92

eex = 40.2 mm

Along the Y- direction

0.6𝑒02 + 0.4𝑒01
𝑒𝑒 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 {
0.4𝑒02

eo2 = m02/NEd =120.11*106/1660.97*103 = 72.3 mm

e01 = m01/ NEd = -13.17*106 /1660.97*103 = -7.93 mm

0.6𝑒02 + 0.4𝑒01 0.6 ∗ 72.3 + 0.4 ∗ (−7.93) 40.2

𝑒𝑒𝑦 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 { = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 { = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 {
0.4𝑒02 0.4 ∗ 72.3 28.92

eey = 40.2 mm
Second order moment

Along the x - direction

Because the column is short e2 = 0

e tot = eax+eex+e2 = 8.48+40.2+0 = 48.68 mm

Check with, e = eo2+ea =72.3+8.48 = 80.78 mm

So, take etot = 80.78 mm

Msdy = Nsd * etot = (1660.97*80.78)/1000 = 134.17 kN.m

µsdy = Msdy/ (fcd*b*d2)

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 314

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

µsdy = (134.17*106)/ (17*400*6002)

µsdy = 0.055

Along the y - direction

Here also e2 = 0, because the column is short

e tot = eay+eey+e2

etot = 7.18+40.2+0= 47.38 mm

Check with, e = e02 +e a = 72.3+7.18= 79.48 mm

So take e tot = 79.48 mm

Msd x = Nsd*e tot = (1660.97*79.48)/1000 =132.02 kN.m

µsd, x = (132.02*106)/ (17*600*4002)

µsd, x = 0.081

Vsd = Nsd / (ac * fcd) = (1660.97*103)/ (17*400*600) = 0.41

Using = h’/h = b’/b = 0.1 read mechanical steel ratio from biaxial interactions chart for

Vsd = 0.41 µsd x = 0.08 µsd y = 0.055

Interpolating between Vsd = 0.41 and 1 𝜛 = 0.1

Using = h’/h = b’/b = 0.1 read mechanical steel ratio from uniaxial interactions chart for

Vsd = 0.41 µsd x = 0.081 µsd y = 0.

Interpolating between Vsd = 0.41 and 1 𝜛 = 0.1

As, tot = (𝜛 *fcd*b*d)/ fyd

As, tot = (0.1*17*400*600)/365.22

As, tot= 1117.13 mm2

As, in side of column = As, tot/4 = 1117.13/4 = 279.28 mm2 per side of column.

Check with maximum and minimum reinforcement limit

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 315

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building
0.1𝑁𝐸𝐷 (0.1∗1660.97)∗1000
= = 454.79 mm2
𝐴𝑠,𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 { 𝑓𝑦𝑑 365.22
0.002𝐴𝐶 = 0.002 ∗ 600 ∗ 400 = 480𝑚𝑚2

As, min = 480 mm2

As, max = 0.08*AC = 0.08*400*600

As, max = 19200 mm2

The final provided area of steel As, used = max (279.28; 480) = 480 mm2
2 2
Use diameter of bar for column 16 mm, 𝑎𝑠 = 𝜋 ∗ 𝑑 ⁄4 = 𝜋 ∗ 16 ⁄4 = 201.06 𝑚𝑚2

𝐴𝑠,𝑢𝑠𝑒𝑑
No of bar = ⁄𝑎 = 480⁄201.06 = 2.38, 𝑢𝑠𝑒 3 𝑛𝑢𝑚𝑏𝑒𝑟 𝑜𝑓 𝑏𝑎𝑟 𝑖𝑛 𝑜𝑛𝑒 𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑒 𝑐𝑜𝑙𝑢𝑚𝑛.
𝑠

Provide total number of bars, 12∅16 in all face of columns. Longitudinal bars

Table 7.1. Reinforcement design for footing column C-8,C-16 and C-20
Col M no of
umn Ned top M bot λlim λ check Msd Vsd usd As tot Asmin bar provide
C8 2353.00 3.17 -3.37 46.37 22.63 short 7.40 0.77 0.00 1256.79 644.27 2.05 12∅20
c16 1353.00 3.45 -1.60 81.53 21.34 short 5.07 0.53 0.00 1047.32 370.46 1.18 8∅20
c20 260.00 1.83 -0.99 216.23 18.80 short 0.56 0.06 0.00 1675.71 71.19 1.33 8∅20

Table 7.2. Reinforcement design for basement column C-8,C-16 and C-20
Col M M no of
umn Ned top bot λlim λ check Msd Vsd usd As tot Asmin bar provide
C8 2333.00 27.68 -5.94 112.17 24.14 short 13.76 0.76 0.01 1256.79 638.80 2.03 12∅20
c16 1274.00 18.14 25.43 52.58 22.75 short -27.16 0.50 -0.02 1047.32 348.83 1.11 8∅20
c20 253.00 2.71 -1.48 218.37 20.12 short 0.19 0.06 0.00 1675.71 69.27 1.33 8∅20

Table 7.3. Reinforcement design for first floor column C-8,C-16 and C-20
Col M no of
umn Ned top M bot λlim λ check Msd Vsd usd As tot Asmin bar provide
C8 1567.00 40.10 -9.46 116.67 29.07 short 10.77 0.61 0.01 1047.32 429.06 2.13 12∅16
c16 937.00 57.00 -18.57 108.38 27.16 short -1.40 0.46 0.00 837.86 256.56 1.28 8∅16
c20 13.14 45.95 -25.83 883.09 27.23 short -22.86 0.00 -0.01 1466.25 3.60 1.82 8∅16

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 316

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Table 7.4. Reinforcement design for second floor column C-8,C-16 and C-20
Col M no of
umn Ned top M bot λlim λ check Msd Vsd usd As tot Asmin bar provide
C8 1189.00 39.70 -8.10 141.24 28.55 short 10.27 0.52 0.01 942.59 325.56 1.62 8∅16
c16 771.00 59.21 -12.86 157.92 27.16 short 7.64 0.38 0.01 837.86 211.11 1.05 8∅16
c20 965.00 49.90 -5.30 336.98 24.95 short 18.43 0.26 0.01 1536.07 264.23 1.91 8∅16

Table 7.5. Reinforcement design for third floor column C-8,C-16 and C-20
Co M no of
lumn Ned top M bot λlim λ check Msd Vsd usd As tot Asmin bar provide
C8 839.30 32.31 -9.32 124.05 27.98 short 3.10 0.41 0.00 837.86 229.81 1.49 8∅14
c16 624.64 48.80 -14.46 141.23 27.16 short 0.06 0.31 0.00 837.86 171.03 1.36 8∅14
c20 657.07 46.17 -22.70 130.80 24.62 short -13.18 0.19 -0.01 1396.43 179.91 2.27 12∅14

Table 7.6. Reinforcement design for forth floor column C-8,C-16 and C-20
Co M no of
lumn Ned top M bot λlim λ check Msd Vsd usd As tot Asmin bar provide
C8 487.38 33.23 -19.92 106.12 24.63 short -15.98 0.24 -0.02 837.86 133.45 1.36 8∅14
c16 224.97 66.39 -50.53 139.77 23.89 short -53.13 0.11 -0.07 837.86 61.60 1.36 8∅14
c20 325.46 74.33 -51.53 148.39 21.25 short -50.72 0.11 -0.04 1256.79 89.11 2.04 12∅14

Table 72.7. Reinforcement design for roof floor column C-8,C-16 and C-20
Col M no of
umn Ned top M bot λlim λ check Msd Vsd usd As tot Asmin bar provide
C8 246.10 16.52 -8.68 159.76 20.47 short -6.19 0.12 -0.01 837.86 67.38 1.36 8∅14
c20 69.64 25.31 -15.65 319.27 17.25 short -14.57 0.03 -0.01 1117.14 19.07 1.81 8∅14

7.3. Lateral reinforcement for column

We do not need to design shear reinforcement for columns but we have to provide them because
of the following reasons:
 They hold the longitudinal bars in position in the forms while the concrete is being placed
 They prevent the slender longitudinal bars from buckling out ward by bursting the thin
concrete cover.

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 317

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

For reinforced concrete section to resist shear force ties are used as transverse
reinforcement. The diameter of the transverse reinforcement should not be less than 6mm or one
quarter of the maximum diameter of the longitudinal bars. The diameter of transverse
reinforcement should not be less than 6mm or one quarter of the longitudinal bars:
For shear reinforcement
𝟏𝟔
¼ ∗ 𝒍𝒐𝒏𝒈𝒊𝒕𝒖𝒅𝒊𝒏𝒂𝒍 𝒃𝒂𝒓 𝒅𝒊𝒂𝒎𝒆𝒕𝒆𝒓 = = 𝟒𝒎𝒎
𝑫𝒊𝒂𝒎𝒆𝒕𝒆𝒓 𝒐𝒇 𝒃𝒂𝒓 = 𝒎𝒂𝒙 { 𝟒 }
𝟔𝒎𝒎
Provide diameter of stirrup 8mm.
The transverse reinforcement should be anchored adequately.
The spacing of the transverse reinforcement along the column should not exceed scl,tmax
Note:For the value of scl,tmax, refer to the National Annex. The recommended value is the least
of the following three distances:
20 ∗ ∅𝑙𝑜𝑛𝑔, = 20 ∗ 16𝑚𝑚 = 320𝑚𝑚
𝑆𝑝𝑎𝑐𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑜𝑓 𝑠ℎ𝑒𝑎𝑟 𝑟𝑒𝑖𝑛𝑓𝑜𝑟𝑐𝑒𝑚𝑒𝑛𝑡 = 𝑚𝑖𝑛 {𝑙𝑒𝑠𝑠𝑒𝑟 𝑑𝑖𝑚𝑒𝑛𝑠𝑖𝑜𝑛 𝑜𝑓 𝑐𝑜𝑙𝑢𝑚𝑛 = 300𝑚𝑚 }
400𝑚𝑚
Finally, provide ∅8 c/c 300mm

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 318

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 319

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

CHAPTER EIGHT
SHEAR WALL ANALYSIS AND DESIGN
8.1. INTRODUCTION
Shear walls are plain or reinforced concrete walls that contribute to lateral stability of the
structure. Shear walls are solid walls, which usually extend over the full height of the
building. Specially designed reinforced concrete walls parallel to the directions of load
are used to resist a large part of the lateral loads caused by wind or earthquakes by
acting as deep cantilever beams fixed at foundation. Frequently buildings have interior
concrete core walls around the elevator, stair and service wells. Such walls may be considered as
shear walls. S hear walls are also frequently placed along the transverse direction of a building,
either as exterior (facade) walls or as interior walls.

Figure 8.16. 3D model of shear wall

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 320

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

The advantages of shear walls are:

i. They are very rigid in their own plane and hence are effective in limiting
Deflections.
ii. They act as fire compartment walls.
In the analysis and design of shear wall:
 Lateral load resisted by each shear wall in a structure should be obtained from a global
analysis of the structure, taking into account the applied loads, the eccentricities
of the loads with respect to the shear center of the structure and the interaction
between the different structural walls.
 The effects of asymmetry of wind loading should be considered (see ES- EN 1991-1-4).
 The combined effects of axial loading and shear should be taken into account.
 In addition to other serviceability criteria in this code, the effect of sway of shear walls on
the occupants of the structure should also be considered, (see ES - EN 1990).
 In the case of building structures not exceeding 25 stores, where the plan layout of the
walls is reasonably symmetrical, and the walls do not have openings causing
significant global shear deformations, the lateral load resisted by a shear wall may
be obtained as follows:

 If members with and without significant shear deformations are combined in the bracing
system, the analysis should take into account both shear and flexural deformation.
 Lift wall or shear wall has to resist the shear loads and vertical loads as well as external
moments, which will cause the concrete to wear off and reinforcement to expose to the
environment.

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 321

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

 Spandrel wall :- in concrete or steel construction, an exterior beam extending from

column to column usually carrying an exterior wall load is called spandrel.
Shear walls must provide the necessary lateral strength to resist horizontal earthquake forces.
When shear walls are strong enough, they will transfer these horizontal forces to the next
element in the load path below them. These other components in the load path may be other
shear walls, floors, foundation walls, slabs or footings.
Shear walls also provide lateral stiffness to prevent the roof or floor above from excessive side-
sway. When shear walls are stiff enough, they will prevent floor and roof framing members from
moving off their supports. In addition, buildings that are sufficiently stiff will usually suffer less
nonstructural damage.
In this project the analysis of shear wall is done by ETABS 2016
8.2. Design procedures
 Determination of concrete cover
 Determing of design loads from etabs
 Check resistance of crosssection
𝑁,𝑅𝐷 = 𝜂𝑓𝑐𝑑 ∗ 𝑏 ∗ ℎ𝑤 ∗ (1 − 2𝑒/ℎ𝑤) … . 𝑓𝑜𝑟 𝑎𝑥𝑖𝑎𝑙 𝑏𝑒𝑛𝑑𝑖𝑛𝑔
𝑊ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒 ∶ − 𝜂 = 1 … … 𝑓𝑜𝑟 𝑓𝑐𝑘 ≤ 50𝑀𝑝𝑎
𝑁𝑒𝑑
𝑒= 𝑀𝑒𝑑

 Reinforcement calculation
𝑁𝐸𝐷 6𝑀𝐸𝐷
𝛿 = 𝐿𝑤∗𝑏𝑤 ± 𝑏𝑤𝐿𝑤 2

𝛿𝑚𝑎𝑥 ≤ 0.57𝑓𝑐𝑘 + (𝐴𝑠𝑐𝐿𝑤𝑏𝑤)0.87𝑓𝑦𝑘

 Compare with maximum and minimum vertical horizontal and transvers reinforcement of
calculated & codal value
Step 1: Material Data
𝟎.𝟖𝟓∗𝒇𝒄𝒌 𝟎.𝟖𝟓∗𝟐𝟓
C – 25/30 𝒇𝒄𝒅 = = 𝟏𝟒. 𝟏𝟔𝟕𝑴𝒑𝒂
𝜸𝒄 𝟏.𝟓

𝒇𝒚𝒌 𝟒𝟐𝟎
𝒇𝒚𝒌 = 𝟒𝟐𝟎 𝒇𝒚𝒅 = 𝟏.𝟏𝟓 = 𝟑𝟔𝟓. 𝟐 𝟏.𝟏𝟓 = 𝟑𝟔𝟓. 𝟐𝑴𝒑𝒂

Step 2: cover for column

cmin,b =20mm

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 322

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

cmin,dur = 10mm

Cmin = max {20mm; 10mm, 10 mm}

Cmin = 20mm

Cnom = Cmin +ΔCdev from the above table we have listed cmin = 20mm,

Δcdev 10mm

Cnom = 20+10=30mm

Standard Fire resistance =15mm

Therefore, the govering Concrete design cover for the lift wall is =30mm

Analysis results from ETABS:

Figure 8.2. Axial and shear force on shear wall

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 323

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Figure 8.3. Moment 2-2 and moment 3-3 on shear wall

Step 3: Load on lift wall

𝑀𝑒𝑑 = 622.91𝑘𝑁. 𝑀

𝑁𝑒𝑑 = 1951.21𝐾𝑁

𝑉𝑒𝑑 = 551.11𝐾𝑁

Step 4: Check the resistance of the cross section

 Ckeck Ned ≤ N,rd

𝑀𝑒𝑑 622.9
𝑒 = 𝑁𝑒𝑑 = 1951.21 = 0.319𝑚

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 324

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building
2𝑒
𝑁,𝑅𝐷 = 𝜂𝑓𝑐𝑑 ∗ 𝑏 ∗ ℎ𝑤 ∗ (1 − ℎ𝑤) … . 𝑓𝑜𝑟 𝑎𝑥𝑖𝑎𝑙 𝑏𝑒𝑛𝑑𝑖𝑛𝑔

2∗0.319
𝑁,𝑅𝐷 = 1 ∗ 14.167 ∗ 103 ∗ 0.2 ∗ 3.5 ∗ (1 − )
3.5

𝑁,𝑅𝐷 = 48105.18𝐾𝑁 ≥ Ned = 1951.21𝐾𝑁…... It is Okay!

Step 5: Reinforcement calculation for vertical and horizontal

 Affecting the RC shear wall under Ned & Med can be calculated
𝑁𝑒𝑑 6𝑀𝑒𝑑 1951.21 6∗622.9
𝛿 = 𝐿𝑤∗𝑏𝑤 ± 𝑏𝑤𝐿𝑤2 = 8.2∗0.2 ± 0.2∗8.22 =

= 1189.76 ± 277.9

= 1467.66 KN/m2……..+compressive stress

= 911.86 KN/m2…...... – ve compressive stress

⸫ 𝛿𝑚𝑎𝑥 ≤ 𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑐𝑟𝑒𝑡𝑒 + 𝑅𝑒𝑖𝑛𝑓𝑜𝑟𝑐𝑒𝑚𝑒𝑛𝑡

𝐴𝑠𝑐
 𝛿𝑚𝑎𝑥 ≤ 0.58𝑓𝑐𝑘 + (𝑙𝑤𝑏𝑤) 0.87𝑓𝑦𝑘
𝐴𝑆𝐶
1467.66 ≤ 0.58 ∗ 25 ∗ 103 + 𝑙𝑤𝑏𝑤 ∗ 0.87 ∗ 420 ∗ 103

𝐾𝑁 𝐴𝑆𝐶
1467.66 ≤ 14500 𝑀2 + 365.4 ∗ 103 𝑙𝑤𝑏𝑤 𝐾𝑁/𝑀2

AS Apply Ned ≤ concrete resistance without reinforcement

i,e 1467.66 KN/M2 ≤ 14500 KN/M2……so concrete can be with stand the apply Ned
&moment.

 Check for Minimum and maximum reinforcement area

0.1𝑁𝑒𝑑
𝑜𝑓
𝐴𝑠, 𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 { 𝑓𝑦𝑑 }
0.002𝐴𝑐
0.1∗1951.21∗103
= 464.57𝑚𝑚2
𝐴𝑠, 𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 ({ 420 };)
(0.002 ∗ 200 ∗ 8200) = 3280𝑚𝑚2
𝑢𝑠𝑒 𝐴𝑠, min = 3280𝑚𝑚2
𝐴𝑠, 𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 0.04𝐴𝑐 = 0.04 ∗ 200 ∗ 8200 = 65600𝑚𝑚2
Use ∅12

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 325

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

𝝅∅𝟐 𝝅∗𝟏𝟐𝟐
 𝒂𝒔 = = = 𝟏𝟏𝟑. 𝟏𝒎𝒎𝟐
𝟒 𝟒
𝟑𝟐𝟖𝟎
No of bars = 𝟏𝟏𝟑.𝟏 = 29.02 𝑢𝑠𝑒 30 𝑏𝑎𝑟𝑠 𝑖𝑛 𝑜𝑛𝑒 𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑒 𝑜𝑓 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑤𝑎𝑙𝑙

Spacing b/n bars = Lw/N-1 = 8200/29 = 282.75mm use S = 250mm

𝟑 ∗ 𝒕𝒉𝒊𝒄𝒌𝒏𝒆𝒔𝒔
 𝑺𝒑𝒂𝒄𝒊𝒏𝒈 = 𝒎𝒊𝒏 { 𝟒𝟎𝟎
𝒔𝒄𝒂𝒍
3 ∗ 200 = 600
𝑠𝑝𝑎𝑐𝑖𝑛𝑔 = 𝑚𝑖𝑛 { 400
𝑠𝑐𝑎𝑙 = 250
𝑠𝑝𝑎𝑐𝑖𝑛𝑔 = 250𝑚𝑚

𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡ℎ 8200
 𝑁𝑜 𝑜𝑓 𝑏𝑎𝑟 𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑣𝑖𝑑𝑒𝑑 = 𝑠𝑝𝑒𝑐𝑖𝑛𝑔 = = 32.8 ≈ 33 … . . 𝑜𝑛𝑒 𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑒
250
 𝑁𝑜 𝑜𝑓 𝑏𝑎𝑟 𝑖𝑛 𝑡𝑤𝑜 𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑒 𝑜𝑓 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑤𝑎𝑙𝑙 = 33 ∗ 2 = 66𝑏𝑟𝑠
𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒗𝒊𝒅𝒆 ∅𝟏𝟐 𝒄/𝒄 𝟐𝟓𝟎𝒎𝒎

Horizontal bars at each face

25%𝐴𝑆𝑉
 𝐴𝑠, 𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 {
0.001𝐴𝐶
 𝐴𝑆𝑣 = 𝑁𝑜 𝑜𝑓 𝑏𝑎𝑟 ∗ 𝑎𝑠
𝐴𝑆𝑣 = 66 ∗ 𝟏𝟏𝟑. 𝟏 = 7464.6𝑚𝑚2
 𝐴𝑠, 𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 0.25 ∗ 7464.6𝑚𝑚2 = 1866.15𝑚𝑚2
 𝑢𝑠𝑒 ∅8 𝑓𝑜𝑟 𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑛𝑠𝑣𝑒𝑟𝑠 𝑟𝑒𝑖𝑛𝑓𝑜𝑟𝑐𝑚𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑤𝑎𝑙𝑙.
𝝅∅𝟐 𝝅∗𝟖𝟐
 𝒂𝒔 = = = 𝟓𝟎. 𝟐𝟔𝒎𝒎𝟐
𝟒 𝟒
𝐴𝑠,𝑚𝑖𝑛 933.075
 𝑁𝑜 𝑜𝑓 𝑏𝑎𝑟 = = = 18.5 ≈ 19 … . . 𝑜𝑛𝑒 𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑒
𝒂𝒔 50.26
 𝑁𝑜 𝑜𝑓 𝑏𝑎𝑟 = 19 ∗ 2 = 38 … . . 𝑡𝑤𝑜 𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑒

𝐻𝑤 3500
 𝑆𝑝𝑎𝑐𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑏𝑒𝑡𝑤𝑒𝑒𝑛 ℎ𝑜𝑟𝑖𝑧𝑜𝑛𝑡𝑎𝑙 𝑏𝑎𝑟𝑠 = 𝑁−1 = 184.2 𝑈𝑆𝐸 180𝑚𝑚
19
𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒗𝒊𝒅𝒆 ∅𝟖 𝒄/𝒄 𝟏𝟖𝟎𝒎𝒎

This minimum reinforcement design is applied to all story’s.

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 326

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Figure 8.4. Detailing of shear wall

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 327

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

CHAPTER NINE
ANALAYSIS AND DESIGN OF FOUNDATION
9.1. Introduction
The foundation or substructure is the part of a structure that is usually placed below the surface
of the ground and that transmits the load to the underlying soil or rock. Because the soil is
generally much weaker than the concrete columns and walls that must be supported, the contact
area between the soil and the footing is much larger than that between the supported member and
the footing.
The purposes of foundations are:
To distribute the load of the structure over a large bearing area so as to bring intensity of
loading within the safe bearing capacity of the soil lying underneath.
 To load the bearing surface at a uniform rate so as to prevent unequal settlement.
 To prevent the lateral movement of the supporting material.
 To secure a level and firm bed for building operations.
 To increase the stability of the structure as a whole.
The choice of foundation type is selected in consultation with the geotechnical engineer. Factors
to be considered during selection are:
 Soil strength
 Soil type
 Variability of the soil type over the area and with increasing depth.
 Susceptibility of the soil and the building to deflections.
Generally, foundations are of two types. These are shallow foundation and deep foundation.
I. Shallow Foundation
Shallow foundation is provided immediately beneath the lowest part of the structure i.e. near to
the ground level. The different types of shallow foundations are:
a) Isolated (Spread) footing: are used to support individual column. To support heavy
loads, reinforcement is also provided at the base. The reinforcement provided is in the
form of steel bars and is placed in both directions.

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 328

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Figure 9.17. Isolated or spread footing

b) Combined footing: supports two or sometimes three column in a row. Combined

footings are used when property lines, equipment locations, column spacing, or other
considerations limit the footing clearance at the column locations.

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 329

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Figure 9.18. Combined footing

c) Cantilever (Strap) footing: consists of two individual footings connected by a beam
called a strap. They are used where the distance between the columns is so great that a
trapezoidal combined footing becomes quite narrow.

Figure 9.19. Cantilever or strap footing

d) Continuous (Wall) footing: this type of footing is suitable at locations liable to
earthquake activities.

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 330

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Figure 9.20. Wall or continuous footing

e) Mat (Raft) foundation: used where the allowable soil pressure is low or the structure
loads are heavy. Instead of using spread footings that would cover more than one half of
the area, it is more economical to use raft foundation.

Figure 9.21. Mat or raft footing

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 331

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

II. Deep Foundation

Deep foundations are used when the upper ground stratum at a site is weak and unable to carry
the load even by a raft foundation. Then eventually shallow foundation has to be ruled out, and a
deep foundation taken to an available firm stratum is adopted.
The design of shallow foundations is based on the assumption that they are rigid so that
the variation of pressure under the foundations will be linear. The distribution of pressure will be
uniform if the centroid of the foundation coincides with the resultant of the applied
loads.
The requirements in design of foundations are:
1) The pressure on the soil should not exceed the bearing capacity of the soil.
2) The settlement of the structure should be within the permissible limits. Further
there should be no differential settlement.
 Based on the above conditions stated, the types of foundations chosen for our building are
Isolated Footing and Combined Footing. The design is based on EBCS-7 Part 1 and design
axial loads and bending moments are obtained from 3D frame analysis using ETABS 2016.
The most common limit states for foundations are
 Loss of overall stability
 Bearing resistance failure
 Failure by sliding
 Combined failure in the ground and in the structure
 Structural failure due to foundation movement
 Excessive settlements
 Excessive heave due to swelling, frost and other causes
 Unacceptable vibrations
 In order to proportion shallow foundations one should either know the presumptive
allowable soil pressure as dictated by prevalent code or know the appropriate strength
parameters of the soil, i.e., the angle of internal friction,∅ , and cohesion, C.
 For cases where using the soil strength parameters to be used, one should determine the
soil strength parameters ∅ and C. These parameters may be approximated or determined
from laboratory tests. But we don’t have those soil parameters so we use presumptive
allowable soil pressure method in order to proportion shallow foundations.

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 332

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

 Through many years of practice, it has been possible to estimate the allowable soil
pressure for different types of soils for uncomplicated soil conditions. Accordingly,
different Building codes give allowable average soil pressure. We use Presumed Design
Bearing resistance * under static loading from ( EBCS 7).
 This building is to be constructed in DILLA city. The soil condition of DILLA city has
large coverage of stiff clay as we get from other projects and as we recommended by our
geotechnical advisor.
 From EBCS 7 for stiff clay Presumed Design Bearing Resistance is 280(kPa). and we
assume factor of safety 2.
 Design Philosophy
Load Resistance Factored Design (LRDF)
In load and resistance factor design (LRFD) method, load factors are applied to the loads and
resistance factors to the internal resistances or capacities of sections. The value of a load factor
depends on the accuracy with which a load can be determined and the probability of its
simultaneous occurrence with other loads in a combination for a specific limit state.
Allowable Stress Design (ASD)
Members proportioned so that the stresses in the steel and concrete resulting from normal service
loads were within allowable stress (specified limits), were only fractions of the failure stresses of
the materials. Allowable stresses, in practice were set at about one-half the concrete compressive
strength and one-half the yield stress of the steel.
For all footing proportioning we use ASD method with a factor of safety ranges from 2.5 to 3.
Such method is adopted for footing proportioning, in order to avoid application of safety factor
for third time in analysis and design.
 First - Dead load and live load factored with 1.35 and 1.5 respectively.
 Second - Concrete and Steel cross sectional capacity factored to less value by 1.5 and
1.15 respectively.
 Third - Using Ultimate capacity (Allowable Stress * Safety factor) of the soil is the
governing capacity to avoid third time safety factor and be economical.
 Design Combination for Footing

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 333

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

For our project foundation design we use combination one which only take in consideration
unfactored dead load and live load. As the base shear force located at the bottom of the ground
floor, earthquake does not have any effect.
Footing Area = Unfactored load / Allowable Stress
= (Dead Load + Live Load) / (Allowable Stress)
Or
Footing Area = Factored Load / (Allowable Stress * Safety factor)
= (1.35*Dead Load + 1.5*Live Load) / (Allowable Stress*Factor of Safety)
Foundation design is concerned primarily with ensuring that the movements of a
foundation are within the limits that can be tolerated by the proposed structure without adversely
affecting its functional requirements. Structures vary widely in their function be considered as
interrelated problems.
The foundation is designed for the two cases; i.e.
1. Maximum axial load and accompanying moment.
2. Maximum moment and accompanying axial load.
 The joint reaction output from our ETABS 2016 v 16.2.1 building model is as follows:

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 334

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Figure 9.22. base reaction of this building

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 335

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

According to the axial forces (Fz), we have categorized the footing group range as follows.

Axial Load
<500 500-1000 1000-1500 1500-2000 2000-2500 >2500
range (KN)
Footing ID F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1

Table 9.73. footing grouping and its base reaction

Story Joint Load FZ MX MY
Label Case/Combo
kN kN-m kN-m
foundation 6 Service 3100.001 -1.4791 1.903

foundation 11 Service 2865.589 -26.0014 14.9192

foundation 8 Service 2630.165 2.8394 -4.7057

foundation 5 Service 2618.798 2.6289 -5.7599

foundation 12 Service 2462.489 1.6438 12.4044

foundation 7 Service 2272.064 -0.9938 -5.7444

foundation 9 Service 1872.004 48.7116 3.2996

foundation 21 Service 1762.602 -5.5766 -

18.3631
foundation 13 Service 1743.865 -3.3789 11.1492

foundation 4 Service 1529.512 -1.5014 2.5789

foundation 20 Service 1484.48 14.5049 2.8194

foundation 16 Service 1475.704 1.3692 -1.4161

foundation 15 Service 1468.167 -7.2719 -1.1868

foundation 2 Service 1347.814 9.4842 0.3505

foundation 22 Service 1214.432 -1.7327 -

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 336

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

10.3059

foundation 17 Service 1059.551 6.875 -4.8511

foundation 33 Service 903.6548 -2.2127 -1.6129

foundation 18 Service 718.5622 1.6542 -3.2581

foundation 19 Service 474.2629 -0.7897 9.0832

foundation 23 Service 423.3576 -1.1234 2.8432

Table 9.74. Total summary of footing

Footing No. of Load Governed Governed Governed

Governed
Category Footing Case/Combo Fz-1(KN) MX(KN.m) MY(KN.m)
Fz-2(KN)
F1 3 Service 3100 - -26 15
F2 2 Service 2462 - 1.6 12.4
F3 3 Service 1872 - -5.5 -18.3
F4 4 Service 1484 - 14.5 2.8
F5 2 Service 475 - -1.12 2.8
CF-1 1 Service 2619 1530 - -
CF-2 2 Service 1348 1060 - -

9.2. Design of Footing

The design of shallow foundations is based on the assumption that they are rigid so that
the variation of pressure under the foundations will be linear. The distribution of pressure will be
uniform if the centroid of the foundation coincides with the resultant of the applied
loads. The requirements in design of foundations are:
1) The pressure on the soil should not exceed the bearing capacity of the soil.
2) The settlement of the structure should be within the permissible limits. Further,
there should be no differential settlement.

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 337

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

9.3. Design of Footing (F-1)

R.C. column size 60X40 cm
P = 3100k
𝑀𝑥 = -26KNm
𝑀𝑦 = 15KNm
An allowable presumptive bearing pressure = 280kPa
 Design constants
fyk = 420MPa, fyd = 420/1.15 = 365.22 MPa
C30/37 fck= 30MPa fctk = 1 MPa

 Footing proportioning
Let l1 = l2
𝑎−60 𝑏−40
Then 2
= 2
𝑎 − 𝑏 = 60 − 40 = 20𝑐𝑚 = 0.2𝑚
Eccentricity,
𝑚𝑥 26
ea = = = 0.0084𝑚
𝑃 3100
𝑚𝑦 15
𝑒𝑏 = = = 0.00484𝑚
𝑝 3100

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 338

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Contact pressure

P 6ea 6eb
σmax = (1 ± + )
A a b
3100 6 ∗ 0.0084 6 ∗ 0.00484
280 = (1 + + )
(0.2 + 𝑏)𝑏 0.2 + 𝑏 𝑏
3100 0.05 0.029
280 = (1 + 2+𝑏 + )
0.2𝑏+𝑏2 𝑏

280𝑏3 + 112𝑏 2 − 3088𝑏 − 845 = 0

By trial and error b=3.26m
Take b=3.3m
Then a= 0.2+b = 3.5m
Actual contact pressure

𝜎 3100 6∗0.0084 6∗0.00484

𝑚𝑎𝑥= 3.5∗3.3(1+ 3.5 + 3.3 )

= 274.6KN/m2 ≤ 𝜎𝑎𝑙𝑙 …ok!

𝜎 3100 6∗0.0084 6∗0.00484

𝑚𝑖𝑛= 3.5∗3.3(1− 3.5 + 3.3 )

=262.17KN/m2 ≤ 𝜎𝑎𝑙𝑙 …ok!

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 339

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Thickness of the footing

i. Punching shear
The Punching shear resistance according to EBCS-2 is given by
Vup = 0.25fctd k1k2ud (MN)
Take d = 0.5m and
ρ = ρmin = 0.5/fyk = 0.5 /420 = 0.00119
k1 = ( 1+50ρ) = (1 +50*0.00119) =1.059
k2 = 1.6 d =1.6 -0.5 = 1.1
u = 2(3d +b ) +2(3d+a ) = 12d +2b + 2a = 12*0.5 +2*0.4 +2*0.6 = 8m
Then
Vup = 0.25*1*1.059 *1.1*8*0.5=1.1649MN = 1164.9kN

𝝈=268.38KN
𝑣 = 268.38 ∗ 2.1 ∗ 1.9 = 1070.836𝐾𝑁
Net shear force developed = 3100 – 1070.83 = 2029.16 kN > Vup 1164.9KN …not ok!
Since the developed shear force is greater than the punching shear resistance, one may
Increase the depth.
Take d= 0.6m

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 340

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

ρ = ρmin = 0.5/fyk = 0.5 /420 = 0.00119

k1 = ( 1+50ρ) = (1 +50*0.00119) =1.059
k2 = 1.6 d =1.6 -0.6 = 1
u = 2(3d +b ) +2(3d+a ) = 12d +2b + 2a = 12*0.6+2*0.4 +2*0.0.1 = 9.2m
Vup= 1682.92KN
𝑣 = 268.38 ∗ 2.4 ∗ 2.2 = 1517.07𝐾𝑁
Net shear force developed = 3100 – 1517.07= 1582.93 kN < Vup KN….ok!
The depth satisfies the punching shear requirement for the assumed ρmin.
ii. Wide beam shear

Contact stress at distance d from the face of the column, 𝝈

𝜎 (274.6−262.17)(2.05+0.6)
= 262.17+ =267.32𝐾𝑁/𝑚2
3.5

= 267.32KN/m2
𝜎1= (1−𝜎𝑚𝑎𝑥+𝜎𝑚𝑖𝑛) (1.45 − 𝑑)
2
274.6 + 267.32
=( ) (0.85)
2
=230.3KN/m
Developed wide beam shear
Vd = 230.3 *3.3 =760.043kN
[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 341
B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

The wide beam shear resistance according to EBCS-2 is given by

Vud = 0.25fctd k1k2 bwd (MN)
= 0.25*1*1.059*1*3.5*0.6 =0.5242MN =524.2kN > Vd…. not ok
Take d = 0.65m

𝜎= 262.17+(274.6−262.17)(2.05+0.65)=267.32𝐾𝑁/𝑚2
3.5

= 271.758KN/m2

𝜎1= (1−𝜎𝑚𝑎𝑥+𝜎𝑚𝑖𝑛 ) (1.45−d)

2

= 218.768KN/m2
Developed wide beam shear
Vd = 218.768 *3.3 = 676.1kN
The wide beam shear resistance according to EBCS-2 is given by
Vud = 0.25fctd k1k2 bwd (MN)
= 0.25*1*1.059*1*3.5*0.65 =0.687MN = 687kN > Vd … ok
iii. Bending Moment
 Long direction

. 2.05∗(274.6−262.17)
σ= 262.17+ 3.5 =269.45𝐾𝑁/𝑚2

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 342

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

1
𝜎1 = (1.45)(274.6 − 269.17) = 3.94𝐾𝑁/𝑚2
2
𝜎2 = 1.45 ∗ 269.45 = 390.7𝐾𝑁/𝑚2
2 1.45
𝑀 = [𝜎1 (1.45) + 𝜎2 ( )] 𝑏
3 2
2 1.45
𝑀 = [3.94 3 (1.45) + 390.7 ( )] 1
2

M= 287.667KN/m
Moment capacity of concrete
M= 0.32*𝑓𝑐𝑑 ∗ 𝑏 ∗ 𝑑 2
= 0.32 ∗ 14.16 ∗ 103 ∗ 1 ∗ 0.652 = 1914.43𝐾𝑁𝑚/𝑚 >>> M ….okay!
iv. Calculation of reinforcement
𝑓 2𝑀
𝜌 = 𝑓 𝑐𝑑 [1 − √1 − 𝑓 2
]
𝑦𝑑 𝑐𝑑 𝑏𝑑

14.16 2 ∗ 287.667
𝜌= [1 − √1 − ] = 0.00191 > 𝜌𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 0.00119
365.22 14.16 ∗ 103 ∗ 1 ∗ 0.652

𝐴𝑠 = 𝜌𝑏𝑑 = 0.00191 ∗ 100 ∗ 65 = 11.468𝐶𝑚2 /𝑚

𝑎𝑠∗100 201∗100
𝑠𝑝𝑎𝑐𝑖𝑛𝑔 = = = 17.52cm
𝐴𝑠 11.468
Use ϕ16c/c170mm
 Short direction

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 343

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Average contact pressure,

𝜎𝑚𝑎𝑥 + 𝜎𝑚𝑖𝑛
𝜎𝑎𝑣𝑒 =
2
274.6 + 262.17
= = 268.385𝐾𝑁/𝑚2
2
1.45
𝑀 = [𝜎1 ( )] 𝒂
2
M=194.579KNm/m

14.16 2 ∗ 194.579
𝜌= [1 − √1 − ] = 0.000849 < 𝜌𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 0.00119
365.22 14.16 ∗ 103 ∗ 1 ∗ 0.634

𝐴𝑠 = 𝜌𝑏𝑑 = 0.00119 ∗ 100 ∗ 63.4 = 7.544𝐶𝑚2 /𝑚

𝑎𝑠∗100 201∗100
𝑠𝑝𝑎𝑐𝑖𝑛𝑔 = = = 26.6cm
𝐴𝑠 7.544

Use ϕ16c/c250mm
v. Development length
𝜙𝑓𝑦𝑑 1.6 ∗ 365.22
𝐼𝑏 = = = 146.09𝐶𝑚
4𝑓𝑏𝑑 4∗1
If 𝐼𝑎𝑣𝑎𝑙𝑎𝑏𝑙𝑒 < 𝐼𝑑 the barr should be bend up ward
𝐼𝑎𝑣𝑎𝑙𝑎𝑏𝑙𝑒 = 1450-50=1400cm <, 𝐼𝑑 bend the bars upward with a minimum length of 10cm

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 344

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

9.4. Design of Footing (F-2)

R.C. column size 60X30 cm
P = 2465KN

An allowable presumptive bearing pressure = 280kPa

 Design constants
fyk = 420MPa, fyd = 420/1.15 = 365.22 MPa
C30/37 fck= 30MPa fctk = 1 MPa,
 Footing proportioning
𝑃 2465
A=𝜎 = = 8.8
𝑎𝑙𝑙 280

b = √8.8 = 2.966 = 3m
a = 3m
Dimension of the footing = 3m *3m
2465
Actual contact pressure = 𝜎 = 3∗3 = 273.88KN/m2

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 345

 B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

 Thickness of the footing

i. Punching shear
The Punching shear resistance according to EBCS-2 is given by
Vup = 0.25fctd k1k2ud (MN)
Take d= 0.3m and ρ = 0.5/fyk = 0.5 /420 = 0.00119
k1 = ( 1+50ρ) = (1 +50*0.00119) =1.06
k2 = 1.6 d =1.6 -0.3 = 1.3
u = 2(3d +b ) +2(3d+a ) = 12d +2b + 2a = 12*0.3 +2*0.6 +2*0.3 =5.4
Then
Vup = 0.25*1*1.06*1.3 *5.4*0.3=0.55809MN = 558.09kN

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 346

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

𝝈 = 273.88KN/m2
V=273.88 * 2.25*2.25= 1386.5KN
Net shear force developed = 2465-1386 = 1078.48 kN > Vup not ok !
Since the developed shear force is greater than the punching shear resistance, one may increase
the depth.
Take d= 0.6m and
ρ = 0.5/fyk = 0.5 /420 = 0.00119
k1 = ( 1+50ρ) = (1 +50*0.00119) =1.06
k2 = 1.6 d =1.6 -0.6 = 1
u = 2(3d +b ) +2(3d+a ) = 12d +2b + 2a = 12*0.6 +2*0.6 +2*0.3 = 9m
Then
Vup = 0.25*1*1.06*1 *9 *0.3 = 1431KN
𝝈 = 273.88KN/m2
V=273.88 * 5.76= 1577.5
Net shear force developed = 2465-1577.5 = 887.5 kN <Vup ok !
The depth satisfies the punching shear requirement for the assumed ρmin.

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 347

 B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

ii. Wide beam shear

Contact stress at distance d from the face of the column,

𝝈 = 273.88KN/m2
Developed wide beam shear
Vd = 273.88*0.6*3 =472.98KN
The wide beam shear resistance according to EBCS-2 is given by
Vud = 0.25fctd k1k2 bwd (MN)
= 0.25*1*1.06*1*3*0.6 =492kN > Vd ….okay!
iii. Bending Moment

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 348

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

1.2
𝑀 = [𝜎 ∗ ]𝑏
2
1.2
𝑀 = (273.88 ∗ ) 1 = 164.329𝐾𝑁𝑚/𝑚
2
Moment capacity of concrete
M= 0.32*𝑓𝑐𝑑 ∗ 𝑏 ∗ 𝑑 2
= 0.32 ∗ 14.16 ∗ 103 ∗ 1 ∗ 0.62 = 1631.232 >>> M…. okay!
iv. Calculation of reinforcement
Both Long and short direction
𝑓 2𝑀
𝜌 = 𝑓 𝑐𝑑 [1 − √1 − 𝑓 2 ]
𝑦𝑑 𝑐𝑑 𝑏𝑑

14.16 2 ∗ 164.329
𝜌= [1 − √1 − ] = 0.0012 > 𝜌𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 0.00119
365.22 14.16 ∗ 103 ∗ 1 ∗ 0.62

𝐴𝑠 = 𝜌𝑏𝑑 = 0.0012 ∗ 100 ∗ 60 = 7.2𝐶𝑚2

𝑎𝑠 ∗ 100 201 ∗ 100
𝑠𝑝𝑎𝑐𝑖𝑛𝑔 = = = 27
𝐴𝑠 7.2
Use ϕ16c/c27cm
v. Development length
𝜙𝑓𝑦𝑑 1.6 ∗ 365.22
𝐼𝑏 = = = 146.09𝐶𝑚 = 1460𝑚𝑚
4𝑓𝑏𝑑 4∗1
Lavailable = 1200-50 = 1150mm
Lavailable = 1200-50 =115cm < ld , bend the bars upward with a minimum length of 10cm

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 349

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

9.5. Design of Footing (F-3)

R.C. column size 60X30 cm
P = 1872kN

An allowable presumptive bearing pressure = 280kPa

 Design constants
fyk = 420MPa, fyd = 420/1.15 = 365.22 MPa
C30/37 fck= 30MPa fctk = 1 MPa,
 Footing proportioning
𝑃 1872
A=𝜎 = = 6.69𝑚2
𝑎𝑙𝑙 280

b = √6.69 = 2.6𝑚
a = 2.6m
Dimension of footing = 2.6m *2.6m

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 350

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

1872
Actual contact pressure = 𝜎 = = 276.92 < 𝜎𝑎𝑙𝑙
2.6∗2.6

 Thickness of the footing

i. Punching shear
The Punching shear resistance according to EBCS-2 is given by
Vup = 0.25fctd k1k2ud (MN)
Take d= 0.5m and ρ = 0.5/fyk = 0.5 /420 = 0.00119
k1 = ( 1+50ρ) = (1 +50*0.00119) =1.06
k2 = 1.6 d =1.6 -0.5 = 1.1
u = 2(3d +b ) +2(3d+a ) = 12d +2b + 2a = 12*0.5 +2*0.3 +2*0.6 =7.8
Then Vup = 0.25*1*1.06*1.1 *7.8*0.5 =1.13685MN = 1136.85kN

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 351

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

𝝈 = 276.92KN/m2
V=276.92 * 1.8*1.8= 1221.2
Net shear force developed = 1872-1221.2 = 651 kN < Vup …ok !
The depth satisfies the punching shear requirement for the assumed minimum steel ratio.
ii. Wide beam shear

𝝈 = 276.92KN/m2
Developed wide beam shear
Vd = 276*0.65*2.6 = 359.99KN
The wide beam shear resistance according to EBCS-2 is given by
Vud = 0.25fctd k1k2 bwd (MN)
= 0.25*1*1.06*1.1*2.6*0.5 =378.95kN > Vd …okay!

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 352

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

iii. Bending Moment

1.15
𝑀 = [𝜎 ∗ ]𝑏
2
1.15
𝑀 = (276.92 ∗ ) 1 = 138.46𝐾𝑁𝑚/𝑚
2
Moment capacity of concrete
M= 0.32*𝑓𝑐𝑑 ∗ 𝑏 ∗ 𝑑 2
= 0.32 ∗ 14.16 ∗ 103 ∗ 1 ∗ 0.52 = 1132.8𝐾𝑁𝑚/𝑚 >>> M….okay!
iv. Calculation of reinforcement
Both Long and short direction
𝑓 2𝑀
𝜌 = 𝑓 𝑐𝑑 [1 − √1 − 𝑓 2
]
𝑦𝑑 𝑐𝑑 𝑏𝑑

14.16 2 ∗ 138.46
𝜌= [1 − √1 − ] = 0.00155 > 𝜌𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 0.00119
365.22 14.16 ∗ 103 ∗ 1 ∗ 0.52

𝐴𝑠 = 𝜌𝑏𝑑 = 0.00155 ∗ 100 ∗ 50 = 7.75𝐶𝑚2

𝑎𝑠 ∗ 100 201 ∗ 100
𝑠𝑝𝑎𝑐𝑖𝑛𝑔 = = = 23.94
𝐴𝑠 7.75
Use ϕ16c/c20cm
v. Development length
[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 353
B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

𝜙𝑓𝑦𝑑 1.6 ∗ 365.22

𝐼𝑏 = = = 146.09𝐶𝑚
4𝑓𝑏𝑑 4∗1
Lavailable = 115-5 =110cm < ld , bend the bars upward with a minimum length of 10cm
9.6. Design of Footing (F-4)
R.C. column size 50X30 cm
P = 1484kN
An allowable presumptive bearing pressure = 280kPa

 Design constants
fyk = 420MPa, fyd = 420/1.15 = 365.22 MPa
C30/37 fck= 30MPa fctk = 1 MPa,
 Footing proportioning
𝑃 1484
A= = = 5.3𝑚2
𝜎𝑎𝑙𝑙 280

b = √5.3 = 2.32𝑚 take b=2.4m

Dimension of footing = 2.4*2.4

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 354

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

1484
Actual contact pressure = 𝜎 =2.4∗2.4 = 257.6 < 𝜎𝑚𝑖𝑛 ….ok!

Thickness of the footing

i. Punching shear
The Punching shear resistance according to EBCS-2 is given by
Vup = 0.25fctd k1k2ud (MN)
Take d= 0.5m and ρ = 0.5/fyk = 0.5 /420 = 0.00119
k1 = ( 1+50ρ) = (1 +50*0.00119) =1.06
k2 = 1.6 d =1.6 -0.5 = 1.1
u = 2(3d +b ) +2(3d+a ) = 12d +2b + 2a = 12*0.5 +2*0.3 +2*0.5 =7.6
Then
Vup = 0.25*1*1.06*1.1 *7.6*0.5=1.1077MN = 1107.7kN

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 355

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

𝝈 = 257.6KN/m2
V=257.6 * 1.8*1.8= 834.62KN
Net shear force developed = 1484-834.6 = 649.37kN < Vup… ok!
The depth satisfies the punching shear requirement for the assumed minimum reinforcement
ratio.
ii. Wide beam shear

𝝈 = 276KN/m2
Developed wide beam shear

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 356

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Vd = 257.6*0.55*2.4 =278.208KN
The wide beam shear resistance according to EBCS-2 is given by
Vud = 0.25fctd k1k2 bwd (MN)
= 0.25*1*1.06*1.1*2.4*0.5*1000 =349.8kN > Vd ..Okay!
iii. Bending Moment

1.05
𝑀 = [𝜎 ∗ ]𝑏
2
1.05
𝑀 = (257.6 ∗ ) 1 = 128.8𝐾𝑁𝑚/𝑚
2
Moment capacity of concrete
M= 0.32*𝑓𝑐𝑑 ∗ 𝑏 ∗ 𝑑 2
= 0.32 ∗ 14.16 ∗ 103 ∗ 1 ∗ 0.52 = 1132.8𝐾𝑁𝑚/𝑚 >>> M…okay!
iv. Calculation of reinforcement
Both Long and short direction
𝑓 2𝑀
𝜌 = 𝑓 𝑐𝑑 [1 − √1 − 𝑓 2
]
𝑦𝑑 𝑐𝑑 𝑏𝑑

14.16 2 ∗ 128.8
𝜌= [1 − √1 − ] = 0.00143 > 𝜌𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 0.00119
365.22 14.16 ∗ 103 ∗ 1 ∗ 0.52

𝐴𝑠 = 𝜌𝑏𝑑 = 0.00143 ∗ 100 ∗ 50 = 7.17𝐶𝑚2

𝑎𝑠∗100 201∗100
𝑠𝑝𝑎𝑐𝑖𝑛𝑔 = = = 28cm
𝐴𝑠 7.17

Use ϕ16c/c25cm
[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 357
B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

v. Development length
𝜙𝑓𝑦𝑑 1.6 ∗ 365.22
𝐼𝑏 = = = 146.09𝐶𝑚
4𝑓𝑏𝑑 4∗1
Lavailable = 105 - 5 =100cm < ld ,bend the bars upward with a minimum length of 10cm.
9.7. Design of Footing (F-5)
R.C. column size 50X30 cm
P = 475kN
An allowable presumptive bearing pressure = 280kPa

 Design constants
fyk = 420MPa, fyd = 420/1.15 = 365.22 MPa
C30/37 fck= 30MPa fctk = 1 MPa,
 Footing proportioning
𝑃 475
A=𝜎 = 280 = 1.69
𝑎𝑙𝑙

b = √1.69 = 1.4𝑚
a = 1.4m
Dimension of footing = 1.4m *1.4m
475
Actual contact pressure = 𝜎 =1.4∗1.4 = 242.35 < 𝜎𝑚𝑖𝑛

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 358

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

 Thickness of the footing

i. Punching shear
The Punching shear resistance according to EBCS-2 is given by
Vup = 0.25fctd k1k2ud (MN)
Take d= 0.25m
ρ = 0.5/fyk = 0.5 /420 = 0.00119
k1 = ( 1+50ρ) = (1 +50*0.00119) =1.06
k2 = 1.6 d =1.6 -0.25 = 1.35
u = 2(3d +b ) +2(3d+a ) = 12d +2b + 2a = 12*0.25 +2*0.3 +2*0.5 =4.6
Then
Vup = 0.25*1*1.059*1.35 *4.6*0.25=0.41103MN = 411.03kN

𝝈 = 242.35KN/m2
V=242.35 * 1.05*1.05 = 267.19KN
Net shear force developed = 475-267.19 = 207.8 kN < Vup ok !
The depth satisfies the punching shear requirement for the assumed steel ratio.

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 359

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

ii. Wide beam shear

𝝈 = 242.35KN/m2
Developed wide beam shear
Vd = 242.35*0.3*1.4 =84.82KN
The wide beam shear resistance according to EBCS-2 is given by
Vud = 0.25fctd k1k2 bwd (MN)
= 0.25*1*1.059*1.35*1.4*0.25 =0.125MN=125.09kN > Vd ….okay!
iii. Bending Moment

0.45
𝑀 = [𝜎 ∗ ]𝑏
2
0.55
𝑀 = (242.35 ∗ ) 1 = 54.53𝐾𝑁𝑚/𝑚
2

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 360

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Moment capacity of concrete

M= 0.32*𝑓𝑐𝑑 ∗ 𝑏 ∗ 𝑑 2
= 0.32 ∗ 14.16 ∗ 103 ∗ 1 ∗ 0.252 = 283.2𝐾𝑁𝑚/𝑚 >>M

𝑓𝑐𝑑 2𝑀
𝜌= [1 − √1 − ]
𝑓𝑦𝑑 𝑓𝑐𝑑 𝑏𝑑2

iv. Calculation of reinforcement

Both Long and short direction
𝑓 2𝑀
𝜌 = 𝑓 𝑐𝑑 [1 − √1 − 𝑓 2
]
𝑦𝑑 𝑐𝑑 𝑏𝑑

14.16 2 ∗ 54.53
𝜌= [1 − √1 − ] = 0.0025 > 𝜌𝑚𝑖𝑛
365.22 14.16 ∗ 103 ∗ 1 ∗ 0.252

𝐴𝑠 = 𝜌𝑏𝑑 = 0.0025 ∗ 100 ∗ 25 = 6.25𝐶𝑚2

𝑎𝑠 ∗ 100 201 ∗ 100
𝑠𝑝𝑎𝑐𝑖𝑛𝑔 = = = 32.67
𝐴𝑠 6.25
Use ϕ16c/c30cm

v. Development length
𝜙𝑓𝑦𝑑 1.6 ∗ 365.22
𝐼𝑏 = = = 146.09𝐶𝑚
4𝑓𝑏𝑑 4∗1
Lavailabe= 45-5.0 =40cm < ld , bend the bars upward with a minimum length of 10cm
9.8. Design of Cf-1
Column 1 size 50x 30
Column 2 size 60x 30cm
An allowable presumptive bearing pressure = 280kpa
Assume f.s = 2
C30/37 , fck = 30 , fcd = 0.85*fck/1.5 = 17mpa

S 420 , fyk = 420MPa⇒ fyd = 420/1.15 = 365.22 MPa

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 361

 B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

i. Proportioning of footing

R = 1530KN +2619= 4149kN

• RX’ = 2619*265⇒ X’ = (2619 *265)/4149 = 167cm

• a = 2 ( X’ + 15) = 365 cm
𝑞𝑎𝑙𝑙 =280
𝑞𝑢𝑙𝑡 = 𝑞𝑎𝑙𝑙 *F.S Assume F.S =2
𝑞𝑢𝑙𝑡 = 280*2= 560
𝑅 4149
𝑄𝑢𝑙𝑡 = = = 560
𝐴 3.65∗𝑏
• Take b =2.1m
Actual contact pressure

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 362

 B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building
𝑅 4149
•σ= = = 541.29 < 560 … … 𝑜𝑘!
𝑎𝑏 3.15∗2.1

Shear force and bending moment diagrams

Thickness of the footing

ii. Wide beam shear
The magnitude of the wide beam shear is read off from the shear force diagram at a distance of d
from the face of the column.
V = 1136.7* (2.65 –d) ‐1530 = 1359.5 -1136.7d
Take d =0.6
V=677.48
The wide beam shear resistance according to EBCS-2 is given by
Vud = 0.25fctd k1k2 bwd (MN)
[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 363
 B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

ρ = 0.5/fyk = 0.5 /420 = 0.00119

k1 = ( 1+50ρ) = (1 +50*0.00119) =1.06
k2 = 1.6 d =1.6 -0.25 = 1.35
Vud = 0.25*1*1.059*1*2.1*0.75
= 297.84 > 292.98…..ok!

iii. Punching shear

Perimeters- 𝑝𝑟1 =1.425+1.425+2.1 =4.95m

𝑝𝑟2 =2.125+2.125+2.1=6.35m
 Net shear force developed under column 1
𝑉1= 1330‐541.29*(2.1*1.425) = - 289.8 kN
 Net shear force developed under column 2
𝑉2 = 2619 ‐ 541.29* (2.1*2.125)= 204.03 kN
 Punching shear resistance
𝑉𝑈𝑃 = 0.25𝑓𝑐𝑡𝑑 𝑘1 𝑘2 ud (MN)
𝑢1 = 𝑝1=4.95 m , 𝑢2 = 𝑝2 = 6.35m
 Punching shear resistance under column 1
Vup = 0.25 *1000* 1.059*1*4.95*0.75=982.88 kN > V1…… ok!
 Punching shear resistance under column 2
Vup = 0.25 *1000* 1.059*1*6.35*0.75=1260.87 kN > V2………… ok!

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 364

 B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Moment capacity of concrete

M= 0.32*𝑓𝑐𝑑 ∗ 𝑏 ∗ 𝑑 2
= 0.32 ∗ 14.16 ∗ 103 ∗ 2.1 ∗ 0.752 = 5352.48 𝐾𝑁 − 𝑚 >>> 𝑀𝑚𝑎𝑥 ……ok!
iv. Calculation of reinforcement
 Long direction
𝑀𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 802.92 KN-m
𝑓 2𝑀
𝜌 = 𝑓 𝑐𝑑 [1 − √1 − 𝑓 2
]
𝑦𝑑 𝑐𝑑 𝑏𝑑

14.16 2 ∗ 802.92
𝜌= [1 − √1 − ] = 0.00192 > 𝜌𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 0.00119
365.22 14.16 ∗ 103 ∗ 2.1 ∗ 0.752

𝐴𝑠 = 𝜌𝑏𝑑 = 0.00192 ∗ 2100 ∗ 750 = 3008.25 𝑚𝑚2

Use ϕ20
𝐴𝑠 3008.25
No. of bars =𝑎𝑠 = = 9.58
314

Use 10 bars
2100−2∗50 1400
𝑠𝑝𝑎𝑐𝑖𝑛𝑔 = (𝑛−1)
= = 222.2mm
9

Use 10ϕ20 c/c 220mm

 Short direction
Effective width at exterior and interior columns being a+d/2 and a+d, respectively

 Contact pressure under columns 1 and 2

1530 1530
𝜎1 = 2.1∗0.875 = 1.8375 = 832.65KN/m2

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 365

 B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building
2619 2619𝐾𝑁
𝜎1 = 2.1∗1.25 = = 997.71KN/m2
2.625

 Developed Bending moment

0.8
𝑀1 = 832.65 ∗ 0.8 ∗ 0.875 ∗ = 233.142 KNm
2
0.8
𝑀2 = 997.71 ∗ 0.8 ∗ 1.25 ∗ = 399.14KNm
2

v. Calculation of Reinforcements
 Under column 1
Moment capacity of concrete
M= 0.32*𝑓𝑐𝑑 ∗ 𝑏 ∗ 𝑑 2
=0.32*14.16*103*0.875*(0.75)2=2230 >> 𝑀1 …ok!

14.16 2 ∗ 233.142
𝜌= [1 − √1 − ] = 0.00132 > 𝜌𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 0.00119
365.22 14.16 ∗ 103 ∗ 0.875 ∗ 0.752

𝐴𝑠 = 𝜌𝑏𝑑 = 0.00496 ∗ 875 ∗ 750 = 866.25𝑚𝑚2

Use ϕ14
𝐴𝑠 866.25
No. of bars =𝑎𝑠 = =5.62
154

Use 6
875 − 50 825
𝑠𝑝𝑎𝑐𝑖𝑛𝑔 = = = 165𝑐𝑚
(𝑛 − 1) 5
Use ϕ14 c/c 160cm
 Under column 2
Moment capacity of concrete
M= 0.32*𝑓𝑐𝑑 ∗ 𝑏 ∗ 𝑑 2
=0.32*14.16*103*1.25*(0.75)2=3186KNm > 𝑀2 …..ok!

14.16 2 ∗ 399.14
𝜌= [1 − √1 − ] = 0.0016 > 𝜌𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 0.00119
365.22 14.16 ∗ 103 ∗ 1.25 ∗ 0.752

𝐴𝑠 = 𝜌𝑏𝑑 = 0.0016 ∗ 1250 ∗ 750 = 1500𝑚𝑚2

Use ϕ14
𝐴𝑠 1500
No. of bars =𝑎𝑠 = = 9.74
154

Use 10

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 366

 B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

1250
𝑠𝑝𝑎𝑐𝑖𝑛𝑔 = = 138.8𝑚𝑚
9
Use ϕ14 c/c 130mm
The reinforcement between the two strips will be nominal reinforcement to prevent shrinkage
cracks
 Short direction
𝐴𝑠𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 𝜌𝑏𝑑 = 0.00119 ∗ 141 ∗ 750 = 125.8𝑐𝑚2
Use ϕ20
𝐴𝑠 12.58
No. of bars =𝑎𝑠 = = 4.008
3.14

Use 5
131
𝑠𝑝𝑎𝑐𝑖𝑛𝑔 = = 32.75𝑐𝑚 < 400𝑚𝑚
4
=32.75<400 mm (𝑆𝑚𝑎𝑥 for secondary bars)… ok
Use 5 ϕ 20 c/c 320mm
 Long direction
𝐴𝑠𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 𝜌𝑏𝑑 = 0.00119 ∗ 210 ∗ 75 = 18.74𝑐𝑚2
Use ϕ20
𝐴𝑠 18.74
No. of bars = = = 5.96
𝑎𝑠 3.14
Use 6 bars
210 − 10
𝑠𝑝𝑎𝑐𝑖𝑛𝑔 = = 40𝑐𝑚
5
=40cm < 500mm (𝑆𝑚𝑎𝑥 for secondary bars)… ok
Use 6 ϕ 20 c/c 400mm
vi. Development length
Short direction
 Under column 1
𝜙𝑓𝑦𝑑 2 ∗ 365.22
𝐼𝑏 = = = 182.6𝐶𝑚
4𝑓𝑏𝑑 4∗1
𝐼𝑎𝑣𝑎𝑙𝑎𝑏𝑙𝑒 = 125-5=120cm < 𝐼𝑑 bend the bars upward with a minimum length of 10cm

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 367

 B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

9.9. Design of Cf-2

Column 1 size 50x 30
Column 2 size 30x 50cm
An allowable presumptive bearing pressure = 280kpa
Assume f.s = 2
C30/37 , fck = 30 , fcd = 0.85*fck/1.5 = 17mpa

S 420 , fyk = 420MPa⇒ fyd = 420/1.15 = 365.22 MPa

i. Proportioning of footing

R = 1060KN +1348= 2408kN

RX’ = 1348*252⇒ X’ = (1348 *252)/2408 = 141.06cm

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 368

 B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

a = 2 ( X’ + 15) = 312 cm take 315

𝑅 2408
qult = = = 560
𝐴 3.15∗𝑏
Take b =1.5m
Actual contact pressure
𝑅 2408
•σ= = = 509.6 < 560 … … 𝑜𝑘!
𝑎𝑏 3.15∗1.5

Shear force and bending moment diagrams

Thickness of the footing
ii. Wide beam shear
The magnitude of the wide beam shear is read off from the shear force diagram at a distance of d
from the face of the column.

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 369

 B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

V = 764.4 (2.52 –0.75) ‐1060 =

V =292.98KN
Take d =0.6
V=677.48
The wide beam shear resistance according to EBCS-2 is given by
Vud = 0.25fctd k1k2 bwd (MN)
ρ = 0.5/fyk = 0.5 /420 = 0.00119
k1 = ( 1+50ρ) = (1 +50*0.00119) =1.06
k2 = 1.6 d =1.6 -0.25 = 1.35
Vud = 0.25*1*1.059*1*1.5*0.75
= 297.84 > 292.98…..ok!
iii. Punching shear

Perimeters- 𝑝𝑟1 =1.43+1.43+2.55 =5.41m

𝑝𝑟2 =1.86+1.86+2.75=6.47m
 Net shear force developed under column 1
𝑉1= 1060‐509.6*(1.43*2.55) = -798.26kN
 Net shear force developed under column 2
𝑉2 = 1348‐509.6* (1.86*2.75)= -1258.6kN
 Punching shear resistance
𝑉𝑈𝑃 = 0.25𝑓𝑐𝑡𝑑 𝑘1 𝑘2 ud (MN)
𝑢1 = 𝑝1=5.41m , 𝑢2 = 𝑝2 = 6.47m
 Punching shear resistance under column 1

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 370

 B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Vup = 0.25 *1000* 1.059*1*5.41*0.75=1074.2kN > V1… ok!

 Punching shear resistance under column 2
Vup = 0.25 *1000* 1.059*1*6.47*0.75=1284.7kN > V2………… ok!
Moment capacity of concrete
M= 0.32*𝑓𝑐𝑑 ∗ 𝑏 ∗ 𝑑 2
= 0.32 ∗ 14.16 ∗ 103 ∗ 1.5 ∗ 0.752 = 3820.32𝐾𝑁 − 𝑚 >> 𝑀𝑚𝑎𝑥 …ok!
iv. Calculation of reinforcement
 Long direction
𝑀𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 577.59 KN-m
𝑓 2𝑀
𝜌 = 𝑓 𝑐𝑑 [1 − √1 − 𝑓 2 ]
𝑦𝑑 𝑐𝑑 𝑏𝑑

14.16 2 ∗ 577.59
𝜌= [1 − √1 − ] = 0.00192 > 𝜌𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 0.00119
365.22 14.16 ∗ 103 ∗ 1.5 ∗ 0.752

𝐴𝑠 = 𝜌𝑏𝑑 = 0.00192 ∗ 1500 ∗ 750 = 2162.2𝑚𝑚2

Use ϕ20
𝐴𝑠 2162.2
No. of bars = = = 6.88
𝑎𝑠 314

Use 7 bars
1500−2∗50 1400
𝑠𝑝𝑎𝑐𝑖𝑛𝑔 = (𝑛−1)
= = 233.33mm
6

Use 7ϕ20 c/c 230mm

 Short direction
Effective width at exterior and interior columns being a+d/2 and a+d, respectively

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 371

 B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

 Contact pressure under columns 1 and 2

1060 1060
𝜎1 = 1.5∗0.675 = 1.0125 = 1046.9KN/m2
1348 1348𝐾𝑁
𝜎1 = 1.5∗1.25 = = 718.93KN/m2
1.875

 Developed Bending moment

1.35
𝑀1 = 1046.9 ∗ 1.35 ∗ 0.675 ∗ = 643.94KNm
2
1.25
𝑀2 = 718.93 ∗ 1.25 ∗ 1.25 ∗ = 1046.9KNm
2

v. Calculation of Reinforcements
 Under column 1
Moment capacity of concrete
M= 0.32*𝑓𝑐𝑑 ∗ 𝑏 ∗ 𝑑 2
=0.32*14.16*103*0.675*(0.75)2=1720.44 > 𝑀1 …..ok!

14.16 2 ∗ 643.94
𝜌= [1 − √1 − ] = 0.00496 > 𝜌𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 0.00119
365.22 14.16 ∗ 103 ∗ 0.675 ∗ 0.752

𝐴𝑠 = 𝜌𝑏𝑑 = 0.00496 ∗ 675 ∗ 750 = 2511.56𝑚𝑚2

Use ϕ20
𝐴𝑠 2511.56
No. of bars =𝑎𝑠 = = 7.99
314

Use 8
675 − 50 625
𝑠𝑝𝑎𝑐𝑖𝑛𝑔 = = = 89.28𝑐𝑚
(𝑛 − 1) 7
Use ϕ20 c/c 85cm
 Under column 2
Moment capacity of concrete
M= 0.32*𝑓𝑐𝑑 ∗ 𝑏 ∗ 𝑑 2
=0.32*14.16*103*1.25*(0.75)2=3186KNm > 𝑀2 …..ok!

14.16 2 ∗ 702.08
𝜌= [1 − √1 − ] = 0.00283 > 𝜌𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 0.00119
365.22 14.16 ∗ 103 ∗ 1.25 ∗ 0.752

𝐴𝑠 = 𝜌𝑏𝑑 = 0.00283 ∗ 1250 ∗ 750 = 2660.498𝑚𝑚2

Use ϕ20

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 372

 B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building
𝐴𝑠 2660.498
No. of bars =𝑎𝑠 = = 8.47
314

Use 9
1250
𝑠𝑝𝑎𝑐𝑖𝑛𝑔 = = 156.22𝑚𝑚
8
Use ϕ20 c/c 150mm
The reinforcement between the two strips will be nominal reinforcement to prevent shrinkage
cracks
 Short direction
𝐴𝑠𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 𝜌𝑏𝑑 = 0.00119 ∗ 137 ∗ 75 = 12.23𝑐𝑚2
Use ϕ16
𝐴𝑠 12.23
No. of bars =𝑎𝑠 = = 6.08
2.01

Use7
137
𝑠𝑝𝑎𝑐𝑖𝑛𝑔 = = 21.0𝑐𝑚
6
=21cm < 300mm (𝑆𝑚𝑎𝑥 for secondary bars)……. ok
Use 7 ϕ 16 c/c 210mm
 Long direction
𝐴𝑠𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 𝜌𝑏𝑑 = 0.00119 ∗ 150 ∗ 75 = 13.38𝑐𝑚2
Use ϕ16
𝐴𝑠 13.38
No. of bars =𝑎𝑠 = = 6.65
2.01

Use7
150 − 10
𝑠𝑝𝑎𝑐𝑖𝑛𝑔 = = 23.3𝑐𝑚
6
=23.3cm < 500mm (𝑆𝑚𝑎𝑥 for secondary bars)……. ok
Use 7 ϕ 16 c/c 230mm
vi. Development length
Short direction
 Under column 1
𝜙𝑓𝑦𝑑 2 ∗ 365.22
𝐼𝑏 = = = 182.6𝐶𝑚
4𝑓𝑏𝑑 4∗1

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 373

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Available development length lavailable = 135.5 = 130 < Id bend the bars upward with a
minimum length of 10cm
 Under column 2
𝜙𝑓𝑦𝑑 2 ∗ 365.22
𝐼𝑏 = = = 182.6𝐶𝑚
4𝑓𝑏𝑑 4∗1
𝐼𝑎𝑣𝑎𝑙𝑎𝑏𝑙𝑒 = 125-5=120cm < 𝐼𝑑 bend the bars upward with a minimum length of 10cm

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 374

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 375

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 376

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 377

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 378

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 379

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 380

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 381

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 382

 B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

CHAPTER TEN
ANALYSIS AND DESIGN OF RETAINING WALL
10.1. Introduction
It is a structure used to retain a portion of earth or any other material, where prevailing condition
do not allow assuming its natural slope. Retaining Walls are structures used to retain mass of
earth at any other material where prevailing conditions do not allow the mass to assume its
natural slope.
Retaining walls may be classified according to how they produce stability as:
 Gravity wall
 Cantilever wall
 Counterfort walls
 Buttress walls
i. Gravity walls:-
 Made of plain concrete or stone masonry
 Depends upon its weight for stability
 Trapezoidal in section with the base projecting beyond the face and back of the wall.
 No tensile stress in any portion of the wall
 Economically used for walls less than 6m high

ii. Cantilever walls

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 383

 B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

 Made of reinforced concrete material

 Inverted T-shaped in section with each projecting acts as a cantilever
 Economically used for walls greater than 6 to 7.5m high

iii. Counterfort walls

 Made of reinforced concrete materials
 Consists of cantilever wall with vertical brackets known as counterfort placed behind face
of wall
 Ordinarily used for walls height greater than 6.0m

iv. Buttress walls

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 384

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

 Same as counterfort except that the vertical brackets are on the opposite side of the
backfill

10.2. Forces on Retaining Walls

The forces that should be considered in the design of retaining walls include:
 Active and passive earth pressures
 Dead weight including the weight of the wall and portion of soil mass that is considered
to act on the retaining structure
 Surcharge including live loads, if any
 Water pressure, if any
 Contact pressure under the base of the structure

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 385

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

10.3. Stability of Retaining Walls

Retaining walls should be designed to provide adequate stability against sliding, overturning,
foundation bearing failure and overall or deep foundation failure.
1) Sliding stability

2) Overturning Stability

If the line of action of the resultant force on wall acts within the middle third width of the base,
wall is safe against overturning.

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 386

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

3) Foundation stability

10.4. Retaining walls design procedures

For the complete analysis of retaining walls, it is common to follow the following steps:
i) The height, shape and type of the retaining wall should be selected according to
field requirements and prevailing building codes/EBCS/.
For this project the height of retaining is 4.2m and we select cantilever wall because Cantilever
walls of reinforced concrete are still fairly common in urban areas because they are less
susceptible to vandalism &often do not require select backfill. They are also used widely f
or basement walls and similar in buildings.
ii) All vertical loads, like weight of retaining wall, weight of earth mass, liv e load, etc.,
should be computed. The portion of the soil mass that should be considered as a part of
the vertical load depends upon the geometry of the wall.
iii) The active and passive pressures should be calculated. Normally one uses coulomb’s
Formulae for the computation.
iv) The additional thrust due to water pressure, if present, should be computed.
v) The total horizontal and vertical forces should be computed.

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 387

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

vi) The stability of the structure against overturning should be checked. The factor of
safety should not be less than 1.5. It should conform with the requirements of the
prevailing codes.
vii) The stability of the structure against sliding should be checked. A key must be provided
under the base of the wall to avoid sliding.

viii) The contact pressure distribution should be calculated. The calculated magnitudes
should then be compared with the allowable bearing capacity of the soil. If the calculated
value is found to exceed the allowable value, the base of the wall should be enlarged.
ix) The stability against deep foundation failure should be checked. The factor of safety
should be complying with code requirements. It should nevertheless be more than 1.5.
10.5. Retaining wall design
Usual practice in design of retaining wall is to assign a tentative dimension and check the overall
stability.
10.5.1. General proportioning of retaining wall

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 388

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Figure 10.1. General proportioning of retaining wall

 In our case, the basement height is 2.7m and the initial assumption of depth below the
grade beam equals to 1.5m.
H = 2.7+1.5m = 4.2m
B = 0.4H to 0.7H
= 0.4*4.2 to 0.7*4.2
= 1.68 to 2.94m use the average of two B = 2.5m
D = H/12 to H/10
= 4.2/12 to 4.2/10
= 0.35 to 0.42 use the average of two D = 0.4m
Take the tope thickness t = 25cm = 0.25m

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 389

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Figure 10.23. Proportioning of retaining wall

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 390

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Check for stability

1) Checking for overturning
The Rankine active earth pressure pa,
1
𝑃𝑎 = 𝛾1 𝐻21 𝐾𝑎
2
1 − 𝑠𝑖𝑛𝜙 1 − 𝑠𝑖𝑛28
𝑘𝑎 = = = 0.36
1 + 𝑠𝑖𝑛𝜙 1 + 𝑠𝑖𝑛28
1
𝑃𝑎 = 2 ∗ 18 ∗ 4.22 ∗ 0.36 = 57.15𝐾𝑁/𝑚
Passive pressure Pp
1
𝑃𝑝 = 2 𝛾2 𝐻22 𝐾𝑝
1+𝑠𝑖𝑛𝜙 1+𝑠𝑖𝑛0
𝑘𝑝 = 1−𝑠𝑖𝑛𝜙2 = 1−𝑠𝑖𝑛0 = 1
2

1 2
𝑃𝑎 = ∗ 19 ∗ 1.5 ∗ 0.36 = 21.38𝐾𝑁/𝑚
2

∑𝑀𝑅
𝐹𝑠𝑜𝑣𝑒𝑟𝑡𝑢𝑟𝑛𝑖𝑛𝑔 =
∑𝑀𝑂

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 391

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Procedure for calculating ΣMR

Weight/unit Moment arms Moment about Toe
Area
Section length (KN/m) measured from (KNm/m)
𝐴1 = 𝑏 ∗ ℎ
𝑊1 = 𝛾𝑐 ∗ 𝐴1 Toe (m) 𝑀𝑅 = 𝑊1 𝑋1
0.25
𝑋1 = 1 + = MR=23.75*1.125=
2
1 0.25*3.8=0.95 25*0.95=23.27
1.125 26.72

2 0.285 7.125 0.95 6.77

3 4.75 85.5 1.875 222.66
4 1 25 1.25 31.25
∑V=141.38 ∑MR225.05

𝐻 4.2
∑𝑀𝑂 = 𝑃𝑎 ∗ = 57.15 ∗ = 80.01𝐾𝑁𝑚/𝑚
3 3
∑𝑀𝑅 225.7
𝐹𝑠 = = = 2.81 > 2 … … 𝑂𝐾!
∑𝑀𝑂 80.01

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 392

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 393

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

CHAPTER ELEVEN
CONCLUSION AND RECOMMENDATION
11.1. Conclusion
In this final semester project of structural design of B+G + 5-hotel building, there were a lot of
obstacles and try to take these in order to come up with the most realistic and well organized
final document. Each part of the building had been analyzed and designed.
In design of this building, the three basic questions of design were being tried to address. These
structural members are economical, safe and workable with good aesthetics as per the standard
of our country building code.
In the structural analysis and design of this B+G+5 hotel building EN ES code was the main
and fundamental reference for any relevant assumptions carried out in this B.Sc. Thesis
papers. Besides gratitude for the editors, we conclude that they were thoroughly investigating the
actual physical and environmental future of the country incorporating with universally accepted
Engineering standards and formulae.
For the analysis and design of sub structures such as foundation, retaining wall bearing capacity
of the soil and parameters of the soil was taken from relevant assumption, but for actual
implementation it needs further soil exploration , field and laboratory test accordingly.
In the initial architectural drawing of this building the length of some cantilevers, is greater than
2m when we compute depth for deflection it was more than 300mm so by recommendation of
our advisor we reduce the length of cantilevers to 1.5m. and some columns was oriented in
wrong direction. We have also provide additional column on axis 7 to reduce the beam span and
to reduce the bending moment in the beam. We have taken deferent kinds of assumptions which
was unclear for us.
The intended slab type in this project is solid slab. Thesis type of slab has been used because
span length of all panels are less than six meter.
The Frame analysis is done by ETABS (2016) Software and the output is obtained by using
design manual method to design beams and columns. if this program is not available it would be
so difficult to complete this project with in this time constraint.
Check Lateral load including earth quake analysis by using manual method calculation or work
compared with ETABS (2016) Software out put our result is stable.

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 394

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

Finally, this final year project enables us to search and learn more than what have been discussed
through the class discussion. And helps to summarize what we have been learnt during the study.
It also gives a chance to develop working in teams, understanding with each other and develop
good interaction with those who are above them in knowledge and experience. Doing this
project, we enable to develop self-confidence up on that we learnt in class and introduce us with
the works that are done in the design office. We also develop the knowledge of Software’s such
as ETABS, AUTOCAD, and Microsoft word and excel.
11.2. Recommendation
 As we know, know a day every real analysis and design of buildings is done by using
different software’s. We as a team strongly suggest the School of civil engineering to focus
more on analysis and design of buildings using software’s. In addition, structural analysis
and design software’s such as ETABS, SAFE, SAP shall be included in the courses of civil
engineering students.
 To accomplish all the required components (parts) of the building or designed project
successfully, the full second semester should give for project.
 In order to have general understanding about the procedures and preparation of the
project, the department should give orientation for the students.
 To make the students rich in information, there should be internet access in the computer
room.
 It is better if the project incorporating design of all types of slab like ribbed and flat slab. and
design of steel structures. In order to take and understand all the actual design phenomena.

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 395

B.Sc. thesis on structural analysis and design of B+G+5 R.C building

REFERENCE
1. EN ES 1990:2015: Basis of Structural Design.
2. EN ES 1991-1-1:2015 Actions on structures. Part 1-1: General actions – Densities, self-
weight and imposed loads for buildings.
3. ES EN 1992-1-1:2005. Design of concrete structures. Part 1-1, 1.2, 1.4, 1.5, 1.7: General
rules and rules for buildings.
4. EN ES 1991-1-4:2015.Action on structures- General Actions- part1-1: Wind Action.
5. ES EN 7:1997:2015 Design of Foundation (Part 1)
6. ES EN 8: 1998:2015 Design of Structures for Earthquake Resistance _ Part 1: General
rules seismic action and rules for buildings.
7. Different senior structural analysis and design project reports.

[DILLA UNIVERSITY][ETHIOPIA] Page 396